This is a modern-English version of A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms: Being an account by the Chinese monk Fa-hsien of travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399-414) in search of the Buddhist books of discipline, originally written by Faxian.
It has been thoroughly updated, including changes to sentence structure, words, spelling,
and grammar—to ensure clarity for contemporary readers, while preserving the original spirit and nuance. If
you click on a paragraph, you will see the original text that we modified, and you can toggle between the two versions.
Scroll to the bottom of this page and you will find a free ePUB download link for this book.
![[Illustration]](images/cover.jpg)
A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms
Being an Account by the Chinese Monk Fâ-Hien
of his Travels in India and Ceylon (A.D. 399-414)
in Search of the Buddhist Books of Discipline
Translated and annotated with a Corean recension of the Chinese text
BY JAMES LEGGE
Contents
PREFACE
Several times during my long residence in Hong Kong I endeavoured to read through the “Narrative of Fâ-Hien;” but though interested with the graphic details of much of the work, its columns bristled so constantly—now with his phonetic representations of Sanskrit words, and now with his substitution for them of their meanings in Chinese characters, and I was, moreover, so much occupied with my own special labours on the Confucian Classics, that my success was far from satisfactory. When Dr. Eitel’s “Handbook for the Student of Chinese Buddhism” appeared in 1870, the difficulty occasioned by the Sanskrit words and names was removed, but the other difficulty remained; and I was not able to look into the book again for several years. Nor had I much inducement to do so in the two copies of it which I had been able to procure, on poor paper, and printed from blocks badly cut at first, and so worn with use as to yield books the reverse of attractive in their appearance to the student.
Several times during my long stay in Hong Kong, I tried to read through the “Narrative of Fâ-Hien.” While I was intrigued by many details in the text, it was constantly interrupted—first by his phonetic spellings of Sanskrit words, and then by his substitutions of those words with their meanings in Chinese characters. Additionally, I was so focused on my own work with the Confucian Classics that I wasn’t very successful in getting through it. When Dr. Eitel’s “Handbook for the Student of Chinese Buddhism” came out in 1870, it solved the issue with the Sanskrit words and names, but the other problems remained. I wasn’t able to revisit the book for several years. Plus, I didn’t feel motivated to do so with the two copies I managed to get, which were on low-quality paper and printed from poorly cut blocks that had become so worn out that they didn’t look appealing to a student.
In the meantime I kept studying the subject of Buddhism from various sources; and in 1878 began to lecture, here in Oxford, on the Travels with my Davis Chinese scholar, who was at the same time Boden Sanskrit scholar. As we went on, I wrote out a translation in English for my own satisfaction of nearly half the narrative. In the beginning of last year I made Fâ-Hien again the subject of lecture, wrote out a second translation, independent of the former, and pushed on till I had completed the whole.
In the meantime, I continued to study Buddhism from different sources, and in 1878, I started giving lectures here in Oxford about my travels with my Chinese scholar, who was also the Boden Sanskrit scholar. As we progressed, I wrote an English translation for my own enjoyment of nearly half the narrative. At the start of last year, I once again made Fâ-Hien the topic of a lecture, created a second translation that was independent of the first, and worked until I had completed the entire thing.
The want of a good and clear text had been supplied by my friend, Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio, who sent to me from Japan a copy, the text of which is appended to the translation and notes, and of the nature of which some account is given in the Introduction, and towards the end of this Preface.
The lack of a good and clear text was addressed by my friend, Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio, who sent me a copy from Japan. The text is included with the translation and notes, and there's a description of it in the Introduction and towards the end of this Preface.
The present work consists of three parts: the Translation of Fâ-Hien’s Narrative of his Travels; copious Notes; and the Chinese Text of my copy from Japan.
The current work is divided into three parts: the Translation of Fâ-Hien’s Narrative of his Travels; extensive Notes; and the Chinese Text from my copy in Japan.
It is for the Translation that I hold myself more especially responsible. Portions of it were written out three times, and the whole of it twice. While preparing my own version I made frequent reference to previous translations:—those of M. Abel Rémusat, “Revu, complété, et augmenté d’éclaircissements nouveaux par MM. Klaproth et Landress” (Paris, 1836); of the Rev. Samuel Beal (London, 1869), and his revision of it, prefixed to his “Buddhist Records of the Western World” (Trübner’s Oriental Series, 1884); and of Mr. Herbert A. Giles, of H.M.’s Consular Service in China (1877). To these I have to add a series of articles on “Fa-hsien and his English Translators,” by Mr. T. Watters, British Consul at Î-Chang (China Review, 1879, 1880). Those articles are of the highest value, displaying accuracy of Chinese scholarship and an extensive knowledge of Buddhism. I have regretted that Mr. Watters, while reviewing others, did not himself write out and publish a version of the whole of Fâ-Hien’s narrative. If he had done so, I should probably have thought that, on the whole, nothing more remained to be done for the distinguished Chinese pilgrim in the way of translation. Mr. Watters had to judge of the comparative merits of the versions of Beal and Giles, and pronounce on the many points of contention between them. I have endeavoured to eschew those matters, and have seldom made remarks of a critical nature in defence of renderings of my own.
I take special responsibility for the Translation. Parts of it have been written out three times, and the entire thing twice. While preparing my own version, I frequently referred to earlier translations: M. Abel Rémusat's “Revu, complété, et augmenté d’éclaircissements nouveaux par MM. Klaproth et Landress” (Paris, 1836); the Rev. Samuel Beal's (London, 1869) and his revision that prefaced his “Buddhist Records of the Western World” (Trübner’s Oriental Series, 1884); and Mr. Herbert A. Giles from H.M.’s Consular Service in China (1877). I also have to mention a series of articles on “Fa-hsien and his English Translators” by Mr. T. Watters, British Consul at Î-Chang (China Review, 1879, 1880). These articles are extremely valuable, showcasing accurate Chinese scholarship and a deep understanding of Buddhism. I regret that Mr. Watters, while reviewing others, did not write and publish a version of the entire narrative of Fâ-Hien himself. If he had, I would probably have thought that there was nothing more to be done for the esteemed Chinese pilgrim in terms of translation. Mr. Watters evaluated the relative merits of the versions by Beal and Giles and addressed the various contentious points between them. I have tried to avoid those matters and have rarely made critical comments to defend my own translations.
The Chinese narrative runs on without any break. It was Klaproth who divided Rémusat’s translation into forty chapters. The division is helpful to the reader, and I have followed it excepting in three or four instances. In the reprinted Chinese text the chapters are separated by a circle in the column.
The Chinese story flows continuously. It was Klaproth who split Rémusat’s translation into forty chapters. This division is useful for the reader, and I've mostly stuck to it, except in three or four cases. In the reprinted Chinese text, the chapters are marked by a circle in the column.
In transliterating the names of Chinese characters I have generally followed the spelling of Morrison rather than the Pekinese, which is now in vogue. We cannot tell exactly what the pronunciation of them was, about fifteen hundred years ago, in the time of Fâ-Hien; but the southern mandarin must be a shade nearer to it than that of Peking at the present day. In transliterating the Indian names I have for the most part followed Dr. Eitel, with such modification as seemed good and in harmony with growing usage.
In transliterating the names of Chinese characters, I’ve mostly used Morrison's spelling instead of the current Peking style. We can’t know exactly how they were pronounced around fifteen hundred years ago, during Fâ-Hien's time, but the southern Mandarin must be a bit closer to it than today’s Peking pronunciation. For the Indian names, I’ve mostly followed Dr. Eitel, with some adjustments that felt appropriate and in line with evolving usage.
For the Notes I can do little more than claim the merit of selection and condensation. My first object in them was to explain what in the text required explanation to an English reader. All Chinese texts, and Buddhist texts especially, are new to foreign students. One has to do for them what many hundreds of the ablest scholars in Europe have done for the Greek and Latin Classics during several hundred years, and what the thousands of critics and commentators have been doing of our Sacred Scriptures for nearly eighteen centuries. There are few predecessors in the field of Chinese literature into whose labours translators of the present century can enter. This will be received, I hope, as a sufficient apology for the minuteness and length of some of the notes. A second object in them was to teach myself first, and then others, something of the history and doctrines of Buddhism. I have thought that they might be learned better in connexion with a lively narrative like that of Fâ-Hien than by reading didactic descriptions and argumentative books. Such has been my own experience. The books which I have consulted for these notes have been many, besides Chinese works. My principal help has been the full and masterly handbook of Eitel, mentioned already, and often referred to as E.H. Spence Hardy’s “Eastern Monachism” (E.M.) and “Manual of Buddhism” (M.B.) have been constantly in hand, as well as Rhys Davids’ Buddhism, published by the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, his Hibbert Lectures, and his Buddhist Suttas in the Sacred Books of the East, and other writings. I need not mention other authorities, having endeavoured always to specify them where I make use of them. My proximity and access to the Bodleian Library and the Indian Institute have been of great advantage.
For the notes, I can do little more than take credit for selecting and condensing the information. My main goal was to clarify what needed explaining for an English reader. All Chinese texts, especially Buddhist ones, are new to foreign students. We have to do for them what many hundreds of the best scholars in Europe have done for Greek and Latin classics over several centuries, and what countless critics and commentators have been doing with our Sacred Scriptures for nearly eighteen centuries. There are few predecessors in the realm of Chinese literature that modern translators can follow. I hope this serves as a sufficient excuse for the detail and length of some of the notes. Another purpose of these notes was to teach myself first, and then others, about the history and doctrines of Buddhism. I believe it’s easier to learn through an engaging narrative like that of Fâ-Hien than through didactic descriptions and argumentative texts. That has been my own experience. I’ve consulted many books for these notes, in addition to Chinese works. My main source has been Eitel’s comprehensive and outstanding handbook, which I've already mentioned, along with Spence Hardy’s “Eastern Monachism” (E.M.) and “Manual of Buddhism” (M.B.), which I’ve constantly referred to, as well as Rhys Davids’ Buddhism, published by the Society for Promoting Christian Knowledge, his Hibbert Lectures, his Buddhist Suttas in the Sacred Books of the East, and other writings. I won’t list other references here since I’ve tried to specify them whenever I used them. My close proximity to and access to the Bodleian Library and the Indian Institute has been a great advantage.
I may be allowed to say that, so far as my own study of it has gone, I think there are many things in the vast field of Buddhist literature which still require to be carefully handled. How far, for instance, are we entitled to regard the present Sûtras as genuine and sufficiently accurate copies of those which were accepted by the Councils before our Christian era? Can anything be done to trace the rise of the legends and marvels of Sâkyamuni’s history, which were current so early (as it seems to us) as the time of Fâ-Hien, and which startle us so frequently by similarities between them and narratives in our Gospels? Dr. Hermann Oldenberg, certainly a great authority on Buddhistic subjects, says that “a biography of Buddha has not come down to us from ancient times, from the age of the Pâli texts; and, we can safely say, no such biography existed then” (“Buddha—His Life, His Doctrine, His Order,” as translated by Hoey, p. 78). He has also (in the same work, pp. 99, 416, 417) come to the conclusion that the hitherto unchallenged tradition that the Buddha was “a king’s son” must be given up. The name “king’s son” (in Chinese {...}), always used of the Buddha, certainly requires to be understood in the highest sense. I am content myself to wait for further information on these and other points, as the result of prolonged and careful research.
I think I can say that, based on my own study, there are many aspects of Buddhist literature that still need to be carefully examined. For example, how can we determine whether the current Sûtras are genuine and accurate copies of those accepted by the Councils before the Christian era? Is it possible to trace the origins of the legends and wonders surrounding Sâkyamuni’s history, which were already known during the time of Fâ-Hien, and often surprise us with their similarities to stories in our Gospels? Dr. Hermann Oldenberg, a recognized authority on Buddhist topics, states that “a biography of Buddha has not come down to us from ancient times, from the age of the Pâli texts; and we can safely say, no such biography existed then” (“Buddha—His Life, His Doctrine, His Order,” translated by Hoey, p. 78). He has also concluded that the long-established tradition stating that the Buddha was “a king’s son” must be reconsidered (in the same work, pp. 99, 416, 417). The term “king’s son” (in Chinese {...}), always used to refer to the Buddha, certainly needs to be interpreted in the most profound sense. I'm willing to wait for more information on these and other issues as a result of extended and careful research.
Dr. Rhys Davids has kindly read the proofs of the Translation and Notes, and I most certainly thank him for doing so, for his many valuable corrections in the Notes, and for other suggestions which I have received from him. I may not always think on various points exactly as he does, but I am not more forward than he is to say with Horace,—
Dr. Rhys Davids has generously reviewed the proofs of the Translation and Notes, and I definitely thank him for this, along with his numerous helpful corrections in the Notes and other suggestions I’ve received from him. I might not always agree with him on various points, but I'm no more hesitant than he is to say with Horace,—
“Nullius addictus jurare in verba magistri.”
“I'm not bound to swear by the words of the master.”
I have referred above, and also in the Introduction, to the Corean text of Fâ-Hien’s narrative, which I received from Mr. Nanjio. It is on the whole so much superior to the better-known texts, that I determined to attempt to reproduce it at the end of the little volume, so far as our resources here in Oxford would permit. To do so has not been an easy task. The two fonts of Chinese types in the Clarendon Press were prepared primarily for printing the translation of our Sacred Scriptures, and then extended so as to be available for printing also the Confucian Classics; but the Buddhist work necessarily requires many types not found in them, while many other characters in the Corean recension are peculiar in their forms, and some are what Chinese dictionaries denominate “vulgar.” That we have succeeded so well as we have done is owing chiefly to the intelligence, ingenuity, and untiring attention of Mr. J. C. Pembrey, the Oriental Reader.
I mentioned earlier, as well as in the Introduction, the Korean text of Fâ-Hien’s story, which I got from Mr. Nanjio. Overall, it’s much better than the more popular texts, so I decided to try to reproduce it at the end of this little volume, as much as our resources here in Oxford would allow. It hasn’t been an easy task. The two Chinese typefaces at the Clarendon Press were mainly designed for printing our Sacred Scriptures, and were then expanded to also print the Confucian Classics; however, the Buddhist work requires many types that aren’t included, and some characters in the Korean version are unique in their designs, with others being classified as “vulgar” by Chinese dictionaries. The fact that we’ve managed to achieve as much as we have is largely due to the intelligence, creativity, and tireless effort of Mr. J. C. Pembrey, the Oriental Reader.
The pictures that have been introduced were taken from a superb edition of a History of Buddha, republished recently at Hang-châu in Cheh-kiang, and profusely illustrated in the best style of Chinese art. I am indebted for the use of it to the Rev. J. H. Sedgwick, University Chinese Scholar.
The images that have been presented come from a wonderful edition of a History of Buddha, which was recently republished in Hangzhou, Zhejiang, and is richly illustrated in the finest style of Chinese art. I'm grateful to the Rev. J. H. Sedgwick, a Chinese scholar at the university, for allowing me to use it.
JAMES LEGGE.
JAMES LEGGE.
Oxford:
June, 1886.
Oxford:
June 1886.
The accompanying Sketch-Map, taken in connexion with the notes on the different places in the Narrative, will give the reader a sufficiently accurate knowledge of Fâ-Hien’s route.
The accompanying Sketch-Map, along with the notes on the various locations in the Narrative, will provide the reader with a clear understanding of Fâ-Hien’s route.
There is no difficulty in laying it down after he crossed the Indus from east to west into the Punjâb, all the principal places, at which he touched or rested, having been determined by Cunningham and other Indian geographers and archaeologists. Most of the places from Ch’ang-an to Bannu have also been identified. Woo-e has been put down as near Kutcha, or Kuldja, in 43° 25′ N., 81° 15′ E. The country of K’ieh-ch’a was probably Ladak, but I am inclined to think that the place where the traveller crossed the Indus and entered it must have been further east than Skardo. A doubt is intimated on page 24 as to the identification of T’o-leih with Darada, but Greenough’s “Physical and Geological Sketch-Map of British India” shows “Dardu Proper,” all lying on the east of the Indus, exactly in the position where the Narrative would lead us to place it. The point at which Fâ-Hien recrossed the Indus into Udyâna on the west of it is unknown. Takshasila, which he visited, was no doubt on the west of the river, and has been incorrectly accepted as the Taxila of Arrian in the Punjâb. It should be written Takshasira, of which the Chinese phonetisation will allow;—see a note of Beal in his “Buddhist Records of the Western World,” i. 138.
There’s no difficulty in outlining it after he crossed the Indus from east to west into the Punjab, with all the main places where he stopped or rested being identified by Cunningham and other Indian geographers and archaeologists. Most locations from Ch’ang-an to Bannu have also been pinpointed. Woo-e is thought to be near Kutcha, or Kuldja, at 43° 25′ N., 81° 15′ E. The region of K’ieh-ch’a was probably Ladak, but I believe the spot where the traveler crossed the Indus must have been further east than Skardo. There’s a question raised on page 24 about identifying T’o-leih with Darada, but Greenough’s “Physical and Geological Sketch-Map of British India” shows “Dardu Proper,” all situated east of the Indus, exactly where the Narrative suggests it should be. The exact location where Fâ-Hien recrossed the Indus into Udyâna on the west side is unknown. Takshasila, which he visited, was certainly on the west side of the river and has been wrongly accepted as the Taxila of Arrian in the Punjab. It should be spelled Takshasira, which the Chinese phonetics will support;—see a note by Beal in his “Buddhist Records of the Western World,” i. 138.
We must suppose that Fâ-Hien went on from Nan-king to Ch’ang-an, but the Narrative does not record the fact of his doing so.
We should assume that Fâ-Hien traveled from Nan-king to Ch’ang-an, but the Narrative does not mention this.
INTRODUCTION
Life of Fâ-Hien; Genuineness and Integrity of the Text of his Narrative; Number of the Adherents of Buddhism.
Life of Fâ-Hien; Authenticity and Honesty of the Text of his Account; Number of the Followers of Buddhism.
1. Nothing of great importance is known about Fâ-Hien in addition to what may be gathered from his own record of his travels. I have read the accounts of him in the “Memoirs of Eminent Monks,” compiled in A.D. 519, and a later work, the “Memoirs of Marvellous Monks,” by the third emperor of the Ming dynasty (A.D. 1403-1424), which, however, is nearly all borrowed from the other; and all in them that has an appearance of verisimilitude can be brought within brief compass.
1. Not much is known about Fâ-Hien beyond what we can gather from his own travel records. I’ve read the accounts of him in the “Memoirs of Eminent Monks,” compiled in A.D. 519, and a later work, the “Memoirs of Marvellous Monks,” by the third emperor of the Ming dynasty (A.D. 1403-1424), which mostly relies on the former; and everything in them that seems believable can be summarized briefly.
His surname, they tell us, was Kung, and he was a native of Wû-yang in P’ing-Yang, which is still the name of a large department in Shan-hsi. He had three brothers older than himself; but when they all died before shedding their first teeth, his father devoted him to the service of the Buddhist society, and had him entered as a Sramanera, still keeping him at home in the family. The little fellow fell dangerously ill, and the father sent him to the monastery, where he soon got well and refused to return to his parents.
His last name was Kung, and he was from Wû-yang in P’ing-Yang, which is still the name of a large area in Shan-hsi. He had three older brothers, but when they all died before losing their first baby teeth, his father dedicated him to the Buddhist community and had him registered as a Sramanera while still keeping him at home. The young boy became seriously ill, so his father sent him to the monastery, where he quickly recovered and chose not to go back to his parents.
When he was ten years old, his father died; and an uncle, considering the widowed solitariness and helplessness of the mother, urged him to renounce the monastic life, and return to her, but the boy replied, “I did not quit the family in compliance with my father’s wishes, but because I wished to be far from the dust and vulgar ways of life. This is why I chose monkhood.” The uncle approved of his words and gave over urging him. When his mother also died, it appeared how great had been the affection for her of his fine nature; but after her burial he returned to the monastery.
When he was ten, his father passed away, and an uncle, seeing how alone and helpless his mother was, encouraged him to give up the monastic life and go back to her. But the boy replied, “I didn't leave my family because it was what my father wanted; I chose this life to escape the dirt and the common ways of life. That’s why I became a monk.” The uncle respected his decision and stopped pushing him. When his mother died as well, it showed just how deeply he cared for her. However, after her funeral, he went back to the monastery.
On one occasion he was cutting rice with a score or two of his fellow-disciples, when some hungry thieves came upon them to take away their grain by force. The other Sramaneras all fled, but our young hero stood his ground, and said to the thieves, “If you must have the grain, take what you please. But, Sirs, it was your former neglect of charity which brought you to your present state of destitution; and now, again, you wish to rob others. I am afraid that in the coming ages you will have still greater poverty and distress;—I am sorry for you beforehand.” With these words he followed his companions into the monastery, while the thieves left the grain and went away, all the monks, of whom there were several hundred, doing homage to his conduct and courage.
One time, he was cutting rice with a couple dozen of his fellow disciples when some hungry thieves showed up to steal their grain. The other monks all ran away, but our young hero stood his ground and said to the thieves, “If you need the grain, take as much as you want. But, gentlemen, it was your earlier lack of charity that led you to your current situation; and now, once again, you want to rob others. I worry that in the future you’ll face even greater poverty and suffering; I feel sorry for you in advance.” With those words, he followed his companions back to the monastery, while the thieves left the grain and walked away, and all the monks, who numbered in the hundreds, honored his bravery and actions.
When he had finished his noviciate and taken on him the obligations of the full Buddhist orders, his earnest courage, clear intelligence, and strict regulation of his demeanour were conspicuous; and soon after, he undertook his journey to India in search of complete copies of the Vinaya-pitaka. What follows this is merely an account of his travels in India and return to China by sea, condensed from his own narrative, with the addition of some marvellous incidents that happened to him, on his visit to the Vulture Peak near Rajagriha.
When he completed his training and accepted the responsibilities of the full Buddhist orders, his sincere bravery, clear thinking, and disciplined behavior stood out; soon after, he set off for India in search of complete copies of the Vinaya-pitaka. What comes next is just a summary of his travels in India and his journey back to China by sea, condensed from his own story, along with some amazing incidents that occurred during his visit to Vulture Peak near Rajagriha.
It is said in the end that after his return to China, he went to the capital (evidently Nanking), and there, along with the Indian Sramana Buddha-bhadra, executed translations of some of the works which he had obtained in India; and that before he had done all that he wished to do in this way, he removed to King-chow (in the present Hoo-pih), and died in the monastery of Sin, at the age of eighty-eight, to the great sorrow of all who knew him. It is added that there is another larger work giving an account of his travels in various countries.
It’s said that after he returned to China, he went to the capital (likely Nanking), and there, together with the Indian monk Buddha-bhadra, translated some of the texts he had acquired in India. Before he could complete everything he planned in this effort, he moved to King-chow (now in Hoo-pih) and passed away in the Sin monastery at the age of eighty-eight, causing great sadness among those who knew him. There’s also mentioned a larger work that details his travels in different countries.
Such is all the information given about our author, beyond what he himself has told us. Fâ-Hien was his clerical name, and means “Illustrious in the Law,” or “Illustrious master of the Law.” The Shih which often precedes it is an abbreviation of the name of Buddha as Sâkyamuni, “the Sakya, mighty in Love, dwelling in Seclusion and Silence,” and may be taken as equivalent to Buddhist. It is sometimes said to have belonged to “the eastern Tsin dynasty” (A.D. 317-419), and sometimes to “the Sung,” that is, the Sung dynasty of the House of Liu (A.D. 420-478). If he became a full monk at the age of twenty, and went to India when he was twenty-five, his long life may have been divided pretty equally between the two dynasties.
This is all the information we have about our author, aside from what he shared himself. Fâ-Hien was his monastic name, which means “Illustrious in the Law” or “Illustrious master of the Law.” The term Shih that often comes before it is a shorthand for the name of Buddha as Sâkyamuni, “the Sakya, mighty in Love, living in Seclusion and Silence,” and can be understood as equivalent to Buddhist. It is sometimes mentioned that he belonged to “the eastern Tsin dynasty” (A.D. 317-419) and sometimes to “the Sung,” referring to the Sung dynasty of the House of Liu (A.D. 420-478). If he became a fully ordained monk at the age of twenty and traveled to India when he was twenty-five, his long life may have been roughly split between the two dynasties.
2. If there were ever another and larger account of Fâ-Hien’s travels than the narrative of which a translation is now given, it has long ceased to be in existence.
2. If there was ever a bigger account of Fâ-Hien’s travels than the story we’re translating now, it has long been lost.
In the Catalogue of the imperial library of the Suy dynasty (A.D. 589-618), the name Fâ-Hien occurs four times. Towards the end of the last section of it (page 22), after a reference to his travels, his labours in translation at Kin-ling (another name for Nanking), in conjunction with Buddha-bhadra, are described. In the second section, page 15, we find “A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms;”—with a note, saying that it was the work of the “Sramana, Fâ-Hien;” and again, on page 13, we have “Narrative of Fâ-Hien in two Books,” and “Narrative of Fâ-Hien’s Travels in one Book.” But all these three entries may possibly belong to different copies of the same work, the first and the other two being in separate subdivisions of the Catalogue.
In the Catalogue of the imperial library of the Suy dynasty (A.D. 589-618), the name Fâ-Hien appears four times. Toward the end of the last section (page 22), after mentioning his travels, his translation work at Kin-ling (another name for Nanking), alongside Buddha-bhadra, is described. In the second section, page 15, we find “A Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms;”—with a note stating that it was written by the “Sramana, Fâ-Hien;” and again, on page 13, there’s “Narrative of Fâ-Hien in two Books,” and “Narrative of Fâ-Hien’s Travels in one Book.” However, all three entries might be different copies of the same work, with the first and the other two listed in separate subdivisions of the Catalogue.
In the two Chinese copies of the narrative in my possession the title is “Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms.” In the Japanese or Corean recension subjoined to this translation, the title is twofold; first, “Narrative of the Distinguished Monk, Fâ-Hien;” and then, more at large, “Incidents of Travels in India, by the Sramana of the Eastern Tsin, Fâ-Hien, recorded by himself.”
In the two Chinese versions of the narrative that I have, the title is "Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms." In the Japanese or Korean version attached to this translation, the title has two parts: first, "Narrative of the Distinguished Monk, Fâ-Hien;" and then more specifically, "Incidents of Travels in India, by the Sramana of the Eastern Tsin, Fâ-Hien, recorded by himself."
There is still earlier attestation of the existence of our little work than the Suy Catalogue. The Catalogue Raisonné of the imperial library of the present dynasty (chap. 71) mentions two quotations from it by Le Tao-yuen, a geographical writer of the dynasty of the Northern Wei (A.D. 386-584), one of them containing 89 characters, and the other 276; both of them given as from the “Narrative of Fâ-Hien.”
There is earlier evidence of our little work's existence than the Suy Catalogue. The Catalogue Raisonné of the current dynasty's imperial library (chap. 71) mentions two quotes from it by Le Tao-yuen, a geographical writer from the Northern Wei dynasty (A.D. 386-584). One quote has 89 characters, and the other has 276; both are referenced as being from the “Narrative of Fâ-Hien.”
In all catalogues subsequent to that of Suy our work appears. The evidence for its authenticity and genuineness is all that could be required. It is clear to myself that the “Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms” and the “Narrative of his Travels by Fâ-Hien” were designations of one and the same work, and that it is doubtful whether any larger work on the same subject was ever current. With regard to the text subjoined to my translation, it was published in Japan in 1779. The editor had before him four recensions of the narrative; those of the Sung and Ming dynasties, with appendixes on the names of certain characters in them; that of Japan; and that of Corea. He wisely adopted the Corean text, published in accordance with a royal rescript in 1726, so far as I can make out; but the different readings of the other texts are all given in top-notes, instead of foot-notes as with us, this being one of the points in which customs in the east and west go by contraries. Very occasionally, the editor indicates by a single character, equivalent to “right” or “wrong,” which reading in his opinion is to be preferred. In the notes to the present republication of the Corean text, S stands for Sung, M for Ming, and J for Japanese; R for right, and W for wrong. I have taken the trouble to give all the various readings (amounting to more than 300), partly as a curiosity and to make my text complete, and partly to show how, in the transcription of writings in whatever language, such variations are sure to occur,
In all catalogs following Suy, our work is listed. The proof of its authenticity and legitimacy is all that could be needed. It’s clear to me that the “Record of Buddhistic Kingdoms” and the “Narrative of his Travels by Fâ-Hien” refer to the same work, and it’s uncertain if any larger work on the same topic was ever widely known. Regarding the text attached to my translation, it was published in Japan in 1779. The editor had four versions of the narrative to refer to: those from the Sung and Ming dynasties, along with appendixes on the names of specific characters; the Japanese version; and the Korean version. He wisely chose to adopt the Korean text, which was published under a royal decree in 1726, as far as I can tell; however, the other text variations are presented in top-notes rather than foot-notes as we do, illustrating a difference in customs between East and West. Occasionally, the editor marks a single character, meaning “right” or “wrong,” to indicate which reading he believes is preferable. In the notes for this new publication of the Korean text, S stands for Sung, M for Ming, and J for Japanese; R means right, and W means wrong. I’ve made an effort to include all the different readings (over 300 total), partly for curiosity’s sake and to make my text complete, and partly to demonstrate how such variations are inevitable when transcribing writings in any language.
“maculae, quas aut incuria fudit,
Aut humana parum cavit nature,”
“the spots, which either carelessness spread,
Or human nature was too careless to guard,”
while on the whole they very slightly affect the meaning of the document.
while overall they have a minimal impact on the meaning of the document.
The editors of the Catalogue Raisonné intimate their doubts of the good taste and reliability of all Fâ-Hien’s statements. It offends them that he should call central India the “Middle Kingdom,” and China, which to them was the true and only Middle Kingdom, but “a Border land;”—it offends them as the vaunting language of a Buddhist writer, whereas the reader will see in the expressions only an instance of what Fâ-Hien calls his “simple straightforwardness.”
The editors of the Catalogue Raisonné express their doubts about the good taste and reliability of all of Fâ-Hien’s statements. They’re offended that he refers to central India as the “Middle Kingdom,” while calling China, which they believe to be the true and only Middle Kingdom, merely a “Border land.” They find his language arrogant for a Buddhist writer, while the reader might see these phrases as just an example of what Fâ-Hien describes as his “simple straightforwardness.”
As an instance of his unreliability they refer to his account of the Buddhism of Khoten, whereas it is well known, they say, that the Khoteners from ancient times till now have been Mohammedans;—as if they could have been so 170 years before Mohammed was born, and 222 years before the year of the Hegira! And this is criticism in China. The Catalogue was ordered by the K’ien-lung emperor in 1722. Between three and four hundred of the “Great Scholars” of the empire were engaged on it in various departments, and thus egregiously ignorant did they show themselves of all beyond the limits of their own country, and even of the literature of that country itself.
As an example of his unreliability, they point to his description of Buddhism in Khoten, claiming that the people of Khoten have been Muslims since ancient times. But they conveniently ignore that this would mean they were Muslims 170 years before Muhammad was born and 222 years before the start of the Islamic calendar! And this is what passes for criticism in China. The Catalogue was commissioned by the Qianlong emperor in 1722. Between three and four hundred of the "Great Scholars" of the empire worked on it in different areas, and their ignorance of everything outside their own country, and even of their own country's literature, was glaringly obvious.
Much of what Fâ-Hien tells his readers of Buddhist miracles and legends is indeed unreliable and grotesque; but we have from him the truth as to what he saw and heard.
Much of what Fâ-Hien shares with his readers about Buddhist miracles and legends is definitely unreliable and bizarre; however, we do get the truth about what he saw and heard.
3. In concluding this introduction I wish to call attention to some estimates of the number of Buddhists in the world which have become current, believing, as I do, that the smallest of them is much above what is correct.
3. To wrap up this introduction, I want to highlight some estimates of the number of Buddhists in the world that have become popular, as I believe that even the lowest of these estimates is significantly higher than what is accurate.
i. In a note on the first page of his work on the Bhilsa Topes (1854), General Cunningham says: “The Christians number about 270 millions; the Buddhists about 222 millions, who are distributed as follows:—China 170 millions, Japan 25, Anam 14, Siam 3, Ava 8, Nepal 1, and Ceylon 1; total, 222 millions.”
i. In a note on the first page of his work on the Bhilsa Topes (1854), General Cunningham states: “The Christians total around 270 million; the Buddhists total about 222 million, distributed as follows:—China 170 million, Japan 25 million, Anam 14 million, Siam 3 million, Ava 8 million, Nepal 1 million, and Ceylon 1 million; total, 222 million.”
ii. In his article on M. J. Barthelemy Saint Hilaire’s “Le Bouddha et sa Religion,” republished in his “Chips from a German Workshop,” vol. i. (1868), Professor Max Muller (p. 215) says, “The young prince became the founder of a religion which, after more than two thousand years, is still professed by 455 millions of human beings,” and he appends the following note: “Though truth is not settled by majorities, it would be interesting to know which religion counts at the present moment the largest numbers of believers. Berghaus, in his ‘Physical Atlas,’ gives the following division of the human race according to religion:—‘Buddhists 31.2 per cent, Christians 30.7, Mohammedans 15.7, Brahmanists 13.4, Heathens 8.7, and Jews 0.3.’ As Berghaus does not distinguish the Buddhists in China from the followers of Confucius and Laotse, the first place on the scale really belongs to Christianity. It is difficult to say to what religion a man belongs, as the same person may profess two or three. The emperor himself, after sacrificing according to the ritual of Confucius, visits a Tao-sse temple, and afterwards bows before an image of Fo in a Buddhist chapel. (‘Mélanges Asiatiques de St. Pétersbourg,’ vol. ii. p. 374.)”
ii. In his article on M. J. Barthelemy Saint Hilaire’s “Le Bouddha et sa Religion,” republished in his “Chips from a German Workshop,” vol. i. (1868), Professor Max Muller (p. 215) says, “The young prince became the founder of a religion which, after more than two thousand years, is still practiced by 455 million people,” and he adds the following note: “Although truth isn't determined by numbers, it would be interesting to know which religion currently has the most followers. Berghaus, in his ‘Physical Atlas,’ provides the following breakdown of the human population by religion: ‘Buddhists 31.2 percent, Christians 30.7, Muslims 15.7, Hindus 13.4, Pagans 8.7, and Jews 0.3.’ Since Berghaus doesn’t separate the Buddhists in China from those who follow Confucius and Laozi, Christianity actually ranks first. It’s challenging to determine someone’s religion, as the same person might follow two or three. The emperor himself, after performing rituals of Confucius, visits a Taoist temple and then bows before a statue of Buddha in a Buddhist chapel. (‘Mélanges Asiatiques de St. Pétersbourg,’ vol. ii. p. 374.)”
iii. Both these estimates are exceeded by Dr. T. W. Rhys Davids (intimating also the uncertainty of the statements, and that numbers are no evidence of truth) in the introduction to his “Manual of Buddhism.” The Buddhists there appear as amounting in all to 500 millions:—30 millions of Southern Buddhists, in Ceylon, Burma, Siam, Anam, and India (Jains); and 470 millions of North Buddhists, of whom nearly 33 millions are assigned to Japan, and 414,686,974 to the eighteen provinces of China proper. According to him, Christians amount to about 26 per cent of mankind, Hindus to about 13, Mohammedans to about 12 12, Buddhists to about 40, and Jews to about 12.
iii. Both of these estimates are surpassed by Dr. T. W. Rhys Davids (who also points out the uncertainty of these figures and that numbers don't prove accuracy) in the introduction to his “Manual of Buddhism.” The Buddhists are estimated to total around 500 million: 30 million Southern Buddhists in Ceylon, Burma, Siam, Anam, and India (Jains); and 470 million Northern Buddhists, of which nearly 33 million are in Japan, and 414,686,974 in the eighteen provinces of mainland China. He states that Christians make up about 26 percent of the global population, Hindus about 13 percent, Muslims about 12.5 percent, Buddhists about 40 percent, and Jews about 0.5 percent.
In regard to all these estimates, it will be observed that the immense numbers assigned to Buddhism are made out by the multitude of Chinese with which it is credited. Subtract Cunningham’s 170 millions of Chinese from his total of 222, and there remains only 52 millions of Buddhists. Subtract Davids’ (say) 414 12 millions of Chinese from his total of 500, and there remain only 85 12 millions for Buddhism. Of the numbers assigned to other countries, as well as of their whole populations, I am in considerable doubt, excepting in the cases of Ceylon and India; but the greatness of the estimates turns upon the immense multitudes said to be in China. I do not know what total population Cunningham allowed for that country, nor on what principal he allotted 170 millions of it to Buddhism;—perhaps he halved his estimate of the whole, whereas Berghaus and Davids allotted to it the highest estimates that have been given of the people.
Regarding all these estimates, it can be noted that the huge numbers assigned to Buddhism are based on the large population of Chinese people credited to it. If we subtract Cunningham’s 170 million Chinese from his total of 222 million, only 52 million Buddhists remain. If we subtract Davids’ (let's say) 414.5 million Chinese from his total of 500 million, only 85.5 million are left for Buddhism. I have considerable doubt about the numbers assigned to other countries, as well as their total populations, except for Ceylon and India; however, the significance of these estimates hinges on the vast numbers reported in China. I’m not sure what total population Cunningham assigned to that country, nor on what basis he designated 170 million of those to Buddhism; maybe he halved his estimate of the total, while Berghaus and Davids provided the highest estimates recorded for the population.
But we have no certain information of the population of China. At an interview with the former Chinese ambassador, Kwo Sung-tao, in Paris, in 1878, I begged him to write out for me the amount, with the authority for it, and he assured me that it could not be done. I have read probably almost everything that has been published on the subject, and endeavoured by methods of my own to arrive at a satisfactory conclusion;—without reaching a result which I can venture to lay before the public. My impression has been that 400 millions is hardly an exaggeration.
But we don’t have reliable information about the population of China. During an interview with the former Chinese ambassador, Kwo Sung-tao, in Paris in 1878, I asked him to provide me with the numbers and the sources for them, and he told me it couldn’t be done. I’ve probably read just about everything that’s been published on the topic and tried my own methods to come to a satisfactory conclusion—yet I haven’t reached a result I can confidently share with the public. My impression has been that 400 million is hardly an exaggeration.
But supposing that we had reliable returns of the whole population, how shall we proceed to apportion that among Confucianists, Taoists, and Buddhists? Confucianism is the orthodoxy of China. The common name for it is Ju Chiao, “the Doctrines held by the Learned Class,” entrance into the circle of which is, with a few insignificant exceptions, open to all the people. The mass of them and the masses under their influence are preponderatingly Confucian; and in the observance of ancestral worship, the most remarkable feature of the religion proper of China from the earliest times, of which Confucius was not the author but the prophet, an overwhelming majority are regular and assiduous.
But assuming we had accurate data on the entire population, how would we divide that among Confucianists, Taoists, and Buddhists? Confucianism is the dominant belief system in China. The common name for it is Ju Chiao, “the Doctrines held by the Learned Class,” and entry into this group is, with a few minor exceptions, open to everyone. The majority of people and those influenced by them are predominantly Confucian; and in practicing ancestral worship, which is the most notable aspect of traditional Chinese religion since ancient times—an area where Confucius was more of a prophet than a founder—the vast majority are regular and dedicated participants.
Among “the strange principles” which the emperor of the K’ang-hsi period, in one of his famous Sixteen Precepts, exhorted his people to “discountenance and put away, in order to exalt the correct doctrine,” Buddhism and Taoism were both included. If, as stated in the note quoted from Professor Muller, the emperor countenances both the Taoist worship and the Buddhist, he does so for reasons of state;—to please especially his Buddhist subjects in Thibet and Mongolia, and not to offend the many whose superstitious fancies incline to Taoism.
Among "the strange principles" that the emperor of the K'ang-hsi period, in one of his famous Sixteen Precepts, urged his people to "reject and remove, in order to promote the correct doctrine," both Buddhism and Taoism were included. If, as noted in the quote from Professor Muller, the emperor supports both Taoist worship and Buddhism, he does so for political reasons—especially to appease his Buddhist subjects in Tibet and Mongolia, and to avoid upsetting those whose beliefs lean towards Taoism.
When I went out and in as a missionary among the Chinese people for about thirty years, it sometimes occurred to me that only the inmates of their monasteries and the recluses of both systems should be enumerated as Buddhists and Taoists; but I was in the end constrained to widen that judgment, and to admit a considerable following of both among the people, who have neither received the tonsure nor assumed the yellow top. Dr. Eitel, in concluding his discussion of this point in his “Lecture on Buddhism, an Event in History,” says: “It is not too much to say that most Chinese are theoretically Confucianists, but emotionally Buddhists or Taoists. But fairness requires us to add that, though the mass of the people are more or less influenced by Buddhist doctrines, yet the people, as a whole, have no respect for the Buddhist church, and habitually sneer at Buddhist priests.” For the “most” in the former of these two sentences I would substitute “nearly all;” and between my friend’s “but” and “emotionally” I would introduce “many are,” and would not care to contest his conclusion farther. It does seem to me preposterous to credit Buddhism with the whole of the vast population of China, the great majority of whom are Confucianists. My own opinion is, that its adherents are not so many as those even of Mohammedanism, and that instead of being the most numerous of the religions (so called) of the world, it is only entitled to occupy the fifth place, ranking below Christianity, Confucianism, Brahmanism, and Mohammedanism, and followed, some distance off, by Taoism. To make a table of percentages of mankind, and assign to each system its proportion, is to seem to be wise where we are deplorably ignorant; and, moreover, if our means of information were much better than they are, our figures would merely show the outward adherence. A fractional per-centage might tell more for one system than a very large integral one for another.
When I was a missionary among the Chinese people for about thirty years, I sometimes thought that only the residents of their monasteries and the recluses of both traditions should be counted as Buddhists and Taoists. However, I eventually had to broaden that view and acknowledge that there is a significant following of both among the general population, who have neither shaved their heads nor worn the yellow robes. Dr. Eitel, in concluding his discussion of this topic in his “Lecture on Buddhism, an Event in History,” states: “It is not too much to say that most Chinese are theoretically Confucianists, but emotionally Buddhists or Taoists. But fairness requires us to add that, though the mass of the people are more or less influenced by Buddhist doctrines, yet the people, as a whole, have no respect for the Buddhist church, and habitually sneer at Buddhist priests.” For the “most” in the first of these two sentences, I would replace it with “nearly all;” and between my friend's “but” and “emotionally,” I would insert “many are,” and I wouldn’t dispute his conclusion further. It seems absurd to credit Buddhism with the entire vast population of China, the majority of whom are Confucianists. In my opinion, its followers are not as numerous as those of even Islam, and rather than being the most populous religion (so-called) in the world, it should only take the fifth place, below Christianity, Confucianism, Brahmanism, and Islam, with Taoism trailing far behind. Creating a table of percentages of mankind and assigning each system its share seems to suggest wisdom where we are lamentably uninformed; and even if our sources of information were much better than they are, our figures would only reflect outward adherence. A small percentage might represent more for one system than a large one for another.
CHAPTER I.
FROM CH’ANG-GAN TO THE SANDY DESERT
Fâ-Hien had been living in Ch’ang-gan.(1) Deploring the mutilated and imperfect state of the collection of the Books of Discipline, in the second year of the period Hwăng-che, being the Ke-hâe year of the cycle,(2) he entered into an engagement with Kwuy-king, Tâo-ching, Hwuy-ying, and Hwuy-wei,(3) that they should go to India and seek for the Disciplinary Rules.(4)
Fâ-Hien had been living in Ch’ang-gan.(1) Feeling upset by the incomplete and damaged state of the collection of the Books of Discipline, in the second year of the Hwăng-che period, which was the Ke-hâe year of the cycle,(2) he made a plan with Kwuy-king, Tâo-ching, Hwuy-ying, and Hwuy-wei,(3) to travel to India and look for the Disciplinary Rules.(4)
After starting from Ch’ang-gan, they passed through Lung,(5) and came to the kingdom of K’een-kwei,(6) where they stopped for the summer retreat.(7) When that was over, they went forward to the kingdom of Now-t’an,(8) crossed the mountain of Yang-low, and reached the emporium of Chang-yih.(9) There they found the country so much disturbed that travelling on the roads was impossible for them. Its king, however, was very attentive to them, kept them (in his capital), and acted the part of their danapati.(10)
After leaving Ch’ang-gan, they traveled through Lung and arrived at the kingdom of K’een-kwei, where they stayed for the summer retreat. When that ended, they continued on to the kingdom of Now-t’an, crossed the Yang-low mountain, and reached the trading center of Chang-yih. There, they discovered the country was so troubled that traveling on the roads was impossible for them. However, its king was very accommodating, hosted them in his capital, and acted as their benefactor.
Here they met with Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, Sang-shao, Pao-yun, and Sang-king;(11) and in pleasant association with them, as bound on the same journey with themselves, they passed the summer retreat (of that year)(12) together, resuming after it their travelling, and going on to T’un-hwang,(13) (the chief town) in the frontier territory of defence extending for about 80 le from east to west, and about 40 from north to south. Their company, increased as it had been, halted there for some days more than a month, after which Fâ-Hien and his four friends started first in the suite of an envoy,(14) having separated (for a time) from Pao-yun and his associates.
Here they met with Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, Sang-shao, Pao-yun, and Sang-king;(11) and happily spending time with them, as they were all on the same journey, they shared the summer retreat (of that year)(12) together. Afterward, they continued their travels, heading to T’un-hwang,(13) the main town in the frontier defense area stretching about 80 le from east to west and around 40 from north to south. Their group, which had grown larger, stayed there for over a month. After that, Fâ-Hien and his four friends set out first as part of an envoy,(14) having temporarily separated from Pao-yun and his group.
Le Hao,(15) the prefect of T’un-hwang, had supplied them with the means of crossing the desert (before them), in which there are many evil demons and hot winds. (Travellers) who encounter them perish all to a man. There is not a bird to be seen in the air above, nor an animal on the ground below. Though you look all round most earnestly to find where you can cross, you know not where to make your choice, the only mark and indication being the dry bones of the dead (left upon the sand).(16)
Le Hao, the governor of T’un-hwang, had provided them with the resources to cross the desert ahead, where many evil spirits and scorching winds reside. Travelers who face them meet certain death. There aren't any birds in the sky, nor animals on the ground. Even if you search earnestly for a way to cross, you can’t decide where to go; the only signs are the dry bones of the deceased scattered across the sand.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Ch’ang-gan is still the name of the principal district (and its city) in the department of Se-gan, Shen-se. It had been the capital of the first empire of Han (B.C. 202-A.D. 24), as it subsequently was that of Suy (A.D. 589-618). The empire of the eastern Tsin, towards the close of which Fâ-Hien lived, had its capital at or near Nan-king, and Ch’ang-gan was the capital of the principal of the three Ts’in kingdoms, which, with many other minor ones, maintained a semi-independence of Tsin, their rulers sometimes even assuming the title of emperor.
(1) Ch’ang-gan is still the name of the main district (and its city) in the Se-gan department of Shen-se. It used to be the capital of the first Han empire (B.C. 202-A.D. 24) and later the capital of Suy (A.D. 589-618). The eastern Tsin empire, during which Fâ-Hien lived, had its capital at or near Nan-king, and Ch’ang-gan served as the capital of the largest of the three Ts’in kingdoms. These kingdoms, along with several smaller ones, had a level of semi-independence from Tsin, with some rulers even claiming the title of emperor.
(2) The period Hwang-che embraced from A.D. 399 to 414, being the greater portion of the reign of Yao Hing of the After Ts’in, a powerful prince. He adopted Hwang-che for the style of his reign in 399, and the cyclical name of that year was Kang-tsze. It is not possible at this distance of time to explain, if it could be explained, how Fâ-Hien came to say that Ke-hae was the second year of the period. It seems most reasonable to suppose that he set out on his pilgrimage in A.D. 399, the cycle name of which was Ke-hae, as {.}, the second year, instead of {.}, the first, might easily creep into the text. In the “Memoirs of Eminent Monks” it is said that our author started in the third year of the period Lung-gan of the eastern Tsin, which was A.D. 399.
(2) The Hwang-che period lasted from A.D. 399 to 414, encompassing most of Yao Hing's reign from the After Ts’in dynasty, a powerful ruler. He chose Hwang-che as the name for his reign in 399, and that year’s cyclical name was Kang-tsze. It's hard to clarify from this distance if it can even be explained how Fâ-Hien claimed that Ke-hae was the second year of the period. It seems most reasonable to think that he began his pilgrimage in A.D. 399, which had the cycle name Ke-hae, and that calling it the second year instead of the first might have easily slipped into the text. In the “Memoirs of Eminent Monks,” it states that our author started in the third year of the Lung-gan period of the eastern Tsin, which was also A.D. 399.
(3) These, like Fâ-Hien itself, are all what we might call “clerical” names, appellations given to the parties as monks or sramanas.
(3) These, like Fâ-Hien itself, are all what we could refer to as “clerical” names, titles assigned to the groups as monks or sramanas.
(4) The Buddhist tripitaka or canon consists of three collections, containing, according to Eitel (p. 150), “doctrinal aphorisms (or statements, purporting to be from Buddha himself); works on discipline; and works on metaphysics:”—called sutra, vinaya, and abhidharma; in Chinese, king {.}, leuh {.}, and lun {.}, or texts, laws or rules, and discussions. Dr. Rhys Davids objects to the designation of “metaphysics” as used of the abhidharma works, saying that “they bear much more the relation to ‘dharma’ which ‘by-law’ bears to ‘law’ than that which ‘metaphysics’ bears to ‘physics’” (Hibbert Lectures, p. 49). However this be, it was about the vinaya works that Fâ-Hien was chiefly concerned. He wanted a good code of the rules for the government of “the Order” in all its internal and external relations.
(4) The Buddhist tripitaka or canon is made up of three collections, which, according to Eitel (p. 150), include “doctrinal sayings (or statements that claim to be from Buddha himself); works on discipline; and works on metaphysics:”—known as sutra, vinaya, and abhidharma; in Chinese, king {.}, leuh {.}, and lun {.}, or texts, laws or rules, and discussions. Dr. Rhys Davids disagrees with calling the abhidharma works “metaphysics,” saying that “they relate much more to ‘dharma’ as ‘by-law’ does to ‘law’ than how ‘metaphysics’ relates to ‘physics’” (Hibbert Lectures, p. 49). Regardless, Fâ-Hien was mainly focused on the vinaya works. He sought a solid set of rules for governing “the Order” in all its internal and external relationships.
(5) Lung embraced the western part of Shen-se and the eastern part of Kan-suh. The name remains in Lung Chow, in the extreme west of Shen-se.
(5) Lung covers the western part of Shen-se and the eastern part of Kan-suh. The name still exists in Lung Chow, located in the far west of Shen-se.
(6) K’een-kwei was the second king of “the Western Ts’in.” His family was of northern or barbarous origin, from the tribe of the Seen-pe, with the surname of K’eih-fuh. The first king was Kwo-kin, and received his appointment from the sovereign of the chief Ts’in kingdom in 385. He was succeeded in 388 by his brother, the K’een-kwei of the text, who was very prosperous in 398, and took the title of king of Ts’in. Fâ-Hien would find him at his capital, somewhere in the present department of Lan-chow, Kan-suh.
(6) K’een-kwei was the second king of “the Western Ts’in.” His family came from the north or a barbarous background, originating from the Seen-pe tribe, with the surname K’eih-fuh. The first king was Kwo-kin, who was appointed by the ruler of the main Ts’in kingdom in 385. He was succeeded in 388 by his brother, K’een-kwei, mentioned in the text, who was very prosperous in 398 and took the title of king of Ts’in. Fâ-Hien would find him at his capital, located somewhere in what is now the Lan-chow area of Kan-suh.
(7) Under varshas or vashavasana (Pâli, vassa; Spence Hardy, vass), Eitel (p. 163) says:—“One of the most ancient institutions of Buddhist discipline, requiring all ecclesiastics to spend the rainy season in a monastery in devotional exercises. Chinese Buddhists naturally substituted the hot season for the rainy (from the 16th day of the 5th to the 15th of the 9th Chinese month).”
(7) Under varshas or vashavasana (Pâli, vassa; Spence Hardy, vass), Eitel (p. 163) states:—“One of the oldest practices in Buddhist discipline, which requires all monks to spend the rainy season in a monastery engaged in devotional activities. Chinese Buddhists naturally replaced the rainy season with the hot season (from the 16th day of the 5th to the 15th of the 9th Chinese month).”
(8) During the troubled period of the Tsin dynasty, there were five (usurping) Leang sovereignties in the western part of the empire ({.} {.}). The name Leang remains in the department of Leang-chow in the northern part of Kan-suh. The “southern Leang” arose in 397 under a Tuh-fah Wu-ku, who was succeeded in 399 by a brother, Le-luh-koo; and he again by his brother, the Now-t’an of the text, in 402, who was not yet king therefore when Fâ-Hien and his friends reached his capital. How he is represented as being so may be accounted for in various ways, of which it is not necessary to write.
(8) During the troubled time of the Tsin dynasty, there were five (usurping) Leang rulers in the western part of the empire ({.} {.}). The name Leang is still found in the Leang-chow department in the northern part of Kan-suh. The “southern Leang” emerged in 397 under a Tuh-fah Wu-ku, who was succeeded in 399 by his brother, Le-luh-koo; and then by another brother, the Now-t’an mentioned in the text, in 402, who was not yet king when Fâ-Hien and his friends arrived at his capital. There are various explanations for how he is described as being so, but there’s no need to elaborate on them.
(9) Chang-yih is still the name of a district in Kan-chow department, Kan-suh. It is a long way north and west from Lan-chow, and not far from the Great Wall. Its king at this time was, probably, Twan-yeh of “the northern Leang.”
(9) Chang-yih is still the name of a district in the Kan-chow department of Kan-suh. It's quite a distance north and west of Lan-chow and not far from the Great Wall. At this time, its ruler was probably Twan-yeh of "the northern Leang."
(10) Dana is the name for religious charity, the first of the six paramitas, or means of attaining to nirvâna; and a danapati is “one who practises dana and thereby crosses {.} the sea of misery.” It is given as “a title of honour to all who support the cause of Buddhism by acts of charity, especially to founders and patrons of monasteries;”—see Eitel, p. 29.
(10) Dana refers to religious charity, the first of the six paramitas, or ways to reach nirvana; and a danapati is “someone who practices dana and thus crosses the sea of suffering.” It is given as “an honorific title to anyone who supports Buddhism through acts of charity, especially to founders and patrons of monasteries;”—see Eitel, p. 29.
(11) Of these pilgrims with their clerical names, the most distinguished was Pao-yun, who translated various Sanskrit works on his return from India, of which only one seems to be now existing. He died in 449. See Nanjio’s Catalogue of the Tripitaka, col. 417.
(11) Among these pilgrims with their religious titles, the most notable was Pao-yun, who translated several Sanskrit texts on his return from India, of which only one appears to survive today. He died in 449. See Nanjio’s Catalogue of the Tripitaka, col. 417.
(12) This was the second summer since the pilgrims left Ch’ang-gan. We are now therefore, probably, in A.D. 400.
(12) This was the second summer since the pilgrims left Ch’ang-gan. We are likely now in A.D. 400.
(13) T’un-hwang (lat. 39° 40′ N.; lon. 94° 50′ E.) is still the name of one of the two districts constituting the department of Gan-se, the most western of the prefectures of Kan-suh; beyond the termination of the Great Wall.
(13) T’un-hwang (lat. 39° 40′ N.; lon. 94° 50′ E.) is still the name of one of the two districts that make up the department of Gan-se, which is the westernmost of the prefectures of Kan-suh; located beyond the end of the Great Wall.
(14) Who this envoy was, and where he was going, we do not know. The text will not admit of any other translation.
(14) We don't know who this envoy was or where he was headed. The text won't allow for any other interpretation.
(15) Le Hao was a native of Lung-se, a man of learning, able and kindly in his government. He was appointed governor or prefect of T’un-hwang by the king of “the northern Leang,” in 400; and there he sustained himself, becoming by and by “duke of western Leang,” till he died in 417.
(15) Le Hao was from Lung-se, a knowledgeable man who was capable and kind in his leadership. He was appointed governor of T’un-hwang by the king of “the northern Leang” in 400; there, he made a name for himself and eventually became “duke of western Leang,” until his death in 417.
(16) “The river of sand;” the great desert of Kobi or Gobi; having various other names. It was a great task which the pilgrims had now before them,—to cross this desert. The name of “river” in the Chinese misleads the reader, and he thinks of crossing it as of crossing a stream; but they had to traverse it from east to west. In his “Vocabulary of Proper Names,” p. 23, Dr. Porter Smith says:—“It extends from the eastern frontier of Mongolia, south-westward to the further frontier of Turkestan, to within six miles of Ilchi, the chief town of Khoten. It thus comprises some twenty-three degrees of longitude in length, and from three to ten degrees of latitude in breadth, being about 2,100 miles in its greatest length. In some places it is arable. Some idea may be formed of the terror with which this ‘Sea of Sand,’ with its vast billows of shifting sands, is regarded, from the legend that in one of the storms 360 cities were all buried within the space of twenty-four hours.” So also Gilmour’s “Among the Mongols,” chap. 5.
(16) “The river of sand;” the vast desert of Kobi or Gobi; known by various other names. The pilgrims now had a huge challenge ahead of them—crossing this desert. The term “river” in Chinese is misleading, as it makes one think of crossing a stream; instead, they had to travel from east to west. In his “Vocabulary of Proper Names,” p. 23, Dr. Porter Smith states:—“It stretches from the eastern border of Mongolia, southwestward to the far border of Turkestan, to within six miles of Ilchi, the main town of Khoten. It covers about twenty-three degrees of longitude in length and three to ten degrees of latitude in width, totaling around 2,100 miles at its longest point. Some parts are arable. One can get a sense of the fear that this ‘Sea of Sand,’ with its enormous waves of shifting sand, inspires, from the legend that during one storm, 360 cities were buried within twenty-four hours.” Also see Gilmour’s “Among the Mongols,” chap. 5.
CHAPTER II.
ON TO SHEN-SHEN AND THENCE TO KHOTEN
After travelling for seventeen days, a distance we may calculate of about 1500 le, (the pilgrims) reached the kingdom of Shen-shen,(1) a country rugged and hilly, with a thin and barren soil. The clothes of the common people are coarse, and like those worn in our land of Han,(2) some wearing felt and others coarse serge or cloth of hair;—this was the only difference seen among them. The king professed (our) Law, and there might be in the country more than four thousand monks,(3) who were all students of the hinayana.(4) The common people of this and other kingdoms (in that region), as well as the sramans,(5) all practise the rules of India,(6) only that the latter do so more exactly, and the former more loosely. So (the travellers) found it in all the kingdoms through which they went on their way from this to the west, only that each had its own peculiar barbarous speech.(7) (The monks), however, who had (given up the worldly life) and quitted their families, were all students of Indian books and the Indian language. Here they stayed for about a month, and then proceeded on their journey, fifteen days walking to the north-west bringing them to the country of Woo-e.(8) In this also there were more than four thousand monks, all students of the hinayana. They were very strict in their rules, so that sramans from the territory of Ts’in(9) were all unprepared for their regulations. Fâ-Hien, through the management of Foo Kung-sun, maitre d’hotellerie,(10) was able to remain (with his company in the monastery where they were received) for more than two months, and here they were rejoined by Pao-yun and his friends.(11) (At the end of that time) the people of Woo-e neglected the duties of propriety and righteousness, and treated the strangers in so niggardly a manner that Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, and Hwuy-wei went back towards Kao-ch’ang,(12) hoping to obtain there the means of continuing their journey. Fâ-Hien and the rest, however, through the liberality of Foo Kung-sun, managed to go straight forward in a south-west direction. They found the country uninhabited as they went along. The difficulties which they encountered in crossing the streams and on their route, and the sufferings which they endured, were unparalleled in human experience, but in the course of a month and five days they succeeded in reaching Yu-teen.(13)
After traveling for seventeen days, covering about 1500 miles, the pilgrims finally reached the kingdom of Shen-shen, a rugged and hilly land with sparse and barren soil. The common people wore coarse clothing similar to what is found in our Han region, with some in felt and others in rough serge or hair cloth; this was the only noticeable difference among them. The king followed our teachings, and there were over four thousand monks in the country, all studying the hinayana. The common people and the monks in this and other nearby kingdoms mostly followed Indian customs, with the monks being more strict and the laypeople more relaxed about them. The travelers observed this pattern in all the kingdoms they passed through on their journey to the west, noting that each region had its own distinct language. The monks who had renounced worldly life and left their families were all studying Indian texts and the Indian language. They stayed there for about a month before continuing their journey, walking fifteen days northwest to reach the country of Woo-e. This place also had more than four thousand monks, all hinayana students, who adhered very strictly to their rules, making it challenging for sramans from the Ts’in territory to comply with their regulations. Thanks to Foo Kung-sun, the innkeeper, Fâ-Hien and his group were able to remain in the monastery where they were welcomed for more than two months, during which they were joined by Pao-yun and his friends. After some time, the people of Woo-e abandoned the principles of propriety and righteousness, treating the newcomers in such a miserly manner that Che-yen, Hwuy-keen, and Hwuy-wei decided to head back toward Kao-ch’ang, hoping to find help for their journey. However, Fâ-Hien and the others, aided by the generosity of Foo Kung-sun, managed to continue directly southwest. As they traveled, they found the land deserted. The challenges they faced crossing rivers and on their path, along with the hardships they endured, were unlike anything experienced before by humans, but after a month and five days, they finally reached Yu-teen.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) An account is given of the kingdom of Shen-shen in the 96th of the Books of the first Han dynasty, down to its becoming a dependency of China, about B.C. 80. The greater portion of that is now accessible to the English reader in a translation by Mr. Wylie in the “Journal of the Anthropological Institute,” August, 1880. Mr. Wylie says:—“Although we may not be able to identify Shen-shen with certainty, yet we have sufficient indications to give an appropriate idea of its position, as being south of and not far from lake Lob.” He then goes into an exhibition of those indications, which I need not transcribe. It is sufficient for us to know that the capital city was not far from Lob or Lop Nor, into which in lon. 38° E. the Tarim flows. Fâ-Hien estimated its distance to be 1500 le from T’un-hwang. He and his companions must have gone more than twenty-five miles a day to accomplish the journey in seventeen days.
(1) This account discusses the kingdom of Shen-shen in the 96th book of the first Han dynasty, leading up to its becoming a part of China around 80 B.C. Much of this information is now available to English readers in a translation by Mr. Wylie in the “Journal of the Anthropological Institute,” August 1880. Mr. Wylie states:—“While we may not be able to identify Shen-shen with complete certainty, we have enough clues to give a clear idea of its location, which is south of and not far from Lake Lob.” He then goes into detail about those clues, which I won’t need to recount. It’s enough for us to know that the capital city was close to Lob or Lop Nor, where the Tarim River flows at longitude 38° E. Fâ-Hien estimated the distance to be 1500 le from T’un-hwang. He and his companions must have traveled more than twenty-five miles a day to complete the journey in seventeen days.
(2) This is the name which Fâ-Hien always uses when he would speak of China, his native country, as a whole, calling it from the great dynasty which had ruled it, first and last, for between four and five centuries. Occasionally, as we shall immediately see, he speaks of “the territory of Ts’in or Ch’in,” but intending thereby only the kingdom or Ts’in, having its capital, as described in the first note on the last chapter, in Ch’ang-gan.
(2) This is the name that Fâ-Hien always uses when he talks about China, his home country, as a whole, referring to it by the name of the great dynasty that ruled it, first and last, for about four to five centuries. Sometimes, as we will soon see, he mentions “the territory of Ts’in or Ch’in,” but he’s only referring to the kingdom of Ts’in, which has its capital, as described in the first note of the last chapter, in Ch’ang-gan.
(3) So I prefer to translate the character {.} (sang) rather than by “priests.” Even in Christianity, beyond the priestly privilege which belongs to all believers, I object to the ministers of any denomination or church calling themselves or being called “priests;” and much more is the name inapplicable to the sramanas or bhikshus of Buddhism which acknowledges no God in the universe, no soul in man, and has no services of sacrifice or prayer in its worship. The only difficulty in the use of “monks” is caused by the members of the sect in Japan which, since the middle of the fifteenth century, has abolished the prohibition against marrying on the part of its ministers, and other prohibitions in diet and dress. Sang and sang-kea represent the Sanskrit sangha, constituted by at least four members, and empowered to hear confession, to grant absolution, to admit persons to holy orders, &c.; secondly, the third constituent of the Buddhistic Trinity, a deification of the communio sanctorum, or the Buddhist order. The name is used by our author of the monks collectively or individually as belonging to the class, and may be considered as synonymous with the name sramana, which will immediately claim our attention.
(3) So I prefer to translate the character {.} (sang) rather than as “priests.” Even in Christianity, aside from the priestly privilege that belongs to all believers, I disagree with ministers of any denomination or church calling themselves or being called “priests;” and even more so, the term does not apply to the sramanas or bhikshus of Buddhism, which acknowledges no God in the universe, no soul in humans, and has no rituals for sacrifice or prayer in its worship. The only issue with using “monks” comes from the sect in Japan that, since the mid-fifteenth century, has lifted the ban on marriage for its ministers, along with other restrictions on diet and dress. Sang and sang-kea represent the Sanskrit sangha, which consists of at least four members and has the authority to hear confessions, grant absolution, admit people to holy orders, etc.; secondly, the third component of the Buddhist Trinity, a deification of the communio sanctorum, or the Buddhist order. The term is used by our author for the monks collectively or individually as part of the group and can be considered synonymous with the name sramana, which will soon attract our attention.
(4) Meaning the “small vehicle, or conveyance.” There are in Buddhism the triyana, or “three different means of salvation, i.e. of conveyance across the samsara, or sea of transmigration, to the shores of nirvâna. Afterwards the term was used to designate the different phases of development through which the Buddhist dogma passed, known as the mahayana, hinayana, and madhyamayana.” “The hinayana is the simplest vehicle of salvation, corresponding to the first of the three degrees of saintship. Characteristics of it are the preponderance of active moral asceticism, and the absence of speculative mysticism and quietism.” E. H., pp. 151-2, 45, and 117.
(4) Meaning the “small vehicle, or conveyance.” In Buddhism, there are the triyana, or “three different means of salvation, i.e., ways to cross the samsara, or sea of reincarnation, to reach the shores of nirvâna. Later, the term was used to describe the different phases of development through which Buddhist doctrine evolved, known as the mahayana, hinayana, and madhyamayana.” “The hinayana is the simplest vehicle of salvation, corresponding to the first of the three levels of saintliness. Its characteristics include a strong focus on active moral asceticism, and a lack of speculative mysticism and quietism.” E. H., pp. 151-2, 45, and 117.
(5) The name for India is here the same as in the former chapter and throughout the book,—T’een-chuh ({.} {.}), the chuh being pronounced, probably, in Fâ-Hien’s time as tuk. How the earliest name for India, Shin-tuk or duk=Scinde, came to be changed into Thien-tuk, it would take too much space to explain. I believe it was done by the Buddhists, wishing to give a good auspicious name to the fatherland of their Law, and calling it “the Heavenly Tuk,” just as the Mohammedans call Arabia “the Heavenly region” ({.} {.}), and the court of China itself is called “the Celestial” ({.} {.}).
(5) The name for India here is the same as in the previous chapter and throughout the book—T’een-chuh ({.} {.}), with the chuh probably pronounced as tuk during Fâ-Hien’s time. Explaining how the earliest name for India, Shin-tuk or duk=Scinde, changed to Thien-tuk would take up too much space. I believe this change was made by the Buddhists, who wanted to give a positive name to the homeland of their teachings, calling it “the Heavenly Tuk,” similar to how the Mohammedans refer to Arabia as “the Heavenly region” ({.} {.}), and how the court of China is referred to as “the Celestial” ({.} {.}).
(6) Sraman may in English take the place of Sramana (Pâli, Samana; in Chinese, Sha-man), the name for Buddhist monks, as those who have separated themselves from (left) their families, and quieted their hearts from all intrusion of desire and lust. “It is employed, first, as a general name for ascetics of all denominations, and, secondly, as a general designation of Buddhistic monks.” E. H., pp. 130, 131.
(6) Sraman can be seen in English as a substitute for Sramana (Pâli, Samana; in Chinese, Sha-man), which refers to Buddhist monks who have distanced themselves from their families and calmed their hearts from all distractions of desire and lust. “It is used, initially, as a general term for ascetics of all types, and, secondly, as a broad term for Buddhist monks.” E. H., pp. 130, 131.
(7) Tartar or Mongolian.
Tartar or Mongolian.
(8) Woo-e has not been identified. Watters (“China Review,” viii. 115) says:—“We cannot be far wrong if we place it in Kharaschar, or between that and Kutscha.” It must have been a country of considerable size to have so many monks in it.
(8) Woo-e has not been identified. Watters (“China Review,” viii. 115) says: “We can’t be too far off if we put it in Kharaschar, or somewhere between there and Kutscha.” It must have been a fairly large country to have so many monks living there.
(9) This means in one sense China, but Fâ-Hien, in his use of the name, was only thinking of the three Ts’in states of which I have spoken in a previous note; perhaps only of that from the capital of which he had himself set out.
(9) This refers to China in one way, but Fâ-Hien, when he used that name, was really only considering the three Ts’in states I mentioned in a previous note; maybe just the one from which he had started his journey.
(10) This sentence altogether is difficult to construe, and Mr. Watters, in the “China Review,” was the first to disentangle more than one knot in it. I am obliged to adopt the reading of {.} {.} in the Chinese editions, instead of the {.} {.} in the Corean text. It seems clear that only one person is spoken of as assisting the travellers, and his name, as appears a few sentences farther on, was Foo Kung-sun. The {.} {.} which immediately follows the surname Foo {.}, must be taken as the name of his office, corresponding, as the {.} shows, to that of le maitre d’hotellerie in a Roman Catholic abbey. I was once indebted myself to the kind help of such an officer at a monastery in Canton province. The Buddhistic name for him is uddesika=overseer. The Kung-sun that follows his surname indicates that he was descended from some feudal lord in the old times of the Chow dynasty. We know indeed of no ruling house which had the surname of Foo, but its adoption by the grandson of a ruler can be satisfactorily accounted for; and his posterity continued to call themselves Kung-sun, duke or lord’s grandson, and so retain the memory of the rank of their ancestor.
(10) This sentence is quite complicated, and Mr. Watters, in the “China Review,” was the first to clarify several points in it. I have to use the interpretation from the Chinese editions instead of the one from the Korean text. It’s clear that only one person is mentioned as helping the travelers, and his name, as we see a few sentences later, was Foo Kung-sun. The title that comes right after the surname Foo must be understood as his job title, which corresponds, as the notation indicates, to that of le maitre d’hotellerie in a Roman Catholic abbey. I once received assistance from a similar official at a monastery in Canton province. The Buddhist term for him is udesika, which means overseer. The Kung-sun following his surname signifies that he was descended from some feudal lord from the ancient Chow dynasty. We don’t know of any ruling family with the surname Foo, but its use by the grandson of a ruler can be explained; and his descendants continued to refer to themselves as Kung-sun, meaning duke or lord’s grandson, thus preserving the memory of their ancestor’s rank.
(11) Whom they had left behind them at T’un-hwang.
(11) Who they had left behind at T’un-hwang.
(12) The country of the Ouighurs, the district around the modern Turfan or Tangut.
(12) The area of the Ouighurs, the region around present-day Turfan or Tangut.
(13) Yu-teen is better known as Khoten. Dr. P. Smith gives (p. 11) the following description of it:—“A large district on the south-west of the desert of Gobi, embracing all the country south of Oksu and Yarkand, along the northern base of the Kwun-lun mountains, for more than 300 miles from east to west. The town of the same name, now called Ilchi, is in an extensive plain on the Khoten river, in lat. 37° N., and lon. 80° 35′ E. After the Tungani insurrection against Chinese rule in 1862, the Mufti Haji Habeeboolla was made governor of Khoten, and held the office till he was murdered by Yakoob Beg, who became for a time the conqueror of all Chinese Turkestan. Khoten produces fine linen and cotton stuffs, jade ornaments, copper, grain, and fruits.” The name in Sanskrit is Kustana. (E. H., p. 60).
(13) Yu-teen is better known as Khoten. Dr. P. Smith gives (p. 11) the following description of it: “A large area in the southwest part of the Gobi Desert, covering all the land south of Oksu and Yarkand, along the northern foothills of the Kunlun Mountains, stretching over 300 miles from east to west. The town with the same name, now called Ilchi, is situated in a wide plain along the Khoten River, at latitude 37° N and longitude 80° 35′ E. After the Tungani uprising against Chinese rule in 1862, Mufti Haji Habeeboolla was appointed governor of Khoten and held the position until he was killed by Yakoob Beg, who briefly conquered all of Chinese Turkestan. Khoten produces high-quality linen and cotton fabrics, jade jewelry, copper, grain, and fruits.” The name in Sanskrit is Kustana. (E. H., p. 60).
CHAPTER III.
KHOTEN. PROCESSIONS OF IMAGES. THE KING’S NEW MONASTERY.
Yu-teen is a pleasant and prosperous kingdom, with a numerous and flourishing population. The inhabitants all profess our Law, and join together in its religious music for their enjoyment.(1) The monks amount to several myriads, most of whom are students of the mahayana.(2) They all receive their food from the common store.(3) Throughout the country the houses of the people stand apart like (separate) stars, and each family has a small tope(4) reared in front of its door. The smallest of these may be twenty cubits high, or rather more.(5) They make (in the monasteries) rooms for monks from all quarters,(5) the use of which is given to travelling monks who may arrive, and who are provided with whatever else they require.
Yu-teen is a pleasant and prosperous kingdom with a large and thriving population. Everyone there follows our Law and joins together in its religious music for enjoyment. The monks number in the thousands, most of whom study the Mahayana. They all get their food from a common store. Throughout the country, people's houses are spaced out like separate stars, and each family has a small tope set up in front of their door. The smallest of these can be about twenty cubits tall, or maybe a bit more. The monasteries have rooms for monks from all over, which are made available to traveling monks who may come through, and they are given whatever else they need.
The lord of the country lodged Fâ-Hien and the others comfortably, and supplied their wants, in a monastery(6) called Gomati,(6) of the mahayana school. Attached to it there are three thousand monks, who are called to their meals by the sound of a bell. When they enter the refectory, their demeanour is marked by a reverent gravity, and they take their seats in regular order, all maintaining a perfect silence. No sound is heard from their alms-bowls and other utensils. When any of these pure men(7) require food, they are not allowed to call out (to the attendants) for it, but only make signs with their hands.
The lord of the land accommodated Fâ-Hien and the others well, providing for their needs at a monastery called Gomati, which follows the Mahayana school. Connected to it are three thousand monks, who are called to their meals by the sound of a bell. When they enter the dining hall, they carry themselves with a serious respect and take their seats in an orderly manner, all maintaining complete silence. There is no noise from their alms bowls and other utensils. When any of these pure individuals need food, they aren’t allowed to call out to the attendants but can only signal with their hands.
Hwuy-king, Tao-ching, and Hwuy-tah set out in advance towards the country of K’eeh-ch’a;(8) but Fâ-Hien and the others, wishing to see the procession of images, remained behind for three months. There are in this country four(9) great monasteries, not counting the smaller ones. Beginning on the first day of the fourth month, they sweep and water the streets inside the city, making a grand display in the lanes and byways. Over the city gate they pitch a large tent, grandly adorned in all possible ways, in which the king and queen, with their ladies brilliantly arrayed,(10) take up their residence (for the time).
Hwuy-king, Tao-ching, and Hwuy-tah set out ahead toward the country of K’eeh-ch’a;(8) but Fâ-Hien and the others, wanting to see the parade of images, stayed behind for three months. In this country, there are four(9) major monasteries, not counting the smaller ones. Starting on the first day of the fourth month, they clean and water the streets within the city, creating a grand spectacle in the alleys and side streets. They set up a large tent above the city gate, beautifully decorated in every way possible, where the king and queen, along with their well-dressed ladies,(10) take residence for the time being.
The monks of the Gomati monastery, being mahayana students, and held in great reverence by the king, took precedence of all others in the procession. At a distance of three or four le from the city, they made a four-wheeled image car, more than thirty cubits high, which looked like the great hall (of a monastery) moving along. The seven precious substances(11) were grandly displayed about it, with silken streamers and canopies hanging all around. The (chief) image(12) stood in the middle of the car, with two Bodhisattvas(13) in attendance upon it, while devas(14) were made to follow in waiting, all brilliantly carved in gold and silver, and hanging in the air. When (the car) was a hundred paces from the gate, the king put off his crown of state, changed his dress for a fresh suit, and with bare feet, carrying in his hands flowers and incense, and with two rows of attending followers, went out at the gate to meet the image; and, with his head and face (bowed to the ground), he did homage at its feet, and then scattered the flowers and burnt the incense. When the image was entering the gate, the queen and the brilliant ladies with her in the gallery above scattered far and wide all kinds of flowers, which floated about and fell promiscuously to the ground. In this way everything was done to promote the dignity of the occasion. The carriages of the monasteries were all different, and each one had its own day for the procession. (The ceremony) began on the first day of the fourth month, and ended on the fourteenth, after which the king and queen returned to the palace.
The monks of the Gomati monastery, as Mahayana students who held great respect from the king, led the procession ahead of everyone else. About three or four miles from the city, they created a four-wheeled chariot that was over thirty cubits high, resembling a large monastery hall in motion. The seven precious substances were prominently displayed around it, adorned with silken streamers and canopies. The main image was positioned in the center of the chariot, with two Bodhisattvas in attendance, while celestial beings followed closely, all intricately carved in gold and silver and hovering in the air. When the chariot was a hundred paces from the gate, the king removed his crown, changed into a fresh outfit, and barefoot, holding flowers and incense, he stepped out with a group of followers to greet the image. Bowing down to the ground, he paid his respects at its feet, scattering flowers and burning incense. As the image entered the gate, the queen and the beautiful ladies with her in the gallery above scattered various flowers, which floated gently and fell scattered on the ground. Everything was arranged to enhance the significance of the occasion. The chariots from the monasteries were all unique, and each one had its specific day for the procession. The ceremony started on the first day of the fourth month and concluded on the fourteenth, after which the king and queen returned to the palace.
Seven or eight le to the west of the city there is what is called the King’s New Monastery, the building of which took eighty years, and extended over three reigns. It may be 250 cubits in height, rich in elegant carving and inlaid work, covered above with gold and silver, and finished throughout with a combination of all the precious substances. Behind the tope there has been built a Hall of Buddha,(15) of the utmost magnificence and beauty, the beams, pillars, venetianed doors, and windows being all overlaid with gold-leaf. Besides this, the apartments for the monks are imposingly and elegantly decorated, beyond the power of words to express. Of whatever things of highest value and preciousness the kings in the six countries on the east of the (Ts’ung) range of mountains(16) are possessed, they contribute the greater portion (to this monastery), using but a small portion of them themselves.(17)
Seven or eight leagues to the west of the city is what’s known as the King’s New Monastery, which took eighty years to build and spanned three reigns. It may be 250 cubits tall, adorned with elegant carvings and inlaid work, topped with gold and silver, and finished with a combination of all the precious materials. Behind the tower, there’s a Hall of Buddha, which is incredibly magnificent and beautiful, with beams, pillars, Venetian doors, and windows all covered in gold leaf. In addition, the monks’ quarters are impressively and elegantly decorated, beyond what words can describe. The kings of the six countries to the east of the (Ts’ung) mountain range contribute most of their highest value possessions to this monastery, keeping only a small portion for themselves.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) This fondness for music among the Khoteners is mentioned by Hsuan and Ch’wang and others.
(1) This love for music among the Khoteners is noted by Hsuan and Ch’wang and others.
(2) Mahayana. It is a later form of the Buddhist doctrine, the second phase of its development corresponding to the state of a Bodhisattva, who, being able to transport himself and all mankind to nirvâna, may be compared to a huge vehicle. See Davids on the “Key-note of the ‘Great Vehicle,’” Hibbert Lectures, p. 254.
(2) Mahayana. This is a later version of the Buddhist doctrine, the second stage of its evolution, corresponding to the state of a Bodhisattva, who, able to guide himself and all of humanity to nirvana, can be likened to a massive vehicle. See Davids on the “Key-note of the ‘Great Vehicle,’” Hibbert Lectures, p. 254.
(3) Fâ-Hien supplies sufficient information of how the common store or funds of the monasteries were provided, farther on in chapters xvi and xxxix, as well as in other passages. As the point is important, I will give here, from Davids’ fifth Hibbert Lecture (p. 178), some of the words of the dying Buddha, taken from “The Book of the Great Decease,” as illustrating the statement in this text:—“So long as the brethren shall persevere in kindness of action, speech, and thought among the saints, both in public and private; so long as they shall divide without partiality, and share in common with the upright and holy, all such things as they receive in accordance with the just provisions of the order, down even to the mere contents of a begging bowl; . . . so long may the brethren be expected not to decline, but to prosper.”
(3) Fâ-Hien provides plenty of information about how the common funds of the monasteries were supplied, later on in chapters xvi and xxxix, as well as in other sections. Since this is an important point, I will quote from Davids’ fifth Hibbert Lecture (p. 178) some remarks from the dying Buddha, taken from “The Book of the Great Decease,” to illustrate the statement in this text:—“As long as the brethren continue to act, speak, and think kindly among the saints, both in public and private; as long as they share without favoritism, and provide for the upright and holy, all the things they receive according to the fair rules of the order, right down to the simple contents of a begging bowl; . . . as long as this happens, the brethren can be expected not to decline but to thrive.”
(4) The Chinese {.} (t’ah; in Cantonese, t’ap), as used by Fâ-Hien, is, no doubt, a phonetisation of the Sanskrit stupa or Pâli thupa; and it is well in translating to use for the structures described by him the name of topes,—made familiar by Cunningham and other Indian antiquarians. In the thirteenth chapter there is an account of one built under the superintendence of Buddha himself, “as a model for all topes in future.” They were usually in the form of bell-shaped domes, and were solid, surmounted by a long tapering pinnacle formed with a series of rings, varying in number. But their form, I suppose, was often varied; just as we have in China pagodas of different shapes. There are several topes now in the Indian Institute at Oxford, brought from Buddha Gaya, but the largest of them is much smaller than “the smallest” of those of Khoten. They were intended chiefly to contain the relics of Buddha and famous masters of his Law; but what relics could there be in the Tiratna topes of chapter xvi?
(4) The term used by Fâ-Hien in Chinese for stupa, which is t’ah in Mandarin and t’ap in Cantonese, is likely a phonetic adaptation of the Sanskrit word "stupa" or the Pâli "thupa." When translating his descriptions, it's appropriate to refer to these structures as topes, a term popularized by Cunningham and other Indian historians. In the thirteenth chapter, there's a description of one that was built under the guidance of Buddha himself, “as a model for all topes in the future.” They typically had bell-shaped domes and were solid structures topped with a long, pointed spire made up of a series of rings that varied in number. However, I assume their shapes could vary, similar to the different styles of pagodas found in China. There are several topes in the Indian Institute at Oxford, brought from Buddha Gaya, but the largest one is still much smaller than “the smallest” of those from Khoten. These topes were mainly meant to hold the relics of Buddha and notable masters of his teachings; but what relics could possibly be found in the Tiratna topes mentioned in chapter xvi?
(5) The meaning here is much disputed. The author does not mean to say that the monk’s apartments were made “square,” but that the monasteries were made with many guest-chambers or spare rooms.
(5) The meaning here is widely debated. The author isn’t saying that the monk’s living quarters were made “square,” but rather that the monasteries were designed with many guest rooms or extra spaces.
(6) The Sanskrit term for a monastery is used here,—Sangharama, “gardens of the assembly,” originally denoting only “the surrounding park, but afterwards transferred to the whole of the premises” (E. H., p. 118). Gomati, the name of this monastery, means “rich in cows.”
(6) The Sanskrit word for a monastery is used here—Sangharama, “gardens of the assembly,” which originally referred only to “the surrounding park, but later came to mean the entire premises” (E. H., p. 118). Gomati, the name of this monastery, means “rich in cows.”
(7) A denomination for the monks as vimala, “undefiled” or “pure.” Giles makes it “the menials that attend on the monks,” but I have not met with it in that application.
(7) A term for the monks is vimala, meaning “undefiled” or “pure.” Giles translates it as “the menials that attend on the monks,” but I haven't seen it used in that context.
(8) K’eeh-ch’a has not been clearly identified. Rémusat made it Cashmere; Klaproth, Iskardu; Beal makes it Kartchou; and Eitel, Khas’a, “an ancient tribe on the Paropamisus, the Kasioi of Ptolemy.” I think it was Ladak, or some well-known place in it. Hwuy-tah, unless that name be an alias, appears here for the first time.
(8) K’eeh-ch’a has not been clearly identified. Rémusat identified it as Cashmere; Klaproth thought it was Iskardu; Beal considered it Kartchou; and Eitel suggested Khas’a, “an ancient tribe on the Paropamisus, the Kasioi of Ptolemy.” I believe it was Ladak, or some well-known place within it. Hwuy-tah, unless that name is an alias, appears here for the first time.
(9) Instead of “four,” the Chinese copies of the text have “fourteen;” but the Corean reading is, probably, more correct.
(9) Instead of “four,” the Chinese versions of the text say “fourteen;” however, the Korean reading is probably more accurate.
(10) There may have been, as Giles says, “maids of honour;” but the character does not say so.
(10) There might have been, as Giles mentions, “maids of honour;” but the character doesn’t specify that.
(11) The Sapta-ratna, gold, silver, lapis lazuli, rock crystal, rubies, diamonds or emeralds, and agate. See Sacred Books of the East (Davids’ Buddhist Suttas), vol. xi., p. 249.
(11) The Sapta-ratna, gold, silver, lapis lazuli, rock crystal, rubies, diamonds or emeralds, and agate. See Sacred Books of the East (Davids’ Buddhist Suttas), vol. xi., p. 249.
(12) No doubt that of Sâkyamuni himself.
(12) No doubt about Sâkyamuni himself.
(13) A Bodhisattva is one whose essence has become intelligence; a Being who will in some future birth as a man (not necessarily or usually the next) attain to Buddhahood. The name does not include those Buddhas who have not yet attained to pari-nirvâna. The symbol of the state is an elephant fording a river. Popularly, its abbreviated form P’u-sa is used in China for any idol or image; here the name has its proper signification.
(13) A Bodhisattva is someone whose core has evolved into wisdom; a Being who will, in a future life as a human (not necessarily the next one), reach Buddhahood. This term doesn’t include Buddhas who haven’t yet achieved pari-nirvâna. The symbol representing this state is an elephant crossing a river. In China, the shortened term P’u-sa is commonly used for any idol or image; here, the name holds its true meaning.
(14) {.} {.}, “all the thien,” or simply “the thien” taken as plural. But in Chinese the character called thien {.} denotes heaven, or Heaven, and is interchanged with Ti and Shang Ti, meaning God. With the Buddhists it denotes the devas or Brahmanic gods, or all the inhabitants of the six devalokas. The usage shows the antagonism between Buddhism and Brahmanism, and still more that between it and Confucianism.
(14) {.} {.}, “all the thien,” or simply “the thien” taken as plural. But in Chinese, the character called thien {.} signifies heaven, or Heaven, and is interchangeable with Ti and Shang Ti, which mean God. For the Buddhists, it refers to the devas or Brahmanic gods, or all the beings in the six devalokas. This usage highlights the conflict between Buddhism and Brahmanism, and even more so between it and Confucianism.
(15) Giles and Williams call this “the oratory of Buddha.” But “oratory” gives the idea of a small apartment, whereas the name here leads the mind to think of a large “hall.” I once accompanied the monks of a large monastery from their refectory to the Hall of Buddha, which was a lofty and spacious apartment splendidly fitted up.
(15) Giles and Williams refer to this as “the oratory of Buddha.” However, “oratory” suggests a small space, while the name here makes you think of a large “hall.” I once joined the monks of a large monastery as they walked from their dining room to the Hall of Buddha, which was a tall and spacious room beautifully decorated.
(16) The Ts’ung, or “Onion” range, called also the Belurtagh mountains, including the Karakorum, and forming together the connecting links between the more northern T’een-shan and the Kwun-lun mountains on the north of Thibet. It would be difficult to name the six countries which Fâ-Hien had in mind.
(16) The Ts’ung, or “Onion” range, also known as the Belurtagh mountains, includes the Karakorum and forms the connecting links between the more northern T'een-shan and the Kwun-lun mountains to the north of Tibet. It would be hard to identify the six countries that Fâ-Hien was referring to.
(17) This seems to be the meaning here. My first impression of it was that the
author meant to say that the contributions which they received were spent by
the monks mainly on the buildings, and only to a small extent for themselves;
and I still hesitate between that view and the one in the version.
There occurs here the binomial phrase kung-yang {.} {.}, which is one of
the most common throughout the narrative, and is used not only of support in
the way of substantial contributions given to monks, monasteries, and Buddhism,
but generally of all Buddhistic worship, if I may use that term in the
connexion. Let me here quote two or three sentences from Davids’ Manual
(pp. 168-170):—“The members of the order are secured from want.
There is no place in the Buddhist scheme for churches; the offering of flowers
before the sacred tree or image of the Buddha takes the place of worship.
Buddhism does not acknowledge the efficacy of prayers; and in the warm
countries where Buddhists live, the occasional reading of the law, or preaching
of the word, in public, can take place best in the open air, by moonlight,
under a simple roof of trees or palms. There are five principal kinds of
meditation, which in Buddhism takes the place of prayer.”
(17) This seems to be the meaning here. My first impression was that the author intended to convey that the contributions they received were primarily used by the monks for the buildings and only a little for themselves; and I still waver between that interpretation and the one in the version.
Here we find the binomial phrase kung-yang {.} {.}, which is one of the most common throughout the narrative, used not only to refer to substantial contributions given to monks, monasteries, and Buddhism, but generally to all Buddhist worship, if I may use that term in this context. Let me quote two or three sentences from Davids’ Manual (pp. 168-170):—“The members of the order are ensured against want. There is no place in the Buddhist framework for churches; the offering of flowers before the sacred tree or image of the Buddha serves as the form of worship. Buddhism does not recognize the effectiveness of prayers; and in the warm countries where Buddhists reside, the occasional reading of the law, or preaching of the word, is best done outdoors, by moonlight, under a simple canopy of trees or palms. There are five main types of meditation that take the place of prayer in Buddhism.”
CHAPTER IV.
THROUGH THE TS’UNG OR “ONION” MOUNTAINS TO
K’EEH-CH’A;—PROBABLY SKARDO, OR SOME CITY MORE TO THE EAST IN
LADAK.
When the processions of images in the fourth month were over, Sang-shao, by himself alone, followed a Tartar who was an earnest follower of the Law,(1) and proceeded towards Kophene.(2) Fâ-Hien and the others went forward to the kingdom of Tsze-hoh, which it took them twenty-five days to reach.(3) Its king was a strenuous follower of our Law,(4) and had (around him) more than a thousand monks, mostly students of the mahayana. Here (the travellers) abode fifteen days, and then went south for four days, when they found themselves among the Ts’ung-ling mountains, and reached the country of Yu-hwuy,(5) where they halted and kept their retreat.(6) When this was over, they went on among the hills(7) for twenty-five days, and got to K’eeh-ch’a,(8) there rejoining Hwuy-king(9) and his two companions.
When the processions of images in the fourth month were done, Sang-shao, all on his own, followed a Tartar who was a devoted follower of the Law and headed towards Kophene. Fâ-Hien and the others continued on to the kingdom of Tsze-hoh, which took them twenty-five days to reach. Its king was a dedicated follower of our Law and had over a thousand monks around him, mostly students of the mahayana. The travelers stayed there for fifteen days, then went south for four days, arriving in the Ts’ung-ling mountains, reaching the country of Yu-hwuy, where they stopped and held their retreat. After that was done, they traveled among the hills for twenty-five days and reached K’eeh-ch’a, where they rejoined Hwuy-king and his two companions.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) This Tartar is called a {.} {.}, “a man of the Tao,” or faith of Buddha. It occurs several times in the sequel, and denotes the man who is not a Buddhist outwardly only, but inwardly as well, whose faith is always making itself manifest in his ways. The name may be used of followers of other systems of faith besides Buddhism.
(1) This Tartar is referred to as a {.} {.}, “a man of the Tao,” or the faith of Buddha. This term comes up several times later and represents a person who is not just a Buddhist on the surface but is also genuinely one at heart, with their faith always showing in their actions. The name can also apply to followers of other belief systems aside from Buddhism.
(2) See the account of the kingdom of Kophene, in the 96th Book of the first Han Records, p. 78, where its capital is said to be 12,200 le from Ch’ang-gan. It was the whole or part of the present Cabulistan. The name of Cophene is connected with the river Kophes, supposed to be the same as the present Cabul river, which falls into the Indus, from the west, at Attock, after passing Peshawar. The city of Cabul, the capital of Afghanistan, may be the Kophene of the text; but we do not know that Sang-shao and his guide got so far west. The text only says that they set out from Khoten “towards it.”
(2) Check out the account of the kingdom of Kophene in the 96th Book of the first Han Records, p. 78, which states that its capital is 12,200 le from Ch’ang-gan. It covered all or part of what is now Cabulistan. The name Kophene is linked to the river Kophes, which is thought to be the same as the present-day Cabul river, flowing into the Indus from the west at Attock, after passing Peshawar. The city of Cabul, the capital of Afghanistan, might be the Kophene mentioned in the text; however, we don't know if Sang-shao and his guide traveled that far west. The text only mentions that they set out from Khoten “towards it.”
(3) Tsze-hoh has not been identified. Beal thinks it was Yarkand, which, however, was north-west from Khoten. Watters (“China Review,” p. 135) rather approves the suggestion of “Tashkurgan in Sirikul” for it. As it took Fâ-Hien twenty-five days to reach it, it must have been at least 150 miles from Khoten.
(3) Tsze-hoh has not been identified. Beal thinks it was Yarkand, which, however, was northwest of Khoten. Watters (“China Review,” p. 135) supports the idea of “Tashkurgan in Sirikul” for it. Since it took Fâ-Hien twenty-five days to reach it, it must have been at least 150 miles from Khoten.
(4) The king is described here by a Buddhistic phrase, denoting the possession of viryabala, “the power of energy; persevering exertion—one of the five moral powers” (E. H., p. 170).
(4) The king is described here by a Buddhist phrase, indicating the possession of viryabala, “the power of energy; consistent effort—one of the five moral strengths” (E. H., p. 170).
(5) Nor has Yu-hwuy been clearly identified. Evidently it was directly south from Tsze-hoh, and among the “Onion” mountains. Watters hazards the conjecture that it was the Aktasch of our present maps.
(5) Yu-hwuy hasn't been clearly identified either. It was clearly located directly south of Tsze-hoh and among the “Onion” mountains. Watters guesses that it might be the Aktasch on our current maps.
(6) This was the retreat already twice mentioned as kept by the pilgrims in the summer, the different phraseology, “quiet rest,” without any mention of the season, indicating their approach to India, E. H., p. 168. Two, if not three, years had elapsed since they left Ch’ang-gan. Are we now with them in 402?
(6) This was the retreat that has already been mentioned twice, which the pilgrims held in the summer. The different wording, “quiet rest,” without mentioning the season, suggests they were nearing India, E. H., p. 168. Two, if not three, years had passed since they left Ch’ang-gan. Are we now with them in 402?
(7) This is the Corean reading {.}, much preferable to the {.} of the Chinese editions.
(7) This is the Korean reading {.}, which is much better than the {.} of the Chinese editions.
(8) Watters approves of Klaproth’s determination of K’eeh-ch’a to be Iskardu or Skardo. There are difficulties in connexion with the view, but it has the advantage, to my mind very great, of bringing the pilgrims across the Indus. The passage might be accomplished with ease at this point of the river’s course, and therefore is not particularly mentioned.
(8) Watters agrees with Klaproth's identification of K’eeh-ch’a as Iskardu or Skardo. There are challenges associated with this perspective, but it has the significant benefit, in my opinion, of allowing pilgrims to cross the Indus. This crossing could be done easily at this part of the river, which is why it isn't specifically noted.
(9) Who had preceded them from Khoten.
(9) Who had come before them from Khoten.
CHAPTER V.
GREAT QUINQUENNIAL ASSEMBLY OF MONKS. RELICS OF BUDDHA. PRODUCTIONS OF THE
COUNTRY.
It happened that the king of the country was then holding the pancha parishad, that is, in Chinese, the great quinquennial assembly.(1) When this is to be held, the king requests the presence of the Sramans from all quarters (of his kingdom). They come (as if) in clouds; and when they are all assembled, their place of session is grandly decorated. Silken streamers and canopies are hung out in, and water-lilies in gold and silver are made and fixed up behind the places where (the chief of them) are to sit. When clean mats have been spread, and they are all seated, the king and his ministers present their offerings according to rule and law. (The assembly takes place), in the first, second, or third month, for the most part in the spring.
It turned out that the king of the country was holding the pancha parishad, which in Chinese means the great quinquennial assembly.(1) When this event is scheduled, the king invites the Sramans from all corners of his kingdom. They arrive in large numbers, and when they are all gathered, their meeting place is beautifully decorated. Silken streamers and canopies are set up, and golden and silver water-lilies are arranged behind where the leaders will sit. Once clean mats are laid out and everyone is seated, the king and his ministers present their offerings according to tradition and law. (The assembly occurs) mostly in the first, second, or third month, typically in the spring.
After the king has held the assembly, he further exhorts the ministers to make other and special offerings. The doing of this extends over one, two, three, five, or even seven days; and when all is finished, he takes his own riding-horse, saddles, bridles, and waits on him himself,(2) while he makes the noblest and most important minister of the kingdom mount him. Then, taking fine white woollen cloth, all sorts of precious things, and articles which the Sramans require, he distributes them among them, uttering vows at the same time along with all his ministers; and when this distribution has taken place, he again redeems (whatever he wishes) from the monks.(3)
After the king holds the assembly, he encourages the ministers to make additional special offerings. This process lasts one, two, three, five, or even seven days; and once everything is complete, he takes his own riding horse, saddles and bridles it, and waits on the horse himself, while he has the most esteemed and important minister of the kingdom mount him. Then, using fine white woolen cloth, various precious items, and offerings needed by the monks, he distributes these among them, making vows at the same time with all his ministers; and after this distribution, he again redeems (whatever he wishes) from the monks.
The country, being among the hills and cold, does not produce the other cereals, and only the wheat gets ripe. After the monks have received their annual (portion of this), the mornings suddenly show the hoar-frost, and on this account the king always begs the monks to make the wheat ripen(4) before they receive their portion. There is in the country a spitoon which belonged to Buddha, made of stone, and in colour like his alms-bowl. There is also a tooth of Buddha, for which the people have reared a tope, connected with which there are more than a thousand monks and their disciples,(5) all students of the hinayana. To the east of these hills the dress of the common people is of coarse materials, as in our country of Ts’in, but here also(6) there were among them the differences of fine woollen cloth and of serge or haircloth. The rules observed by the Sramans are remarkable, and too numerous to be mentioned in detail. The country is in the midst of the Onion range. As you go forward from these mountains, the plants, trees, and fruits are all different from those of the land of Han, excepting only the bamboo, pomegranate,(7) and sugar-cane.
The country, situated among the hills and in a cold climate, does not grow other grains, and only the wheat fully ripens. Once the monks receive their annual portion of it, the mornings quickly turn frosty, which is why the king always asks the monks to ensure the wheat ripens before they take their share. There is a spitoon in the country that belonged to Buddha, made of stone and resembling his alms bowl. There is also a tooth of Buddha, for which the locals have built a shrine, home to more than a thousand monks and their disciples, all of whom study hinayana. To the east of these hills, the common people's clothing is made from rough materials, similar to what we have in our land of Ts’in, yet there are also variations of fine wool fabric and serge or coarse cloth among them. The rules followed by the Sramans are numerous and noteworthy, too many to detail here. The country lies in the midst of the Onion range. As you move away from these mountains, the plants, trees, and fruits differ from those in the Han land, with the exceptions being bamboo, pomegranate, and sugarcane.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) See Eitel, p. 89. He describes the assembly as “an ecclesiastical conference, first instituted by king Asoka for general confession of sins and inculcation of morality.”
(1) See Eitel, p. 89. He describes the assembly as “an ecclesiastical conference, first set up by King Asoka for the general confession of sins and the promotion of morality.”
(2) The text of this sentence is perplexing; and all translators, including myself, have been puzzled by it.
(2) The text of this sentence is confusing, and all translators, including me, have been baffled by it.
(3) See what we are told of king Asoka’s grant of all the Jambudvipa to the monks in chapter xxvii. There are several other instances of similar gifts in the Mahavansa.
(3) Check out what we learn about King Asoka’s gift of all of Jambudvipa to the monks in chapter xxvii. There are several other examples of similar donations in the Mahavansa.
(4) Watters calls attention to this as showing that the monks of K’eeh-ch’a had the credit of possessing weather-controlling powers.
(4) Watters points out that this indicates the monks of K’eeh-ch’a were believed to have the ability to control the weather.
(5) The text here has {.} {.}, not {.} alone. I often found in monasteries boys and lads who looked up to certain of the monks as their preceptors.
(5) The text here has {.} {.}, not {.} alone. I often found in monasteries boys and young men who looked up to some of the monks as their teachers.
(6) Compare what is said in chapter ii of the dress of the people of Shen-shen.
(6) Compare what is mentioned in chapter ii about the clothing of the people of Shen-shen.
(7) Giles thinks the fruit here was the guava, because the ordinary name for “pomegranate” is preceded by gan {.}; but the pomegranate was called at first Gan Shih-lau, as having been introduced into China from Gan-seih by Chang-k’een, who is referred to in chapter vii.
(7) Giles believes the fruit here is guava, since the common name for "pomegranate" is preceded by gan {.}; however, the pomegranate was originally called Gan Shih-lau, as it was introduced to China from Gan-seih by Chang-k’een, who is mentioned in chapter vii.
CHAPTER VI.
ON TOWARDS NORTH INDIA. DARADA. IMAGE OF MAITREYA BODHISATTVA.
From this (the travellers) went westwards towards North India, and after being on the way for a month, they succeeded in getting across and through the range of the Onion mountains. The snow rests on them both winter and summer. There are also among them venomous dragons, which, when provoked, spit forth poisonous winds, and cause showers of snow and storms of sand and gravel. Not one in ten thousand of those who encounter these dangers escapes with his life. The people of the country call the range by the name of “The Snow mountains.” When (the travellers) had got through them, they were in North India, and immediately on entering its borders, found themselves in a small kingdom called T’o-leih,(1) where also there were many monks, all students of the hinayana.
From there, the travelers headed west towards North India, and after a month on the road, they managed to cross the Onion mountains. Snow lies on these peaks year-round. There are also deadly dragons among them that, when threatened, release poisonous winds, causing blizzards and storms of sand and gravel. Only about one in ten thousand people who face these dangers survives. The locals refer to this range as "The Snow Mountains." Once they crossed the mountains, they were in North India and immediately upon entering, they found themselves in a small kingdom called T’o-leih,(1) where there were also many monks, all followers of the hinayana.
In this kingdom there was formerly an Arhan,(2) who by his supernatural power(3) took a clever artificer up to the Tushita heaven, to see the height, complexion, and appearance of Maitreya Bodhisattva,(4) and then return and make an image of him in wood. First and last, this was done three times, and then the image was completed, eighty cubits in height, and eight cubits at the base from knee to knee of the crossed legs. On fast-days it emits an effulgent light. The kings of the (surrounding) countries vie with one another in presenting offerings to it. Here it is,—to be seen now as of old.(5)
In this kingdom, there used to be an Arhan who, with his supernatural power, took a skilled craftsman up to Tushita heaven to see the height, appearance, and features of Maitreya Bodhisattva. After that, the craftsman returned to create a wood carving of him. This was done three times overall, and eventually, the statue was finished, standing eighty cubits tall and eight cubits wide from knee to knee of its crossed legs. On fasting days, it glows with a radiant light. The kings of the surrounding countries compete to offer gifts to it. Here it is—to be seen now just like before.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Eitel and others identify this with Darada, the country of the ancient Dardae, the region near Dardus; lat. 30° 11′ N., lon. 73° 54′ E. See E. H. p. 30. I am myself in more than doubt on the point. Cunningham (“Ancient Geography of India,” p. 82) says “Darel is a valley on the right or western bank of the Indus, now occupied by Dardus or Dards, from whom it received its name.” But as I read our narrative, Fâ-Hien is here on the eastern bank of the Indus, and only crosses to the western bank as described in the next chapter.
(1) Eitel and others link this to Darada, the territory of the ancient Dardae, located near Dardus; lat. 30° 11′ N., lon. 73° 54′ E. See E. H. p. 30. I personally have serious doubts about this. Cunningham (“Ancient Geography of India,” p. 82) states that “Darel is a valley on the right or western bank of the Indus, currently occupied by Dardus or Dards, which is where it got its name.” However, as I interpret our account, Fâ-Hien is on the eastern bank of the Indus here and only crosses over to the western bank as explained in the next chapter.
(2) Lo-han, Arhat, Arahat, are all designations of the perfected Arya, the disciple who has passed the different stages of the Noble Path, or eightfold excellent way, who has conquered all passions, and is not to be reborn again. Arhatship implies possession of certain supernatural powers, and is not to be succeeded by Buddhaship, but implies the fact of the saint having already attained nirvâna. Popularly, the Chinese designate by this name the wider circle of Buddha’s disciples, as well as the smaller ones of 500 and 18. No temple in Canton is better worth a visit than that of the 500 Lo-han.
(2) Lo-han, Arhat, Arahat, are all names for the perfected Arya, the disciple who has completed the different stages of the Noble Path, or the eightfold excellent way, who has overcome all passions, and will not be reborn. Arhatship means having certain supernatural abilities and does not come before Buddhaship, but indicates that the saint has already reached nirvâna. In general, the Chinese use this term to refer to both the wider group of Buddha’s disciples and the smaller groups of 500 and 18. No temple in Canton is more worth visiting than that of the 500 Lo-han.
(3) Riddhi-sakshatkriya, “the power of supernatural footsteps,“=”a body flexible at pleasure,” or unlimited power over the body. E. H., p. 104.
(3) Riddhi-sakshatkriya, “the ability to take supernatural steps,” = “a body that can bend at will,” or limitless control over the body. E. H., p. 104.
(4) Tushita is the fourth Devaloka, where all Bodhisattvas are reborn before finally appearing on earth as Buddha. Life lasts in Tushita 4000 years, but twenty-four hours there are equal to 400 years on earth. E. H., p. 152.
(4) Tushita is the fourth Devaloka, where all Bodhisattvas are reborn before finally appearing on Earth as Buddhas. Life lasts in Tushita for 4000 years, but twenty-four hours there are equal to 400 years on Earth. E. H., p. 152.
(5) Maitreya (Spence Hardy, Maitri), often styled Ajita, “the Invincible,” was a Bodhisattva, the principal one, indeed, of Sâkyamuni’s retinue, but is not counted among the ordinary (historical) disciples, nor is anything told of his antecedents. It was in the Tushita heaven that Sâkyamuni met him and appointed him as his successor, to appear as Buddha after the lapse of 5000 years. Maitreya is therefore the expected Messiah of the Buddhists, residing at present in Tushita, and, according to the account of him in Eitel (H., p. 70), “already controlling the propagation of the Buddhistic faith.” The name means “gentleness” or “kindness;” and this will be the character of his dispensation.
(5) Maitreya (Spence Hardy, Maitri), often called Ajita, “the Invincible,” was a Bodhisattva, the main one, in fact, in Sâkyamuni’s group, but he isn't considered one of the regular historical disciples, and there’s no information about his background. Sâkyamuni met him in the Tushita heaven and designated him as his successor, set to appear as a Buddha after 5000 years. Therefore, Maitreya is the anticipated Messiah of the Buddhists, currently residing in Tushita, and, according to Eitel (H., p. 70), “already overseeing the spread of the Buddhist faith.” The name means “gentleness” or “kindness,” which will characterize his teachings.
(6) The combination of {.} {.} in the text of this concluding sentence, and so frequently occurring throughout the narrative, has occasioned no little dispute among previous translators. In the imperial thesaurus of phraseology (P’ei-wan Yun-foo), under {.}, an example of it is given from Chwang-tsze, and a note subjoined that {.} {.} is equivalent to {.} {.}, “anciently and now.”
(6) The combination of {.} {.} in this concluding sentence, which appears so often throughout the story, has sparked considerable debate among earlier translators. In the comprehensive reference of phrases (P’ei-wan Yun-foo), under {.}, there’s an example from Chwang-tsze, along with a note stating that {.} {.} is equivalent to {.} {.}, “anciently and now.”
CHAPTER VII.
CROSSING OF THE INDUS. WHEN BUDDHISM FIRST CROSSED THE RIVER FOR THE EAST
The travellers went on to the south-west for fifteen days (at the foot of the mountains, and) following the course of their range. The way was difficult and rugged, (running along) a bank exceedingly precipitous, which rose up there, a hill-like wall of rock, 10,000 cubits from the base. When one approaches the edge of it, his eyes become unsteady; and if he wished to go forward in the same direction, there was no place on which he could place his foot; and beneath where the waters of the river called the Indus.(1) In former times men had chiselled paths along the rocks, and distributed ladders on the face of them, to the number altogether of 700, at the bottom of which there was a suspension bridge of ropes, by which the river was crossed, its banks being there eighty paces apart.(2) The (place and arrangements) are to be found in the Records of the Nine Interpreters,(3) but neither Chang K’een(4) nor Kan Ying(5) had reached the spot.
The travelers headed south-west for fifteen days, following the base of the mountains. The route was tough and uneven, along a very steep bank that rose like a wall of rock, 10,000 cubits high. As one nears the edge, their vision becomes shaky, and if they try to move forward in the same direction, there’s nowhere to step; below lies the river known as the Indus. In the past, people carved paths into the rocks and installed a total of 700 ladders along the way. At the bottom, there was a rope suspension bridge that crossed the river, with its banks about eighty paces apart. The location and setup can be found in the Records of the Nine Interpreters, but neither Chang K’een nor Kan Ying had made it to that place.
The monks(6) asked Fâ-Hien if it could be known when the Law of Buddha first went to the east. He replied, “When I asked the people of those countries about it, they all said that it had been handed down by their fathers from of old that, after the setting up of the image of Maitreya Bodhisattva, there were Sramans of India who crossed this river, carrying with them Sûtras and Books of Discipline. Now the image was set up rather more than 300 years after the nirvâna(7) of Buddha, which may be referred to the reign of king P’ing of the Chow dynasty.(8) According to this account we may say that the diffusion of our great doctrines (in the east) began from (the setting up of) this image. If it had not been through that Maitreya,(9) the great spiritual master(10) (who is to be) the successor of the Sakya, who could have caused the ‘Three Precious Ones’(11) to be proclaimed so far, and the people of those border lands to know our Law? We know of a truth that the opening of (the way for such) a mysterious propagation is not the work of man; and so the dream of the emperor Ming of Han(12) had its proper cause.”
The monks asked Fâ-Hien if he knew when the Buddha's teachings first spread to the east. He replied, “When I asked the people from those regions about it, they all said that it had been passed down from their ancestors that, after the statue of Maitreya Bodhisattva was established, there were Sramans from India who crossed this river, bringing with them Sûtras and Books of Discipline. The statue was set up a little over 300 years after the Buddha's nirvâna, which can be linked to the reign of King P’ing of the Chow dynasty. Based on this information, we can say that the spread of our great teachings in the east began with this statue. If it weren't for that Maitreya, the great spiritual teacher who is to succeed the Sakya, who could have made the 'Three Precious Ones' known so far and allowed the people in those borderlands to learn our teachings? We definitely know that the start of such a mysterious spread is not something created by humans; thus, the dream of Emperor Ming of Han had its true cause.”
NOTES
NOTES
(1) The Sindhu. We saw in a former note that the earliest name in China for India was Shin-tuh. So, here, the river Indus is called by a name approaching that in sound.
(1) The Sindhu. We noted earlier that the first name used in China for India was Shin-tuh. Here, the river Indus is referred to by a name that sounds similar.
(2) Both Beal and Watters quote from Cunningham (Ladak, pp. 88, 89) the following description of the course of the Indus in these parts, in striking accordance with our author’s account:—“From Skardo to Rongdo, and from Rongdo to Makpou-i-shang-rong, for upwards of 100 miles, the Indus sweeps sullen and dark through a mighty gorge in the mountains, which for wild sublimity is perhaps unequalled. Rongdo means the country of defiles. . . . Between these points the Indus raves from side to side of the gloomy chasm, foaming and chafing with ungovernable fury. Yet even in these inaccessible places has daring and ingenious man triumphed over opposing nature. The yawning abyss is spanned by frail rope bridges, and the narrow ledges of rocks are connected by ladders to form a giddy pathway overhanging the seething cauldron below.”
(2) Both Beal and Watters quote from Cunningham (Ladak, pp. 88, 89) the following description of the Indus River in these areas, which aligns perfectly with our author’s account:—“From Skardo to Rongdo, and from Rongdo to Makpou-i-shang-rong, for more than 100 miles, the Indus flows dark and brooding through a massive gorge in the mountains, renowned for its wild beauty. Rongdo means the land of narrow passages. . . . Between these points, the Indus rages from side to side of the shadowy chasm, bubbling and crashing with uncontrollable intensity. Yet even in these remote locations, inventive and brave people have managed to conquer nature's challenges. The gaping chasm is crossed by fragile rope bridges, and narrow ledges of rock are joined by ladders to create a dizzying pathway overhanging the boiling abyss below.”
(3) The Japanese edition has a different reading here from the Chinese copies,—one which Rémusat (with true critical instinct) conjectured should take the place of the more difficult text with which alone he was acquainted. The “Nine Interpreters” would be a general name for the official interpreters attached to the invading armies of Han in their attempts to penetrate and subdue the regions of the west. The phrase occurs in the memoir of Chang K’een, referred to in the next note.
(3) The Japanese edition has a different reading here than the Chinese copies, which Rémusat (with true critical insight) guessed should replace the more complex text he was only familiar with. The “Nine Interpreters” would refer to the official interpreters connected to the Han invading armies in their efforts to expand into and conquer the western regions. This phrase appears in the memoir of Chang K’een, mentioned in the next note.
(4) Chang K’een, a minister of the emperor Woo of Han (B.C. 140-87), is celebrated as the first Chinese who “pierced the void,” and penetrated to “the regions of the west,” corresponding very much to the present Turkestan. Through him, by B.C. 115, a regular intercourse was established between China and the thirty-six kingdoms or states of that quarter;—see Mayers’ Chinese Reader’s Manual, p. 5. The memoir of Chang K’een, translated by Mr. Wylie from the Books of the first Han dynasty, appears in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute, referred to already.
(4) Chang K’een, a minister of Emperor Woo of Han (B.C. 140-87), is known as the first Chinese who “pierced the void” and reached “the regions of the west,” which closely corresponds to present-day Turkestan. By B.C. 115, he established regular contact between China and the thirty-six kingdoms or states in that area;—see Mayers’ Chinese Reader’s Manual, p. 5. The memoir of Chang K’een, translated by Mr. Wylie from the Books of the first Han dynasty, can be found in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute, as noted earlier.
(5) Less is known of Kan Ying than of Chang K’een. Being sent in A.D. 88 by his patron Pan Chao on an embassy to the Roman empire, he only got as far as the Caspian sea, and returned to China. He extended, however, the knowledge of his countrymen with regard to the western regions;—see the memoir of Pan Chao in the Books of the second Han, and Mayers’ Manual, pp. 167, 168.
(5) Less is known about Kan Ying than about Chang K’een. In A.D. 88, his patron Pan Chao sent him on a mission to the Roman Empire, but he only made it as far as the Caspian Sea before returning to China. Nevertheless, he helped expand his countrymen's understanding of the western regions; see the memoir of Pan Chao in the Books of the second Han and Mayers’ Manual, pp. 167, 168.
(6) Where and when? Probably at his first resting-place after crossing the Indus.
(6) Where and when? Most likely at his first stopping point after crossing the Indus.
(7) This may refer to Sâkyamuni’s becoming Buddha on attaining to nirvâna, or more probably to his pari-nirvâna and death.
(7) This might refer to Sâkyamuni becoming Buddha when he reached nirvana, or more likely to his pari-nirvana and death.
(8) As king P’ing’s reign lasted from B.C. 750 to 719, this would place the death of Buddha in the eleventh century B.C., whereas recent inquirers place it between B.C. 480 and 470, a year or two, or a few years, after that of Confucius, so that the two great “Masters” of the east were really contemporaries. But if Rhys Davids be correct, as I think he is, in fixing the date of Buddha’s death within a few years of 412 B.C. (see Manual, p. 213), not to speak of Westergaard’s still lower date, then the Buddha was very considerably the junior of Confucius.
(8) Since King P’ing reigned from 750 to 719 B.C., this places Buddha's death in the eleventh century B.C. However, recent researchers suggest it was between 480 and 470 B.C., a year or two, or a few years, after Confucius, which means the two great "Masters" of the east were actually contemporaries. But if Rhys Davids is correct, which I believe he is, in dating Buddha's death to within a few years of 412 B.C. (see Manual, p. 213), not to mention Westergaard's even earlier date, then Buddha was significantly younger than Confucius.
(9) This confirms the words of Eitel, that Maitreya is already controlling the propagation of the faith.
(9) This supports what Eitel said, that Maitreya is already overseeing the spread of the faith.
(10) The Chinese characters for this simply mean “the great scholar or officer;” but see Eitel’s Handbook, p. 99, on the term purusha.
(10) The Chinese characters for this simply mean “the great scholar or officer;” but see Eitel’s Handbook, p. 99, on the term purusha.
(11) “The precious Buddha,” “the precious Law,” and “the precious Monkhood;” Buddha, Dharma, and Sangha; the whole being equivalent to Buddhism.
(11) “The precious Buddha,” “the precious Law,” and “the precious Monkhood;” Buddha, Dharma, and Sangha; all of these are essentially what Buddhism represents.
(12) Fâ-Hien thus endorses the view that Buddhism was introduced into China in this reign, A.D. 58-75. The emperor had his dream in A.D. 61.
(12) Fâ-Hien supports the idea that Buddhism was brought to China during this reign, A.D. 58-75. The emperor had his dream in A.D. 61.
CHAPTER VIII.
WOO-CHANG, OR UDYANA. MONASTERIES, AND THEIR WAYS. TRACES OF BUDDHA.
After crossing the river, (the travellers) immediately came to the kingdom of Woo-chang,(1) which is indeed (a part) of North India. The people all use the language of Central India, “Central India” being what we should call the “Middle Kingdom.” The food and clothes of the common people are the same as in that Central Kingdom. The Law of Buddha is very (flourishing in Woo-chang). They call the places where the monks stay (for a time) or reside permanently Sangharamas; and of these there are in all 500, the monks being all students of the hinayana. When stranger bhikshus(2) arrive at one of them, their wants are supplied for three days, after which they are told to find a resting-place for themselves.
After crossing the river, the travelers immediately arrived in the kingdom of Woo-chang, which is part of North India. The people all speak the language of Central India, which we refer to as the "Middle Kingdom." The food and clothing of the common people are similar to those in that Central Kingdom. The Law of Buddha is thriving in Woo-chang. They refer to the places where the monks stay temporarily or reside permanently as Sangharamas; and there are a total of 500 of them, with the monks all being students of the Hinayana. When foreign bhikshus arrive at one of these places, their needs are taken care of for three days, after which they are asked to find their own resting place.
There is a tradition that when Buddha came to North India, he came at once to this country, and that here he left a print of his foot, which is long or short according to the ideas of the beholder (on the subject). It exists, and the same thing is true about it, at the present day. Here also are still to be seen the rock on which he dried his clothes, and the place where he converted the wicked dragon.(3) The rock is fourteen cubits high, and more than twenty broad, with one side of it smooth.
There’s a tradition that when Buddha arrived in North India, he came straight to this country, and here he left an impression of his foot, which varies in length depending on who’s looking at it. It's still there today, just like the rock where he dried his clothes and the spot where he converted the evil dragon. The rock is fourteen cubits high and more than twenty wide, with one side that’s smooth.
Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching went on ahead towards (the place of) Buddha’s shadow in the country of Nagara;(4) but Fâ-Hien and the others remained in Woo-chang, and kept the summer retreat.(5) That over, they descended south, and arrived in the country of Soo-ho-to.(6)
Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching went ahead to Buddha’s shadow in the country of Nagara; but Fâ-Hien and the others stayed in Woo-chang and observed the summer retreat. Once that was over, they headed south and reached the country of Soo-ho-to.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Udyâna, meaning “the Park;” just north of the Punjâb, the country along the Subhavastu, now called the Swat; noted for its forests, flowers, and fruits (E. H., p. 153).
(1) Udyâna, meaning "the Park," is located just north of the Punjab, along the Subhavastu, which is now called the Swat. It's known for its forests, flowers, and fruits (E. H., p. 153).
(2) Bhikshu is the name for a monk as “living by alms,” a mendicant. All bhikshus call themselves Sramans. Sometimes the two names are used together by our author.
(2) Bhikshu is the term for a monk who “lives by alms,” a beggar. All bhikshus refer to themselves as Sramans. Occasionally, our author uses both names together.
(3) Naga is the Sanskrit name for the Chinese lung or dragon; often meaning a snake, especially the boa. “Chinese Buddhists,” says Eitel, p. 79, “when speaking of nagas as boa spirits, always represent them as enemies of mankind, but when viewing them as deities of rivers, lakes, or oceans, they describe them as piously inclined.” The dragon, however, is in China the symbol of the Sovereign and Sage, a use of it unknown in Buddhism, according to which all nagas need to be converted in order to obtain a higher phase of being. The use of the character too {.}, as here, in the sense of “to convert,” is entirely Buddhistic. The six paramitas are the six virtues which carry men across {.} the great sea of life and death, as the sphere of transmigration to nirvâna. With regard to the particular conversion here, Eitel (p. 11) says the Naga’s name was Apatala, the guardian deity of the Subhavastu river, and that he was converted by Sâkyamuni shortly before the death of the latter.
(3) Naga is the Sanskrit term for the Chinese lung or dragon; it often means a snake, especially the boa. “Chinese Buddhists,” says Eitel, p. 79, “when referring to nagas as boa spirits, always depict them as enemies of humanity, but when viewing them as gods of rivers, lakes, or oceans, they describe them as benevolent.” However, in China, the dragon symbolizes the Sovereign and Sage, a meaning not found in Buddhism, which teaches that all nagas must be converted to achieve a higher state of existence. The use of the character too {.}, as seen here, in the sense of “to convert,” is entirely a Buddhist concept. The six paramitas are the six virtues that help people navigate {.} the vast sea of life and death, which represents the cycle of rebirth leading to nirvana. Regarding the specific conversion mentioned here, Eitel (p. 11) states that the Naga’s name was Apatala, the guardian god of the Subhavastu river, and that he was converted by Sakyamuni shortly before the latter's death.
(4) In Chinese Na-k’eeh, an ancient kingdom and city on the southern bank of the Cabul river, about thirty miles west of Jellalabad.
(4) In Chinese Na-k’eeh, an ancient kingdom and city on the southern bank of the Cabul river, about thirty miles west of Jellalabad.
(5) We would seem now to be in 403.
(5) It looks like we are now in 403.
(6) Soo-ho-to has not been clearly identified. Beal says that later Buddhist writers include it in Udyâna. It must have been between the Indus and the Swat. I suppose it was what we now call Swastene.
(6) Soo-ho-to hasn't been clearly identified. Beal mentions that later Buddhist writers place it in Udyâna. It must have been located between the Indus and the Swat. I think it was what we now refer to as Swastene.
CHAPTER IX.
SOO-HO-TO. LEGEND OF BUDDHA.
In that country also Buddhism(1) is flourishing. There is in it the place where Sakra,(2) Ruler of Devas, in a former age,(3) tried the Bodhisattva, by producing(4) a hawk (in pursuit of a) dove, when (the Bodhisattva) cut off a piece of his own flesh, and (with it) ransomed the dove. After Buddha had attained to perfect wisdom,(5) and in travelling about with his disciples (arrived at this spot), he informed them that this was the place where he ransomed the dove with a piece of his own flesh. In this way the people of the country became aware of the fact, and on the spot reared a tope, adorned with layers(6) of gold and silver plates.
In that country, Buddhism is thriving. There's a place where Sakra, the Ruler of Devas, once tested the Bodhisattva by sending a hawk after a dove. The Bodhisattva then cut off a piece of his own flesh to save the dove. After the Buddha achieved perfect wisdom and was traveling with his disciples, he reached this spot and told them that it was where he had ransomed the dove with his own flesh. Because of this, the people in the area learned about the story and built a stupa on the site, decorated with layers of gold and silver plates.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Buddhism stands for the two Chinese characters {.} {.}, “the Law of Buddha,” and to that rendering of the phrase, which is of frequent occurrence, I will in general adhere. Buddhism is not an adequate rendering of them any more than Christianity would be of {to euaggelion Xristou}. The Fa or Law is the equivalent of dharma comprehending all in the first Basket of the Buddhist teaching,—as Dr. Davids says (Hibbert Lectures, p. 44), “its ethics and philosophy, and its system of self-culture;” with the theory of karma, it seems to me, especially underlying it. It has been pointed out (Cunningham’s “Bhilsa Topes,” p. 102) that dharma is the keystone of all king Priyadarsi or Asoka’s edicts. The whole of them are dedicated to the attainment of one object, “the advancement of dharma, or of the Law of Buddha.” His native Chinese afforded no better character than {.} or Law, by which our author could express concisely his idea of the Buddhistic system, as “a law of life,” a directory or system of Rules, by which men could attain to the consummation of their being.
(1) Buddhism represents the two Chinese characters {.} {.}, which mean “the Law of Buddha,” and I will generally stick to that interpretation, as it's commonly used. Buddhism doesn’t fully capture their meaning, just like Christianity wouldn’t accurately translate {to euaggelion Xristou}. The Fa or Law is equivalent to dharma, which includes everything in the first Basket of Buddhist teachings—as Dr. Davids points out (Hibbert Lectures, p. 44), “its ethics and philosophy, and its system of self-culture;” with the idea of karma playing a significant role within it. It has been noted (Cunningham’s “Bhilsa Topes,” p. 102) that dharma is the cornerstone of all the edicts of King Priyadarsi or Asoka. All of them are aimed at achieving one goal: “the advancement of dharma, or of the Law of Buddha.” The native Chinese language didn’t have a better character than {.} or Law for our author to succinctly express his idea of the Buddhist system as “a law of life,” a guide or system of rules through which people could reach the fulfillment of their existence.
(2) Sakra is a common name for the Brahmanic Indra, adopted by Buddhism into the circle of its own great adherents;—it has been said, “because of his popularity.” He is generally styled, as here, T’een Ti, “God or Ruler of Devas.” He is now the representative of the secular power, the valiant protector of the Buddhist body, but is looked upon as inferior to Sâkyamuni, and every Buddhist saint. He appears several times in Fâ-Hien’s narrative. E. H., pp. 108 and 46.
(2) Sakra is a common name for the Hindu god Indra, which Buddhism has adopted among its important figures; it's been said “because of his popularity.” He is usually referred to, like here, as T’een Ti, “God or Ruler of Devas.” He now represents worldly power and serves as the brave protector of the Buddhist community but is considered less significant than Sâkyamuni and any Buddhist saint. He shows up multiple times in Fâ-Hien’s story. E. H., pp. 108 and 46.
(3) The Chinese character is {.}, “formerly,” and is often, as in the first sentence of the narrative, simply equivalent to that adverb. At other times it means, as here, “in a former age,” some pre-existent state in the time of a former birth. The incident related is “a Jataka story.”
(3) The Chinese character is {.}, “formerly,” and is often, as in the first sentence of the narrative, simply equivalent to that adverb. At other times it means, as here, “in a former age,” referring to some previous state from a past life. The incident being discussed is “a Jataka story.”
(4) It occurs at once to the translator to render the characters {.} {.} by “changed himself to.” Such is often their meaning in the sequel, but their use in chapter xxiv may be considered as a crucial test of the meaning which I have given them here.
(4) The translator immediately thinks to translate the characters {.} {.} as “changed himself to.” This is often their meaning later on, but their use in chapter xxiv can be seen as a critical test of the interpretation I’ve provided here.
(5) That is, had become Buddha, or completed his course {.} {.}.
(5) That is, had become Buddha, or finished his journey {.} {.}.
(6) This seems to be the contribution of {.} (or {.}), to the force of the binomial {.} {.}, which is continually occurring.
(6) This appears to be the contribution of {.} (or {.}), to the strength of the binomial {.} {.}, which keeps happening.
CHAPTER X.
GANDHARA. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA.
The travellers, going downwards from this towards the east, in five days came to the country of Gandhara,(1) the place where Dharma-vivardhana,(2) the son of Asoka,(3) ruled. When Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave his eyes also for another man here;(4) and at the spot they have also reared a large tope, adorned with layers of gold and silver plates. The people of the country were mostly students of the hinayana.
The travelers, heading eastward from here, reached the country of Gandhara in five days, where Dharma-vivardhana, the son of Asoka, was in charge. When Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he also gave his eyes for another person here; and at that location, they built a large stupa, decorated with layers of gold and silver plates. Most people in the area were students of the Hinayana.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Eitel says “an ancient kingdom, corresponding to the region about Dheri and Banjour.” But see note 5.
(1) Eitel mentions “an ancient kingdom, similar to the area around Dheri and Banjour.” But see note 5.
(2) Dharma-vivardhana is the name in Sanskrit, represented by the Fa Yi {.} {.} of the text.
(2) Dharma-vivardhana is the name in Sanskrit, represented by the Fa Yi {.} {.} of the text.
(3) Asoka is here mentioned for the first time;—the Constantine of the Buddhist society, and famous for the number of vihâras and topes which he erected. He was the grandson of Chandragupta (i.q. Sandracottus), a rude adventurer, who at one time was a refugee in the camp of Alexander the Great; and within about twenty years afterwards drove the Greeks out of India, having defeated Seleucus, the Greek ruler of the Indus provinces. He had by that time made himself king of Magadha. His grandson was converted to Buddhism by the bold and patient demeanour of an Arhat whom he had ordered to be buried alive, and became a most zealous supporter of the new faith. Dr. Rhys Davids (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, p. xlvi) says that “Asoka’s coronation can be fixed with absolute certainty within a year or two either way of 267 B.C.”
(3) Asoka is mentioned here for the first time; he’s the Constantine of the Buddhist community and is known for the many vihâras and topes he built. He was the grandson of Chandragupta (also known as Sandracottus), who was a rough adventurer and once sought refuge in Alexander the Great's camp. About twenty years later, he expelled the Greeks from India after defeating Seleucus, the Greek ruler of the Indus provinces. By that time, he had become the king of Magadha. His grandson converted to Buddhism after witnessing the courageous and calm demeanor of an Arhat he had ordered to be buried alive, and he became a very devoted supporter of the new faith. Dr. Rhys Davids (Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, p. xlvi) states that “Asoka’s coronation can be fixed with absolute certainty within a year or two either way of 267 B.C.”
(4) This also is a Jataka story; but Eitel thinks it may be a myth, constructed from the story of the blinding of Dharma-vivardhana.
(4) This is also a Jataka story; however, Eitel believes it might be a myth, created from the tale of the blinding of Dharma-vivardhana.
CHAPTER XI.
TAKSHASILA. LEGENDS. THE FOUR GREAT TOPES.
Seven days’ journey from this to the east brought the travellers to the kingdom of Takshasila,(1) which means “the severed head” in the language of China. Here, when Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave away his head to a man;(2) and from this circumstance the kingdom got its name.
Seven days' journey from here to the east brought the travelers to the kingdom of Takshasila,(1) which means "the severed head" in Chinese. Here, when Buddha was a Bodhisattva, he gave his head to a man;(2) and that's how the kingdom got its name.
Going on further for two days to the east, they came to the place where the Bodhisattva threw down his body to feed a starving tigress.(2) In these two places also large topes have been built, both adorned with layers of all the precious substances. The kings, ministers, and peoples of the kingdoms around vie with one another in making offerings at them. The trains of those who come to scatter flowers and light lamps at them never cease. The nations of those quarters all those (and the other two mentioned before) “the four great topes.”
Continuing east for two more days, they reached the spot where the Bodhisattva sacrificed his body to feed a starving tigress. In both of these locations, large stupas have been constructed, beautifully decorated with layers of precious materials. The kings, ministers, and people from the surrounding kingdoms compete to make offerings there. The flow of visitors coming to scatter flowers and light lamps never ends. The nations in that region refer to these sites, along with the other two previously mentioned, as “the four great stupas.”
NOTES
NOTES
(1) See Julien’s “Methode pour dechiffrer et transcrire les Nomes Sanscrits,” p. 206. Eitel says, “The Taxila of the Greeks, the region near Hoosun Abdaul in lat. 35° 48′ N., lon. 72° 44′ E.” But this identification, I am satisfied, is wrong. Cunningham, indeed, takes credit (“Ancient Geography of India,” pp. 108, 109) for determining this to be the site of Arrian’s Taxila,—in the upper Punjâb, still existing in the ruins of Shahdheri, between the Indus and Hydaspes (the modern Jhelum). So far he may be correct; but the Takshasila of Fâ-Hien was on the other, or western side of the Indus; and between the river and Gandhara. It took him, indeed, seven days travelling eastwards to reach it; but we do not know what stoppages he may have made on the way. We must be wary in reckoning distances from his specifications of days.
(1) See Julien’s “Method for Deciphering and Transcribing the Sanskrit Names,” p. 206. Eitel says, “The Taxila of the Greeks, the area near Hoosun Abdaul at latitude 35° 48′ N., longitude 72° 44′ E.” However, I believe this identification is incorrect. Cunningham, in fact, claims credit (“Ancient Geography of India,” pp. 108, 109) for identifying this as the location of Arrian’s Taxila,—in the upper Punjab, still present in the ruins of Shahdheri, located between the Indus and Hydaspes (the modern Jhelum). He may be right about that; but the Takshasila of Fâ-Hien was on the opposite, or western side of the Indus; situated between the river and Gandhara. It took him seven days traveling eastward to get there; but we do not know what stops he might have made on the journey. We need to be careful when calculating distances based on his statements of travel days.
(2) Two Jataka stories. See the account of the latter in Spence Hardy’s “Manual of Buddhism,” pp. 91, 92. It took place when Buddha had been born as a Brahman in the village of Daliddi; and from the merit of the act, he was next born in a devaloka.
(2) Two Jataka stories. See the account of the latter in Spence Hardy’s “Manual of Buddhism,” pp. 91, 92. It happened when Buddha was reborn as a Brahman in the village of Daliddi; and because of the good deeds, he was later reborn in a devaloka.
CHAPTER XII.
PURUSHAPURA, OR PESHAWUR. PROPHECY ABOUT KING KANISHKA AND HIS TOPE.
BUDDHA’S ALMS-BOWL. DEATH OF HWUY-YING.
Going southwards from Gandhara, (the travellers) in four days arrived at the kingdom of Purushapura.(1) Formerly, when Buddha was travelling in this country with his disciples, he said to Ananda,(2) “After my pari-nirvâna,(3) there will be a king named Kanishka,(4) who shall on this spot build a tope.” This Kanishka was afterwards born into the world; and (once), when he had gone forth to look about him, Sakra, Ruler of Devas, wishing to excite the idea in his mind, assumed the appearance of a little herd-boy, and was making a tope right in the way (of the king), who asked what sort of thing he was making. The boy said, “I am making a tope for Buddha.” The king said, “Very good;” and immediately, right over the boy’s tope, he (proceeded to) rear another, which was more than four hundred cubits high, and adorned with layers of all the precious substances. Of all the topes and temples which (the travellers) saw in their journeyings, there was not one comparable to this in solemn beauty and majestic grandeur. There is a current saying that this is the finest tope in Jambudvipa.(5) When the king’s tope was completed, the little tope (of the boy) came out from its side on the south, rather more than three cubits in height.
Traveling south from Gandhara, the travelers reached the kingdom of Purushapura in four days. Back when Buddha was journeying through this region with his disciples, he told Ananda, "After my parinirvana, there will be a king named Kanishka who will build a stupa right here." This Kanishka later came into the world, and one day, when he went out to explore, Sakra, the Ruler of Devas, wanting to inspire him, took the form of a young shepherd boy and was building a stupa right in the king's path. The king asked what he was making, and the boy replied, "I'm making a stupa for Buddha." The king said, "That's great," and immediately began to construct a much larger stupa over the boy’s, which stood more than four hundred cubits high and was decorated with layers of all kinds of precious materials. Among all the stupas and temples that the travelers encountered on their journey, none could match this one in its solemn beauty and grand majesty. There’s a saying that this stupa is the finest in Jambudvipa. Once the king's stupa was finished, the little stupa of the boy appeared on its southern side, just over three cubits tall.
Buddha’s alms-bowl is in this country. Formerly, a king of Yueh-she(6) raised a large force and invaded this country, wishing to carry the bowl away. Having subdued the kingdom, as he and his captains were sincere believers in the Law of Buddha, and wished to carry off the bowl, they proceeded to present their offerings on a great scale. When they had done so to the Three Precious Ones, he made a large elephant be grandly caparisoned, and placed the bowl upon it. But the elephant knelt down on the ground, and was unable to go forward. Again he caused a four-wheeled waggon to be prepared in which the bowl was put to be conveyed away. Eight elephants were then yoked to it, and dragged it with their united strength; but neither were they able to go forward. The king knew that the time for an association between himself and the bowl had not yet arrived,(7) and was sad and deeply ashamed of himself. Forthwith he built a tope at the place and a monastery, and left a guard to watch (the bowl), making all sorts of contributions.
Buddha’s alms-bowl is in this country. In the past, a king from Yueh-she raised a large army and invaded this country, intending to take the bowl. After conquering the kingdom, he and his leaders, who were devoted followers of Buddha's teachings, wanted to take the bowl with them and began to offer gifts on a grand scale. Once they had made their offerings to the Three Precious Ones, he adorned a large elephant with impressive decorations and placed the bowl on it. However, the elephant knelt down and wouldn’t move. He then arranged for a four-wheeled wagon to transport the bowl, with eight elephants hitched to it, using all their strength to pull it, but they still couldn’t move it. The king realized that the time for him to take the bowl had not yet come, and he felt sad and deeply ashamed. He immediately constructed a stupa at the site and a monastery, leaving a guard to watch over the bowl and making various contributions.
There may be there more than seven hundred monks. When it is near midday, they bring out the bowl, and, along with the common people,(8) make their various offerings to it, after which they take their midday meal. In the evening, at the time of incense, they bring the bowl out again.(9) It may contain rather more than two pecks, and is of various colours, black predominating, with the seams that show its fourfold composition distinctly marked.(10) Its thickness is about the fifth of an inch, and it has a bright and glossy lustre. When poor people throw into it a few flowers, it becomes immediately full, while some very rich people, wishing to make offering of many flowers, might not stop till they had thrown in hundreds, thousands, and myriads of bushels, and yet would not be able to fill it.(11)
There may be more than seven hundred monks. Around midday, they bring out the bowl and, along with the local people, make various offerings to it before having their lunch. In the evening, during the incense ceremony, they bring the bowl out again. It can hold just over two pecks and comes in various colors, with black being the most common, and the seams that show its fourfold construction are clearly marked. Its thickness is about a fifth of an inch, and it has a bright, glossy finish. When poor people toss in a few flowers, it fills up right away, while some very wealthy individuals, wanting to offer many flowers, might not stop until they've thrown in hundreds, thousands, or even myriads of bushels, yet it still wouldn't be full.
Pao-yun and Sang-king here merely made their offerings to the alms-bowl, and (then resolved to) go back. Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching had gone on before the rest to Negara,(12) to make their offerings at (the places of) Buddha’s shadow, tooth, and the flat-bone of his skull. (There) Hwuy-king fell ill, and Tao-ching remained to look after him, while Hwuy-tah came alone to Purushapura, and saw the others, and (then) he with Pao-yun and Sang-king took their way back to the land of Ts’in. Hwuy-king(13) came to his end(14) in the monastery of Buddha’s alms-bowl, and on this Fâ-Hien went forward alone towards the place of the flat-bone of Buddha’s skull.
Pao-yun and Sang-king simply made their offerings to the alms-bowl and then decided to head back. Hwuy-king, Hwuy-tah, and Tao-ching had gone ahead to Negara to make their offerings at the sites of Buddha’s shadow, tooth, and the flat bone of his skull. There, Hwuy-king became ill, and Tao-ching stayed behind to care for him, while Hwuy-tah went on alone to Purushapura, where he met up with the others. Then, he, along with Pao-yun and Sang-king, started their journey back to the land of Ts’in. Hwuy-king passed away in the monastery of Buddha’s alms-bowl, and from there, Fâ-Hien set off alone towards the site of the flat bone of Buddha’s skull.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) The modern Peshawur, lat. 34° 8′ N., lon. 71° 30′ E.
(1) The modern Peshawar, lat. 34° 8′ N., lon. 71° 30′ E.
(2) A first cousin of Sâkyamuni, and born at the moment when he attained to Buddhaship. Under Buddha’s teaching, Ananda became an Arhat, and is famous for his strong and accurate memory; and he played an important part at the first council for the formation of the Buddhist canon. The friendship between Sâkyamuni and Ananda was very close and tender; and it is impossible to read much of what the dying Buddha said to him and of him, as related in the Maha-pari-nirvâna Sutra, without being moved almost to tears. Ananda is to reappear on earth as Buddha in another Kalpa. See E. H., p. 9, and the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi.
(2) A first cousin of Sâkyamuni, born at the moment he achieved Buddhahood. Under Buddha's teachings, Ananda became an Arhat and is known for his strong and accurate memory; he played an important role in the first council to form the Buddhist canon. The friendship between Sâkyamuni and Ananda was very close and affectionate; it's hard to read much of what the dying Buddha said to him and about him, as described in the Maha-pari-nirvâna Sutra, without being moved to tears. Ananda will reappear on earth as a Buddha in another Kalpa. See E. H., p. 9, and the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi.
(3) On his attaining to nirvâna, Sâkyamuni became the Buddha, and had no longer to mourn his being within the circle of transmigration, and could rejoice in an absolute freedom from passion, and a perfect purity. Still he continued to live on for forty-five years, till he attained to pari-nirvâna, and had done with all the life of sense and society, and had no more exercise of thought. He died; but whether he absolutely and entirely ceased to be, in any sense of the word being, it would be difficult to say. Probably he himself would not and could not have spoken definitely on the point. So far as our use of language is concerned, apart from any assured faith in and hope of immortality, his pari-nirvâna was his death.
(3) When he reached nirvana, Sakyamuni became the Buddha and no longer had to sorrow over being caught in the cycle of rebirth. He could celebrate his complete freedom from desire and perfect purity. Nevertheless, he continued to live for another forty-five years until he achieved parinirvana, leaving behind all physical life and social engagement, without further thought. He died, but it's hard to say whether he completely and entirely ceased to exist in any sense of the word being. It's likely that he wouldn't have spoken definitively on the matter himself. As far as our language is concerned, aside from any certainty or hope of immortality, his parinirvana marked his death.
(4) Kanishka appeared, and began to reign, early in our first century, about A.D. 10. He was the last of three brothers, whose original seat was in Yueh-she, immediately mentioned, or Tukhara. Converted by the sudden appearance of a saint, he became a zealous Buddhist, and patronised the system as liberally as Asoka had done. The finest topes in the north-west of India are ascribed to him; he was certainly a great man and a magnificent sovereign.
(4) Kanishka showed up and started his reign early in our first century, around A.D. 10. He was the youngest of three brothers, originally from Yueh-she, also known as Tukhara. After a saint appeared to him unexpectedly, he became a passionate Buddhist and supported the religion as generously as Asoka had. The best stupas in northwestern India are attributed to him; he was definitely a remarkable person and an impressive ruler.
(5) Jambudvipa is one of the four great continents of the universe, representing the inhabited world as fancied by the Buddhists, and so called because it resembles in shape the leaves of the jambu tree. It is south of mount Meru, and divided among four fabulous kings (E. H., p. 36). It is often used, as here perhaps, merely as the Buddhist name for India.
(5) Jambudvipa is one of the four major continents of the universe, symbolizing the inhabited world as imagined by the Buddhists, and is named for its shape, which resembles the leaves of the jambu tree. It is located south of Mount Meru and is ruled by four legendary kings (E. H., p. 36). Here, it is often used as the Buddhist term for India.
(6) This king was perhaps Kanishka himself, Fâ-Hien mixing up, in an inartistic way, different legends about him. Eitel suggests that a relic of the old name of the country may still exist in that of the Jats or Juts of the present day. A more common name for it is Tukhara, and he observes that the people were the Indo-Scythians of the Greeks, and the Tartars of Chinese writers, who, driven on by the Huns (180 B.C.), conquered Transoxiana, destroyed the Bactrian kingdom (126 B.C.), and finally conquered the Punjâb, Cashmere, and great part of India, their greatest king being Kanishak (E. H., p. 152).
(6) This king was probably Kanishka himself, with Fâ-Hien mixing different legends about him in a confusing way. Eitel suggests that a trace of the old name of the country might still exist in the present-day Jats or Juts. A more common name for it is Tukhara, and he notes that the people were the Indo-Scythians known to the Greeks and the Tartars recognized by Chinese writers. They, pushed forward by the Huns (180 B.C.), conquered Transoxiana, destroyed the Bactrian kingdom (126 B.C.), and eventually conquered Punjab, Kashmir, and a large part of India, with their greatest king being Kanishak (E. H., p. 152).
(7) Watters, clearly understanding the thought of the author in this sentence, renders—“his destiny did not extend to a connexion with the bowl;” but the term “destiny” suggests a controlling or directing power without. The king thought that his virtue in the past was not yet sufficient to give him possession of the bowl.
(7) Watters, clearly grasping the author's intent in this sentence, translates it as, “his destiny didn’t include a connection with the bowl;” but the word “destiny” implies an external power that controls or directs. The king believed that his past virtue wasn’t enough to grant him access to the bowl.
(8) The text is simply “those in white clothes.” This may mean “the laity,” or the “upasakas;” but it is better to take the characters in their common Chinese acceptation, as meaning “commoners,” “men who have no rank.” See in Williams’ Dictionary under {.}.
(8) The text simply refers to “those in white clothes.” This could mean “the laity” or “upasakas,” but it's better to interpret the terms in their typical Chinese meaning, referring to “commoners” or “people who have no rank.” See in Williams’ Dictionary under {.}.
(9) I do not wonder that Rémusat should give for this—“et s’en retournent apres.” But Fâ-Hien’s use of {.} in the sense of “in the same way” is uniform throughout the narrative.
(9) I’m not surprised that Rémusat would translate this as “and they return after.” However, Fâ-Hien’s use of {.} to mean “in the same way” is consistent throughout the narrative.
(10) Hardy’s M. B., p. 183, says:—“The alms-bowl, given by Mahabrahma, having vanished (about the time that Gotama became Buddha), each of the four guardian deities brought him an alms-bowl of emerald, but he did not accept them. They then brought four bowls made of stone, of the colour of the mung fruit; and when each entreated that his own bowl might be accepted, Buddha caused them to appear as if formed into a single bowl, appearing at the upper rim as if placed one within the other.” See the account more correctly given in the “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 110.
(10) Hardy’s M. B., p. 183, says:—“The alms-bowl, given by Mahabrahma, disappeared (around the time Gotama became Buddha), and each of the four guardian deities offered him an emerald alms-bowl, but he declined them. They then presented four bowls made of stone, the color of mung beans; and when each asked that his bowl be accepted, Buddha made them look like one single bowl, appearing at the upper rim as if they were nested inside each other.” See the account more accurately presented in the “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 110.
(11) Compare the narrative in Luke’s Gospel, xxi. 1-4.
(11) Compare the story in Luke’s Gospel, 21:1-4.
(12) See chapter viii.
See chapter 8.
(13) This, no doubt, should be Hwuy-ying. King was at this time ill in Nagara, and indeed afterwards he dies in crossing the Little Snowy Mountains; but all the texts make him die twice. The confounding of the two names has been pointed out by Chinese critics.
(13) This should definitely be Hwuy-ying. At this time, King was sick in Nagara, and he actually died later while crossing the Little Snowy Mountains; however, all the texts say he dies twice. Chinese critics have noted the confusion between the two names.
(14) “Came to his end;” i.e., according to the text, “proved the impermanence and uncertainty,” namely, of human life. See Williams’ Dictionary under {.}. The phraseology is wholly Buddhistic.
(14) “Came to his end;” meaning, as the text states, “showed the impermanence and uncertainty,” specifically, of human life. See Williams’ Dictionary under {.}. The wording is entirely in line with Buddhist teachings.
CHAPTER XIII.
NAGARA. FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA’S SKULL-BONE. OTHER RELICS, AND HIS
SHADOW.
Going west for sixteen yojanas,(1) he came to the city He-lo(2) in the borders of the country of Nagara, where there is the flat-bone of Buddha’s skull, deposited in a vihâra(3) adorned all over with gold-leaf and the seven sacred substances. The king of the country, revering and honouring the bone, and anxious lest it should be stolen away, has selected eight individuals, representing the great families in the kingdom, and committing to each a seal, with which he should seal (its shrine) and guard (the relic). At early dawn these eight men come, and after each has inspected his seal, they open the door. This done, they wash their hands with scented water and bring out the bone, which they place outside the vihâra, on a lofty platform, where it is supported on a round pedestal of the seven precious substances, and covered with a bell of lapis lazuli, both adorned with rows of pearls. Its colour is of a yellowish white, and it forms an imperfect circle twelve inches round,(4) curving upwards to the centre. Every day, after it has been brought forth, the keepers of the vihâra ascend a high gallery, where they beat great drums, blow conchs, and clash their copper cymbals. When the king hears them, he goes to the vihâra, and makes his offerings of flowers and incense. When he has done this, he (and his attendants) in order, one after another, (raise the bone), place it (for a moment) on the top of their heads,(5) and then depart, going out by the door on the west as they entered by that on the east. The king every morning makes his offerings and performs his worship, and afterwards gives audience on the business of his government. The chiefs of the Vaisyas(6) also make their offerings before they attend to their family affairs. Every day it is so, and there is no remissness in the observance of the custom. When all the offerings are over, they replace the bone in the vihâra, where there is a vimoksha tope,(7) of the seven precious substances, and rather more than five cubits high, sometimes open, sometimes shut, to contain it. In front of the door of the vihâra, there are parties who every morning sell flowers and incense,(8) and those who wish to make offerings buy some of all kinds. The kings of various countries are also constantly sending messengers with offerings. The vihâra stands in a square of thirty paces, and though heaven should shake and earth be rent, this place would not move.
Heading west for sixteen yojanas,(1) he arrived at the city He-lo(2) on the borders of Nagara, where Buddha’s skull bone is kept, preserved in a vihâra(3) decorated with gold leaf and the seven sacred substances. The king of the region, who holds the bone in high regard and fears it might be stolen, has chosen eight representatives from the noble families in the kingdom. He gives each of them a seal to secure (its shrine) and protect (the relic). At dawn, these eight men gather, inspect their seals, and open the door. After this, they wash their hands with scented water and take out the bone, placing it outside the vihâra on a tall platform, resting on a round base made of the seven precious substances, and covered with a lapis lazuli bell, both adorned with pearl strings. The bone has a yellowish-white color and a shape that's an imperfect circle about twelve inches in diameter,(4) curving upward at the center. Every day after it's displayed, the vihâra’s keepers go up to a high gallery where they beat large drums, blow conch shells, and clash copper cymbals. When the king hears them, he visits the vihâra to present his offerings of flowers and incense. After making his offerings, he (and his attendants) take turns (lifting the bone), placing it (briefly) on top of their heads,(5) then exit through the west door, just as they entered from the east. Every morning, the king offers his prayers and worship, then attends to matters of governance. The leaders of the Vaisyas(6) also make their offerings before handling their family matters. This routine happens daily, and there is no negligence in following the custom. Once all offerings are complete, they return the bone to the vihâra, where there is a vimoksha tope,(7) made of the seven precious substances, over five cubits high, which is sometimes open and sometimes closed, to hold it. In front of the vihâra door, vendors sell flowers and incense every morning, and those wishing to make offerings purchase various kinds. Kings from different countries continually send messengers with offerings as well. The vihâra is situated in a square of thirty paces, and even if heaven should tremble and earth should split, this place would remain unmoved.
Going on, north from this, for a yojana, (Fâ-Hien) arrived at the capital of Nagara, the place where the Bodhisattva once purchased with money five stalks of flowers, as an offering to the Dipankara Buddha.(9) In the midst of the city there is also the tope of Buddha’s tooth, where offerings are made in the same way as to the flat-bone of his skull.
Going north from here for about a yojana, (Fâ-Hien) reached the capital of Nagara, the site where the Bodhisattva once bought five stalks of flowers as an offering to the Dipankara Buddha. In the center of the city, there is also the shrine of Buddha's tooth, where people make offerings just like they do at the flat-bone of his skull.
A yojana to the north-east of the city brought him to the mouth of a valley, where there is Buddha’s pewter staff;(10) and a vihâra also has been built at which offerings are made. The staff is made of Gosîrsha Chandana, and is quite sixteen or seventeen cubits long. It is contained in a wooden tube, and though a hundred or a thousand men ere to (try to) lift it, they could not move it.
A yojana northeast of the city took him to the entrance of a valley, where Buddha's pewter staff is located; a vihâra has also been built there for making offerings. The staff is made of Gosîrsha Chandana and is around sixteen or seventeen cubits long. It is held in a wooden tube, and even if a hundred or a thousand men tried to lift it, they wouldn’t be able to move it.
Entering the mouth of the valley, and going west, he found Buddha’s Sanghali,(11) where also there is reared a vihâra, and offerings are made. It is a custom of the country when there is a great drought, for the people to collect in crowds, bring out the robe, pay worship to it, and make offerings, on which there is immediately a great rain from the sky.
Entering the mouth of the valley and heading west, he discovered Buddha’s Sanghali,(11) where there is also a vihâra, and offerings are made. It's a local custom that during a severe drought, the people gather in large groups, take out the robe, worship it, and make offerings, after which a heavy rainfalls from the sky.
South of the city, half a yojana, there is a rock-cavern, in a great hill fronting the south-west; and here it was that Buddha left his shadow. Looking at it from a distance of more than ten paces, you seem to see Buddha’s real form, with his complexion of gold, and his characteristic marks(12) in their nicety clearly and brightly displayed. The nearer you approach, however, the fainter it becomes, as if it were only in your fancy. When the kings from the regions all around have sent skilful artists to take a copy, none of them have been able to do so. Among the people of the country there is a saying current that “the thousand Buddhas(13) must all leave their shadows here.”
South of the city, half a yojana away, there's a rock cavern in a large hill facing the southwest; this is where Buddha left his shadow. When you look at it from more than ten paces away, you feel like you can see Buddha's actual form, with his golden complexion and distinctive features clearly and vividly displayed. However, as you get closer, it becomes less distinct, almost like it’s just in your imagination. Kings from surrounding regions have sent skilled artists to take a copy, but none have succeeded. There's a saying among the locals that “the thousand Buddhas must all leave their shadows here.”
Rather more than four hundred paces west from the shadow, when Buddha was at the spot, he shaved his hair and clipt his nails, and proceeded, along with his disciples, to build a tope seventy or eighty cubits high, to be a model for all future topes; and it is still existing. By the side of it there is a monastery, with more than seven hundred monks in it. At this place there are as many as a thousand topes(14) of Arhans and Pratyeka Buddhas.(15)
Rather more than four hundred steps to the west from the shadow, when Buddha arrived at the location, he shaved his hair and trimmed his nails. He then, along with his disciples, built a stupa that was seventy or eighty cubits high to serve as a model for all future stupas, and it still stands today. Next to it, there's a monastery that houses more than seven hundred monks. In this area, there are as many as a thousand stupas dedicated to Arhats and Pratyeka Buddhas.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Now in India, Fâ-Hien used the Indian measure of distance; but it is not possible to determine exactly what its length then was. The estimates of it are very different, and vary from four and a half or five miles to seven, and sometimes more. See the subject exhaustively treated in Davids’ “Ceylon Coins and Measures,” pp. 15-17.
(1) In India, Fâ-Hien used the local way of measuring distance, but it's hard to pinpoint its exact length back then. The estimates differ widely, ranging from about four and a half or five miles to seven, and sometimes even more. For a thorough discussion on the topic, see Davids’ “Ceylon Coins and Measures,” pp. 15-17.
(2) The present Hidda, west of Peshawur, and five miles south of Jellalabad.
(2) The current Hidda, located west of Peshawur and five miles south of Jellalabad.
(3) “The vihâra,” says Hardy, “is the residence of a recluse or priest;” and so Davids:—“the clean little hut where the mendicant lives.” Our author, however, does not use the Indian name here, but the Chinese characters which express its meaning—tsing shay, “a pure dwelling.” He uses the term occasionally, and evidently, in this sense; more frequently it occurs in his narrative in connexion with the Buddhist relic worship; and at first I translated it by “shrine” and “shrine-house;” but I came to the conclusion, at last, to employ always the Indian name. The first time I saw a shrine-house was, I think, in a monastery near Foo-chow;—a small pyramidical structure, about ten feet high, glittering as if with the precious substances, but all, it seemed to me, of tinsel. It was in a large apartment of the building, having many images in it. The monks said it was the most precious thing in their possession, and that if they opened it, as I begged them to do, there would be a convulsion that would destroy the whole establishment. See E. H., p. 166. The name of the province of Behar was given to it in consequence of its many vihâras.
(3) “The vihâra,” says Hardy, “is the residence of a recluse or priest;” and Davids agrees: “the clean little hut where the beggar lives.” However, our author doesn’t use the Indian term here but the Chinese characters that convey its meaning—tsing shay, “a pure dwelling.” He sometimes uses the term this way, but more often it appears in his narrative connected to the worship of Buddhist relics. At first, I translated it as “shrine” and “shrine-house,” but eventually, I decided to consistently use the Indian name. The first time I saw a shrine-house was, I think, in a monastery near Foo-chow; it was a small pyramid-shaped structure, about ten feet tall, shining as if made from precious materials, but it all seemed like tinsel to me. It was in a large room of the building, surrounded by many images. The monks claimed it was the most valuable thing they owned and insisted that if they opened it, as I asked, it would cause a disaster that would ruin the entire establishment. See E. H., p. 166. The province of Behar got its name due to its many vihâras.
(4) According to the characters, “square, round, four inches.” Hsuan-chwang says it was twelve inches round.
(4) According to the characters, “square, round, four inches.” Hsuan-chwang says it was twelve inches around.
(5) In Williams’ Dictionary, under {.}, the characters, used here, are employed in the phrase for “to degrade an officer,” that is, “to remove the token of his rank worn on the crown of his head;” but to place a thing on the crown is a Buddhistic form of religious homage.
(5) In Williams' Dictionary, under {.}, the characters used here are found in the phrase for "to degrade an officer," which means "to take away the symbol of his rank worn on the top of his head;" but placing something on the top is a Buddhist way of showing religious respect.
(6) The Vaisyas, or bourgeois caste of Hindu society, are described here as “resident scholars.”
(6) The Vaisyas, or the middle class of Hindu society, are described here as "local scholars."
(7) See Eitel’s Handbook under the name vimoksha, which is explained as “the act of self-liberation,” and “the dwelling or state of liberty.” There are eight acts of liberating one’s self from all subjective and objective trammels, and as many states of liberty (vimukti) resulting therefrom. They are eight degrees of self-inanition, and apparently eight stages on the way to nirvâna. The tope in the text would be emblematic in some way of the general idea of the mental progress conducting to the Buddhistic consummation of existence.
(7) Check out Eitel’s Handbook for the term vimoksha, which is defined as “the act of self-liberation” and “the state of being free.” There are eight actions that allow a person to free themselves from all subjective and objective restrictions, resulting in eight states of liberation (vimukti). These represent eight levels of self-denial and apparently eight steps toward nirvana. The tope mentioned in the text symbolizes the overall concept of mental advancement leading to the ultimate goal of Buddhist existence.
(8) This incense would be in long “sticks,” small and large, such as are sold to-day throughout China, as you enter the temples.
(8) This incense would come in long "sticks," both small and large, like the ones sold today throughout China as you enter the temples.
(9) “The illuminating Buddha,” the twenty-fourth predecessor of Sâkyamuni, and who, so long before, gave him the assurance that he would by-and-by be Buddha. See Jataka Tales, p. 23.
(9) “The enlightening Buddha,” the twenty-fourth successor of Sâkyamuni, who, long ago, assured him that he would eventually become Buddha. See Jataka Tales, p. 23.
(10) The staff was, as immediately appears, of Gosîrsha Chandana, or “sandal-wood from the Cow’s-head mountain,” a species of copper-brown sandal-wood, said to be produced most abundantly on a mountain of (the fabulous continent) Ullarakuru, north of mount Meru, which resembles in shape the head of a cow (E. H., pp. 42, 43). It is called a “pewter staff” from having on it a head and rings and pewter. See Watters, “China Review,” viii, pp. 227, 228, and Williams’ Dictionary, under {.}.
(10) The staff was, as it clearly shows, made of Gosîrsha Chandana, or “sandalwood from the Cow’s-head mountain,” a type of copper-brown sandalwood that is said to be most abundant on a mountain in the legendary continent of Ullarakuru, north of Mount Meru, which is shaped like a cow's head (E. H., pp. 42, 43). It is called a “pewter staff” because it has a head and rings made of pewter on it. See Watters, “China Review,” viii, pp. 227, 228, and Williams’ Dictionary, under {.}.
(11) Or Sanghati, the double or composite robe, part of a monk’s attire, reaching from the shoulders to the knees, and fastened round the waist (E. H., p. 118).
(11) Or Sanghati, the double or composite robe, part of a monk’s attire, reaching from the shoulders to the knees, and fastened around the waist (E. H., p. 118).
(12) These were the “marks and beauties” on the person of a supreme Buddha. The rishi Kala Devala saw them on the body of the infant Sakya prince to the number of 328, those on the teeth, which had not yet come out, being visible to his spirit-like eyes (M. B., pp. 148, 149).
(12) These were the “marks and beauties” on the body of a great Buddha. The sage Kala Devala saw them on the infant Sakya prince, totaling 328, including the ones on the teeth, which hadn’t emerged yet, that were visible to his spiritual vision (M. B., pp. 148, 149).
(13) Probably=“all Buddhas.”
Probably="all Buddhas."
(14) The number may appear too great. But see what is said on the size of topes in chapter iii, note 4.
(14) The number might seem overwhelming. But take a look at what's mentioned about the size of topes in chapter iii, note 4.
(15) In Singhalese, Pase Buddhas; called also Nidana Buddhas, and Pratyeka Jinas, and explained by “individually intelligent,” “completely intelligent,” “intelligent as regards the nidanas.” This, says Eitel (pp. 96, 97), is “a degree of saintship unknown to primitive Buddhism, denoting automats in ascetic life who attain to Buddhaship ‘individually,’ that is, without a teacher, and without being able to save others. As the ideal hermit, the Pratyeka Buddha is compared with the rhinoceros khadga that lives lonely in the wilderness. He is also called Nidana Buddha, as having mastered the twelve nidanas (the twelve links in the everlasting chain of cause and effect in the whole range of existence, the understanding of which solves the riddle of life, revealing the inanity of all forms of existence, and preparing the mind for nirvâna). He is also compared to a horse, which, crossing a river, almost buries its body under the water, without, however, touching the bottom of the river. Thus in crossing samsara he ‘suppresses the errors of life and thought, and the effects of habit and passion, without attaining to absolute perfection.’” Whether these Buddhas were unknown, as Eitel says, to primitive Buddhism, may be doubted. See Davids’ Hibbert Lectures, p. 146.
(15) In Singhalese, there are Pase Buddhas; also known as Nidana Buddhas and Pratyeka Jinas, which translates to “individually intelligent,” “completely intelligent,” and “intelligent regarding the nidanas.” According to Eitel (pp. 96, 97), this represents “a level of saintliness unknown to early Buddhism, indicating individuals in ascetic life who achieve Buddhahood ‘individually,’ meaning without a teacher and unable to save others. As the ideal hermit, the Pratyeka Buddha is likened to a rhinoceros khadga that lives alone in the wilderness. He is also referred to as Nidana Buddha, having mastered the twelve nidanas (the twelve links in the endless chain of cause and effect throughout existence, understanding which resolves the mystery of life, reveals the futility of all forms of existence, and prepares the mind for nirvâna). He is compared to a horse crossing a river, almost submerging its body in the water without actually touching the riverbed. Thus, while navigating samsara, he ‘suppresses the errors of life and thought, as well as the effects of habit and passion, without reaching absolute perfection.’” Whether these Buddhas were unknown, as Eitel claims, to early Buddhism is debatable. See Davids’ Hibbert Lectures, p. 146.
CHAPTER XIV.
DEATH OF HWUY-KING IN THE LITTLE SNOWY MOUNTAINS. LO-E. POHNA. CROSSING THE
INDUS TO THE EAST.
Having stayed there till the third month of winter, Fâ-Hien and the two others,(1) proceeding southwards, crossed the Little Snowy mountains.(2) On them the snow lies accumulated both winter and summer. On the north (side) of the mountains, in the shade, they suddenly encountered a cold wind which made them shiver and become unable to speak. Hwuy-king could not go any farther. A white froth came from his mouth, and he said to Fâ-Hien, “I cannot live any longer. Do you immediately go away, that we do not all die here;” and with these words he died.(3) Fâ-Hien stroked the corpse, and cried out piteously, “Our original plan has failed;—it is fate.(4) What can we do?” He then again exerted himself, and they succeeded in crossing to the south of the range, and arrived in the kingdom of Lo-e,(5) where there were nearly three thousand monks, students of both the mahayana and hinayana. Here they stayed for the summer retreat,(6) and when that was over, they went on to the south, and ten days’ journey brought them to the kingdom of Poh-na,(7) where there are also more than three thousand monks, all students of the hinayana. Proceeding from this place for three days, they again crossed the Indus, where the country on each side was low and level.(8)
Having stayed there until the third month of winter, Fâ-Hien and the two others, proceeding southward, crossed the Little Snowy Mountains. Snow accumulates on them both winter and summer. On the north side of the mountains, in the shade, they suddenly encountered a cold wind that made them shiver and left them unable to speak. Hwuy-king couldn’t go any farther. White froth came from his mouth, and he said to Fâ-Hien, “I can’t go on any longer. You have to leave right away so that we don’t all die here.” With those words, he died. Fâ-Hien stroked the corpse and cried out in despair, “Our original plan has failed; it’s fate. What can we do?” He then pushed himself again, and they managed to cross to the south of the range, arriving in the kingdom of Lo-e, where there were nearly three thousand monks, students of both Mahayana and Hinayana. Here they stayed for the summer retreat, and once that was over, they went south. Ten days later, they reached the kingdom of Poh-na, where there were also more than three thousand monks, all studying Hinayana. After leaving this place, they traveled for three days and crossed the Indus, where the land on each side was flat and level.
NOTES
Notes
(1) These must have been Tao-ching and Hwuy-king.
(1) These must have been Tao-ching and Hwuy-king.
(2) Probably the Safeid Koh, and on the way to the Kohat pass.
(2) Probably the Safeid Koh, and on the way to the Kohat pass.
(3) All the texts have Kwuy-king. See chapter xii, note 13.
(3) All the texts include Kwuy-king. See chapter xii, note 13.
(4) A very natural exclamation, but out of place and inconsistent from the lips of Fâ-Hien. The Chinese character {.}, which he employed, may be rendered rightly by “fate” or “destiny;” but the fate is not unintelligent. The term implies a factor, or fa-tor, and supposes the ordination of Heaven or God. A Confucian idea for the moment overcame his Buddhism.
(4) A very natural exclamation, but it seems out of place and inconsistent coming from Fâ-Hien. The Chinese character {.} that he used can be accurately translated as "fate" or "destiny," but fate isn’t mindless. This term suggests a factor, or influence, and implies the design of Heaven or God. In that moment, a Confucian notion temporarily overshadowed his Buddhism.
(5) Lo-e, or Rohi, is a name for Afghanistan; but only a portion of it can be here intended.
(5) Lo-e, or Rohi, is a name for Afghanistan; but only part of it can be intended here.
(6) We are now therefore in 404.
(6) We are now in 404.
(7) No doubt the present district of Bannu, in the Lieutenant-Governorship of the Punjâb, between 32° 10′ and 33° 15′ N. lat., and 70° 26′ and 72° E. lon. See Hunter’s Gazetteer of India, i, p. 393.
(7) No doubt the current district of Bannu, in the Punjab region, located between 32° 10′ and 33° 15′ N. latitude, and 70° 26′ and 72° E. longitude. See Hunter’s Gazetteer of India, i, p. 393.
(8) They had then crossed the Indus before. They had done so, indeed, twice; first, from north to south, at Skardo or east of it; and second, as described in chapter vii.
(8) They had already crossed the Indus. In fact, they had done it twice; first, from north to south, at Skardo or somewhere east of it; and second, as described in chapter vii.
CHAPTER XV.
BHIDA. SYMPATHY OF MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.
After they had crossed the river, there was a country named Pe-t’oo,(1) where Buddhism was very flourishing, and (the monks) studied both the mahayana and hinayana. When they saw their fellow-disciples from Ts’in passing along, they were moved with great pity and sympathy, and expressed themselves thus: “How is it that these men from a border-land should have learned to become monks,(2) and come for the sake of our doctrines from such a distance in search of the Law of Buddha?” They supplied them with what they needed, and treated them in accordance with the rules of the Law.
After they crossed the river, they came to a place called Pe-t'oo,(1) where Buddhism was thriving, and the monks studied both Mahayana and Hinayana. When they saw their fellow disciples from Ts'in passing by, they felt deep pity and sympathy, and said, "How is it that these men from a border area have learned to become monks(2) and traveled such a long way for our teachings in search of the Buddha’s Law?" They provided them with what they needed and treated them according to the principles of the teachings.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Bhida. Eitel says, “The present Punjâb;” i.e. it was a portion of that.
(1) Bhida. Eitel says, “The present Punjab;” meaning it was part of that.
(2) “To come forth from their families;” that is, to become celibates, and adopt the tonsure.
(2) “To leave their families;” that is, to become celibate and take on the tonsure.
CHAPTER XVI.
ON TO MATHURA OR MUTTRA. CONDITION AND CUSTOMS OF CENTRAL INDIA; OF THE MONKS,
VIHARAS, AND MONASTERIES.
From this place they travelled south-east, passing by a succession of very many monasteries, with a multitude of monks, who might be counted by myriads. After passing all these places, they came to a country named Ma-t’aou-lo.(1) They still followed the course of the P’oo-na(2) river, on the banks of which, left and right, there were twenty monasteries, which might contain three thousand monks; and (here) the Law of Buddha was still more flourishing. Everywhere, from the Sandy Desert, in all the countries of India, the kings had been firm believers in that Law. When they make their offerings to a community of monks, they take off their royal caps, and along with their relatives and ministers, supply them with food with their own hands. That done, (the king) has a carpet spread for himself on the ground, and sits down in front of the chairman;—they dare not presume to sit on couches in front of the community. The laws and ways, according to which the kings presented their offerings when Buddha was in the world, have been handed down to the present day.
From this place, they traveled southeast, passing by many monasteries filled with countless monks. After they moved past all of these locations, they arrived in a region called Ma-t’aou-lo.(1) They continued along the P’oo-na(2) river, where there were twenty monasteries on both sides, likely home to three thousand monks, and here, the teachings of Buddha were even more prosperous. Throughout the Sandy Desert and in all the countries of India, kings had been strong supporters of that doctrine. When they make offerings to a community of monks, they remove their royal caps and, along with their family and ministers, personally provide food. Once that’s done, the king spreads a carpet for himself on the ground and sits in front of the chairman; they don't dare to sit on couches in front of the community. The customs and practices followed by kings when making their offerings while Buddha was alive have been passed down to today.
All south from this is named the Middle Kingdom.(3) In it the cold and heat are finely tempered, and there is neither hoarfrost nor snow. The people are numerous and happy; they have not to register their households, or attend to any magistrates and their rules; only those who cultivate the royal land have to pay (a portion of) the grain from it. If they want to go, they go; if they want to stay on, they stay. The king governs without decapitation or (other) corporal punishments. Criminals are simply fined, lightly or heavily, according to the circumstances (of each case). Even in cases of repeated attempts at wicked rebellion, they only have their right hands cut off. The king’s body-guards and attendants all have salaries. Throughout the whole country the people do not kill any living creature, nor drink intoxicating liquor, nor eat onions or garlic. The only exception is that of the Chandalas.(4) That is the name for those who are (held to be) wicked men, and live apart from others. When they enter the gate of a city or a market-place, they strike a piece of wood to make themselves known, so that men know and avoid them, and do not come into contact with them. In that country they do not keep pigs and fowls, and do not sell live cattle; in the markets there are no butchers’ shops and no dealers in intoxicating drink. In buying and selling commodities they use cowries.(5) Only the Chandalas are fishermen and hunters, and sell flesh meat.
All the land south of here is called the Middle Kingdom.(3) In this place, the weather is pleasantly balanced, with no frost or snow. The people are many and content; they don’t have to register their households or deal with any magistrates and their rules. Only those who farm the royal land need to give a portion of the grain they harvest. If they want to leave, they can; if they prefer to stay, they will. The king rules without executions or other physical punishments. Offenders simply pay a fine, either light or heavy, depending on the situation (of each case). Even in instances of repeated attempts at serious rebellion, they only have their right hands chopped off. The king's bodyguards and attendants all receive salaries. Across the entire country, the people do not kill any living beings, consume alcohol, or eat onions or garlic. The only exception is made for the Chandalas.(4) This term refers to those considered wicked, who live separately from others. When they enter a city or marketplace, they strike a piece of wood to announce their presence, so others know to avoid them and not come into contact with them. In this land, they do not keep pigs or poultry, and they do not sell live cattle; there are no butcher shops or sellers of alcoholic drinks in the markets. Cowries are used for buying and selling goods.(5) Only the Chandalas catch fish and hunt and sell meat.
After Buddha attained to pari-nirvâna,(6) the kings of the various countries and the heads of the Vaisyas(7) built vihâras for the priests, and endowed them with fields, houses, gardens, and orchards, along with the resident populations and their cattle, the grants being engraved on plates of metal,(8) so that afterwards they were handed down from king to king, without any daring to annul them, and they remain even to the present time.
After Buddha reached nirvana,(6) the kings from different regions and the leaders of the Vaisyas(7) constructed monasteries for the monks and provided them with land, homes, gardens, and orchards, along with the local communities and their livestock. The donations were inscribed on metal plates,(8) ensuring they were passed down from one king to another, with no one daring to revoke them, and they still exist today.
The regular business of the monks is to perform acts of meritorious virtue, and to recite their Sûtras and sit wrapt in meditation. When stranger monks arrive (at any monastery), the old residents meet and receive them, carry for them their clothes and alms-bowl, give them water to wash their feet, oil with which to anoint them, and the liquid food permitted out of the regular hours.(9) When (the stranger) has enjoyed a very brief rest, they further ask the number of years that he has been a monk, after which he receives a sleeping apartment with its appurtenances, according to his regular order, and everything is done for him which the rules prescribe.(10)
The usual activities of the monks involve performing good deeds, reciting their Sûtras, and sitting in meditation. When new monks arrive at any monastery, the long-term residents greet and welcome them, carrying their clothes and alms-bowl, providing water to wash their feet, oil for anointing, and the allowed food outside of regular meal times. After the newcomer has had a quick rest, they ask how many years he has been a monk, after which he is given a sleeping space along with its necessary items, and everything is done for him according to the established rules.
Where a community of monks resides, they erect topes to Sariputtra,(11) to Maha-maudgalyayana,(12) and to Ananda,(13) and also topes (in honour) of the Abhidharma, the Vinaya, and the Sûtras. A month after the (annual season of) rest, the families which are looking out for blessing stimulate one another(14) to make offerings to the monks, and send round to them the liquid food which may be taken out of the ordinary hours. All the monks come together in a great assembly, and preach the Law;(15) after which offerings are presented at the tope of Sariputtra, with all kinds of flowers and incense. All through the night lamps are kept burning, and skilful musicians are employed to perform.(16)
Where a group of monks lives, they build memorials for Sariputra, Maha-maudgalyayana, and Ananda, as well as memorials in honor of the Abhidharma, the Vinaya, and the Sûtras. A month after the annual rest season, families seeking blessings encourage each other to offer gifts to the monks and send them liquid food outside normal meal times. All the monks gather in a large assembly and teach the Law; afterward, offerings are made at the memorial of Sariputra, with a variety of flowers and incense. Throughout the night, lamps are kept burning, and talented musicians are hired to perform.
When Sariputtra was a great Brahman, he went to Buddha, and begged (to be permitted) to quit his family (and become a monk). The great Mugalan and the great Kasyapa(17) also did the same. The bhikshunis(18) for the most part make their offerings at the tope of Ananda, because it was he who requested the World-honoured one to allow females to quit their families (and become nuns). The Sramaneras(19) mostly make their offerings to Rahula.(20) The professors of the Abhidharma make their offerings to it; those of the Vinaya to it. Every year there is one such offering, and each class has its own day for it. Students of the mahayana present offerings to the Prajna-paramita,(21) to Manjusri,(22) and to Kwan-she-yin.(23) When the monks have done receiving their annual tribute (from the harvests),(24) the Heads of the Vaisyas and all the Brahmans bring clothes and other such articles as the monks require for use, and distribute among them. The monks, having received them, also proceed to give portions to one another. From the nirvâna of Buddha,(25) the forms of ceremony, laws, and rules, practised by the sacred communities, have been handed down from one generation to another without interruption.
When Sariputta was a high-ranking Brahman, he went to the Buddha and asked for permission to leave his family and become a monk. The great Mugalan and the great Kasyapa did the same thing. Most of the bhikshunis make their offerings at the stupa of Ananda because he was the one who asked the World-Honored One to allow women to leave their families and become nuns. The Sramaneras mostly make their offerings to Rahula. The teachers of the Abhidharma make their offerings to it, and those of the Vinaya do as well. Each year there is one such offering, and each group has its own designated day for it. Students of the Mahayana make offerings to Prajna-paramita, to Manjusri, and to Kwan-she-yin. After the monks have received their annual contributions from the harvest, the heads of the Vaisyas and all the Brahmans bring clothes and other items that the monks need and distribute them among them. After receiving these, the monks also share portions with one another. Since the Nirvana of the Buddha, the ceremonies, laws, and practices of the sacred communities have been passed down from generation to generation without interruption.
From the place where (the travellers) crossed the Indus to Southern India, and on to the Southern Sea, a distance of forty or fifty thousand le, all is level plain. There are no large hills with streams (among them); there are simply the waters of the rivers.
From the spot where the travelers crossed the Indus to Southern India, extending to the Southern Sea, a distance of forty or fifty thousand leagues, everything is flat. There aren't any big hills with streams; it's just the waters of the rivers.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Muttra, “the peacock city;” lat. 27° 30′ N., lon. 77° 43′ E. (Hunter); the birthplace of Krishna, whose emblem is the peacock.
(1) Muttra, “the peacock city;” lat. 27° 30′ N., lon. 77° 43′ E. (Hunter); the birthplace of Krishna, whose symbol is the peacock.
(2) This must be the Jumna, or Yamuna. Why it is called, as here, the P’oo-na has yet to be explained.
(2) This must be the Jumna, or Yamuna. The reason it is referred to as P’oo-na here still needs to be clarified.
(3) In Pâli, Majjhima-desa, “the Middle Country.” See Davids’ “Buddhist Birth Stories,” page 61, note.
(3) In Pāli, Majjhima-desa, "the Middle Country." See Davids' "Buddhist Birth Stories," page 61, note.
(4) Eitel (pp. 145, 6) says, “The name Chandalas is explained by ‘butchers,’ ‘wicked men,’ and those who carry ‘the awful flag,’ to warn off their betters;—the lowest and most despised caste of India, members of which, however, when converted, were admitted even into the ranks of the priesthood.”
(4) Eitel (pp. 145, 6) says, “The term Chandalas refers to ‘butchers,’ ‘evil people,’ and those who bear ‘the terrible flag’ to keep their social betters away;—the lowest and most hated caste in India, whose members, however, when converted, were accepted even into the priesthood.”
(5) “Cowries;” {.} {.}, not “shells and ivory,” as one might suppose; but cowries alone, the second term entering into the name from the marks inside the edge of the shell, resembling “the teeth of fishes.”
(5) “Cowries;” {.} {.}, not “shells and ivory,” as you might think; but just cowries, the second term coming from the marks on the inside edge of the shell, which look like “the teeth of fish.”
(6) See chapter xii, note 3, Buddha’s pari-nirvâna is equivalent to Buddha’s death.
(6) See chapter xii, note 3, Buddha’s pari-nirvana is the same as Buddha’s death.
(7) See chapter xiii, note 6. The order of the characters is different here, but with the same meaning.
(7) See chapter xiii, note 6. The order of the characters is different here, but it means the same thing.
(8) See the preparation of such a deed of grant in a special case, as related in chapter xxxix. No doubt in Fâ-Hien’s time, and long before and after it, it was the custom to engrave such deeds on plates of metal.
(8) See the preparation of such a deed of grant in a special case, as related in chapter xxxix. No doubt in Fâ-Hien’s time, and long before and after it, it was customary to engrave such deeds on metal plates.
(9) “No monk can eat solid food except between sunrise and noon,” and total abstinence from intoxicating drinks is obligatory (Davids’ Manual, p. 163). Food eaten at any other part of the day is called vikala, and forbidden; but a weary traveller might receive unseasonable refreshment, consisting, as Watters has shown (Ch. Rev. viii. 282), of honey, butter, treacle, and sesamum oil.
(9) “No monk can eat solid food except between sunrise and noon,” and total abstinence from alcoholic drinks is required (Davids’ Manual, p. 163). Food consumed at any other time of the day is called vikala and is prohibited; however, a tired traveler may receive food outside these hours, which can include honey, butter, treacle, and sesame oil, as Watters has shown (Ch. Rev. viii. 282).
(10) The expression here is somewhat perplexing; but it occurs again in chapter xxxviii; and the meaning is clear. See Watters, Ch. Rev. viii. 282, 3. The rules are given at length in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 272 and foll., and p. 279 and foll.
(10) The expression here is a bit confusing, but it appears again in chapter xxxviii, and the meaning is clear. See Watters, Ch. Rev. viii. 282, 3. The rules are explained in detail in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 272 and following, and p. 279 and following.
(11) Sariputtra (Singh. Seriyut) was one of the principal disciples of Buddha, and indeed the most learned and ingenious of them all, so that he obtained the title of {.} {.}, “knowledge and wisdom.” He is also called Buddha’s “right-hand attendant.” His name is derived from that of his mother Sarika, the wife of Tishya, a native of Nalanda. In Spence Hardy, he often appears under the name of Upatissa (Upa-tishya), derived from his father. Several Sastras are ascribed to him, and indeed the followers of the Abhidharma look on him as their founder. He died before Sâkyamuni; but is to reappear as a future Buddha. Eitel, pp. 123, 124.
(11) Sariputta (Singh. Seriyut) was one of Buddha's main disciples and definitely the most knowledgeable and clever among them all, earning him the title of {.} {.}, “knowledge and wisdom.” He is also known as Buddha’s “right-hand man.” His name comes from his mother Sarika, who was the wife of Tishya, a local from Nalanda. In Spence Hardy's work, he often appears under the name Upatissa (Upa-tishya), which comes from his father's name. Several texts are attributed to him, and the followers of the Abhidharma consider him their founder. He passed away before Sâkyamuni but is expected to return as a future Buddha. Eitel, pp. 123, 124.
(12) Mugalan, the Singhalese name of this disciple, is more pronounceable. He also was one of the principal disciples, called Buddha’s “left-hand attendant.” He was distinguished for his power of vision, and his magical powers. The name in the text is derived from the former attribute, and it was by the latter that he took up an artist to Tushita to get a view of Sâkyamuni, and so make a statue of him. (Compare the similar story in chap. vi.) He went to hell, and released his mother. He also died before Sâkyamuni, and is to reappear as Buddha. Eitel, p. 65.
(12) Mugalan, the Singhalese name of this disciple, is easier to pronounce. He was also one of the main disciples, known as Buddha’s “left-hand attendant.” He was noted for his vision and magical abilities. The name in the text comes from the first attribute, and he used the second to bring an artist to Tushita to get a view of Sâkyamuni and create a statue of him. (See the similar story in chap. vi.) He went to hell and freed his mother. He also died before Sâkyamuni and is expected to return as Buddha. Eitel, p. 65.
(13) See chapter xii, note 2.
(13) See chapter 12, note 2.
(14) A passage rather difficult to construe. The “families” would be those more devout than their neighbours.
(14) A passage that's a bit hard to understand. The “families” would be those who are more devoted than their neighbors.
(15) One rarely hears this preaching in China. It struck me most as I once heard it at Osaka in Japan. There was a pulpit in a large hall of the temple, and the audience sat around on the matted floor. One priest took the pulpit after another; and the hearers nodded their heads occasionally, and indicated their sympathy now and then by an audible “h’m,” which reminded me of Carlyle’s description of meetings of “The Ironsides” of Cromwell.
(15) You don’t often hear this kind of preaching in China. It stood out to me when I once experienced it in Osaka, Japan. There was a podium in a big hall of the temple, and the audience sat around on the mat. One priest after another took the podium; the listeners would occasionally nod their heads and show their agreement now and then with an audible “h’m,” which reminded me of Carlyle’s description of the meetings of “The Ironsides” of Cromwell.
(16) This last statement is wanting in the Chinese editions.
(16) This last statement is missing from the Chinese editions.
(17) There was a Kasyapa Buddha, anterior to Sâkyamuni. But this Maha-kasyapa was a Brahman of Magadha, who was converted by Buddha, and became one of his disciples. He took the lead after Sâkyamuni’s death, convoked and directed the first synod, from which his title of Arya-sthavira is derived. As the first compiler of the Canon, he is considered the fountain of Chinese orthodoxy, and counted as the first patriarch. He also is to be reborn as Buddha. Eitel, p. 64.
(17) There was a Kasyapa Buddha before Sâkyamuni. But this Maha-kasyapa was a Brahman from Magadha who was converted by Buddha and became one of his disciples. He took charge after Sâkyamuni's death, organized and led the first synod, which is where his title of Arya-sthavira comes from. As the first compiler of the Canon, he is seen as the source of Chinese orthodoxy and is regarded as the first patriarch. He is also destined to be reborn as Buddha. Eitel, p. 64.
(18) The bhikshunis are the female monks or nuns, subject to the same rules as the bhikshus, and also to special ordinances of restraint. See Hardy’s E. M., chap. 17. See also Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 321.
(18) The bhikshunis are the female monks or nuns, following the same rules as the bhikshus, as well as additional regulations for self-discipline. See Hardy’s E. M., chap. 17. See also Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, p. 321.
(19) The Sramaneras are the novices, male or female, who have vowed to observe the Shikshapada, or ten commandments. Fâ-Hien was himself one of them from his childhood. Having heard the Trisharana, or threefold formula of Refuge,—“I take refuge in Buddha; the Law; the Church,—the novice undertakes to observe the ten precepts that forbid—(1) destroying life; (2) stealing; (3) impurity; (4) lying; (5) intoxicating drinks; (6) eating after midday; (7) dancing, singing, music, and stage-plays; (8) garlands, scents, unguents, and ornaments; (9) high or broad couches; (10) receiving gold or silver.” Davids’ Manual, p. 160; Hardy’s E. M., pp. 23, 24.
(19) The Sramaneras are the novices, male or female, who have pledged to follow the Shikshapada, or ten commandments. Fâ-Hien was one of them from a young age. After hearing the Trisharana, or threefold formula of Refuge—“I take refuge in Buddha; the Law; the Church”—the novice commits to following the ten precepts that prohibit—(1) taking life; (2) stealing; (3) impurity; (4) lying; (5) intoxicating drinks; (6) eating after midday; (7) dancing, singing, music, and performances; (8) garlands, scents, unguents, and jewelry; (9) high or wide beds; (10) accepting gold or silver.” Davids’ Manual, p. 160; Hardy’s E. M., pp. 23, 24.
(20) The eldest son of Sâkyamuni by Yasodhara. Converted to Buddhism, he followed his father as an attendant; and after Buddha’s death became the founder of a philosophical realistic school (vaibhashika). He is now revered as the patron saint of all novices, and is to be reborn as the eldest son of every future Buddha. Eitel, p. 101. His mother also is to be reborn as Buddha.
(20) The eldest son of Sâkyamuni with Yasodhara. He converted to Buddhism and served as his father's attendant. After the Buddha's death, he became the founder of a philosophical realistic school (vaibhashika). He is now honored as the patron saint of all novices and is destined to be reborn as the eldest son of every future Buddha. Eitel, p. 101. His mother is also destined to be reborn as a Buddha.
(21) There are six (sometimes increased to ten) paramitas, “means of passing to nirvâna:—Charity; morality; patience; energy; tranquil contemplation; wisdom (prajna); made up to ten by use of the proper means; science; pious vows; and force of purpose. But it is only prajna which carries men across the samsara to the shores of nirvâna.” Eitel, p. 90.
(21) There are six (sometimes increased to ten) paramitas, "ways to achieve nirvana:—Charity; morality; patience; energy; calm contemplation; wisdom (prajna); increased to ten by including the right methods; knowledge; sacred vows; and determination. But it's only prajna that can take people from samsara to the shores of nirvana." Eitel, p. 90.
(22) According to Eitel (pp. 71, 72), A famous Bodhisattva, now specially worshipped in Shan-se, whose antecedents are a hopeless jumble of history and fable. Fâ-Hien found him here worshipped by followers of the mahayana school; but Hsuan-chwang connects his worship with the yogachara or tantra-magic school. The mahayana school regard him as the apotheosis of perfect wisdom. His most common titles are Mahamati, “Great wisdom,” and Kumara-raja, “King of teaching, with a thousand arms and a hundred alms-bowls.”
(22) According to Eitel (pp. 71, 72), a famous Bodhisattva, now primarily worshipped in Shan-se, has a confusing mix of historical and mythical origins. Fâ-Hien found that he was worshipped here by followers of the Mahayana school, but Hsuan-chwang links his worship to the Yogachara or tantra-magic school. The Mahayana school views him as the embodiment of perfect wisdom. His most common titles are Mahamati, “Great Wisdom,” and Kumara-raja, “King of Teaching, with a thousand arms and a hundred alms-bowls.”
(23) Kwan-she-yin and the dogmas about him or her are as great a mystery as Manjusri. The Chinese name is a mistranslation of the Sanskrit name Avalokitesvra, “On-looking Sovereign,” or even “On-looking Self-Existent,” and means “Regarding or Looking on the sounds of the world,”=“Hearer of Prayer.” Originally, and still in Thibet, Avalokitesvara had only male attributes, but in China and Japan (Kwannon), this deity (such popularly she is) is represented as a woman, “Kwan-yin, the greatly gentle, with a thousand arms and a thousand eyes;” and has her principal seat in the island of P’oo-t’oo, on the China coast, which is a regular place of pilgrimage. To the worshippers of whom Fâ-Hien speaks, Kwan-she-yin would only be Avalokitesvara. How he was converted into the “goddess of mercy,” and her worship took the place which it now has in China, is a difficult inquiry, which would take much time and space, and not be brought after all, so far as I see, to a satisfactory conclusion. See Eitel’s Handbook, pp. 18-20, and his Three Lectures on Buddhism (third edition), pp. 124-131. I was talking on the subject once with an intelligent Chinese gentleman, when he remarked, “Have you not much the same thing in Europe in the worship of Mary?”
(23) Kwan-she-yin and the beliefs surrounding them are just as mysterious as Manjusri. The Chinese name is a mistranslation of the Sanskrit name Avalokitesvara, which means “On-looking Sovereign” or even “On-looking Self-Existent,” and signifies “Regarding or Looking on the sounds of the world,” or “Hearer of Prayer.” Originally, and still in Tibet, Avalokitesvara was depicted with only male attributes, but in China and Japan (Kwannon), this deity—who is very popular—is represented as a woman, “Kwan-yin, the greatly gentle, with a thousand arms and a thousand eyes;” and has her main seat on the island of P’oo-t’oo, off the China coast, which is a significant pilgrimage site. To the worshippers Fâ-Hien mentions, Kwan-she-yin would simply be Avalokitesvara. Understanding how he was transformed into the “goddess of mercy,” and how her worship became what it is today in China, is a complex issue that would require a lot of time and space, and I doubt it could ever lead to a satisfying conclusion. See Eitel’s Handbook, pp. 18-20, and his Three Lectures on Buddhism (third edition), pp. 124-131. I was discussing this topic once with an insightful Chinese gentleman, who commented, “Isn’t it similar to the worship of Mary in Europe?”
(24) Compare what is said in chap. v.
(24) Compare what’s stated in chap. v.
(25) This nirvâna of Buddha must be—not his death, but his attaining to Buddhaship.
(25) This nirvana of Buddha must be—not his death, but his achievement of Buddhahood.
CHAPTER XVII.
SANKASYA. BUDDHA’S ASCENT TO AND DESCENT FROM THE TRAYASTRIMSAS HEAVEN,
AND OTHER LEGENDS.
From this they proceeded south-east for eighteen yojanas, and found themselves in a kingdom called Sankasya,(1) at the place where Buddha came down, after ascending to the Trayastrimsas heaven,(2) and there preaching for three months his Law for the benefit of his mother.(3) Buddha had gone up to this heaven by his supernatural power,(4) without letting his disciples know; but seven days before the completion (of the three months) he laid aside his invisibility,(4) and Anuruddha,(5) with his heavenly eyes,(5) saw the World-honoured one, and immediately said to the honoured one, the great Mugalan, “Do you go and salute the World-honoured one.” Mugalan forthwith went, and with head and face did homage at (Buddha’s) feet. They then saluted and questioned each other, and when this was over, Buddha said to Mugalan, “Seven days after this I will go down to Jambudvipa;” and thereupon Mugalan returned. At this time the great kings of eight countries with their ministers and people, not having seen Buddha for a long time, were all thirstily looking up for him, and had collected in clouds in this kingdom to wait for the World-honoured one.
They then traveled southeast for eighteen yojanas and arrived in a kingdom called Sankasya, the place where Buddha descended after ascending to the Trayastrimsas heaven, where he preached his teachings for three months for the benefit of his mother. Buddha had ascended to this heaven using his supernatural powers without informing his disciples. However, seven days before the end of the three months, he revealed his presence, and Anuruddha, with his celestial vision, saw the World-honored one and immediately said to the honored one, the great Mugalan, “Please go and greet the World-honored one.” Mugalan promptly went and bowed at Buddha’s feet. They then exchanged greetings and questions, and once that was done, Buddha told Mugalan, “Seven days from now, I will return to Jambudvipa,” and Mugalan returned. At this time, the great kings of eight countries, along with their ministers and people, who hadn’t seen Buddha in a long time, were eagerly waiting for him and had gathered in large numbers in this kingdom to await the World-honored one.
Then the bhikshuni Utpala(6) thought in her heart, “To-day the kings, with their ministers and people, will all be meeting (and welcoming) Buddha. I am (but) a woman; how shall I succeed in being the first to see him?”(7) Buddha immediately, by his spirit-like power, changed her into the appearance of a holy Chakravartti(8) king, and she was the foremost of all in doing reverence to him.
Then the nun Utpala thought to herself, “Today, the kings, with their ministers and people, will all be meeting and welcoming Buddha. I am just a woman; how can I be the first to see him?” Buddha, using his spiritual power, instantly transformed her into the appearance of a holy Chakravartti king, and she was the first to pay her respect to him.
As Buddha descended from his position aloft in the Trayastrimsas heaven, when he was coming down, there were made to appear three flights of precious steps. Buddha was on the middle flight, the steps of which were composed of the seven precious substances. The king of Brahma-loka(9) also made a flight of silver steps appear on the right side, (where he was seen) attending with a white chowry in his hand. Sakra, Ruler of Devas, made (a flight of) steps of purple gold on the left side, (where he was seen) attending and holding an umbrella of the seven precious substances. An innumerable multitude of the devas followed Buddha in his descent. When he was come down, the three flights all disappeared in the ground, excepting seven steps, which continued to be visible. Afterwards king Asoka, wishing to know where their ends rested, sent men to dig and see. They went down to the yellow springs(10) without reaching the bottom of the steps, and from this the king received an increase to his reverence and faith, and built a vihâra over the steps, with a standing image, sixteen cubits in height, right over the middle flight. Behind the vihâra he erected a stone pillar, about fifty cubits high,(11) with a lion on the top of it.(12) Let into the pillar, on each of its four sides,(13) there is an image of Buddha, inside and out(14) shining and transparent, and pure as it were of lapis lazuli. Some teachers of another doctrine(15) once disputed with the Sramanas about (the right to) this as a place of residence, and the latter were having the worst of the argument, when they took an oath on both sides on the condition that, if the place did indeed belong to the Sramanas, there should be some marvellous attestation of it. When these words had been spoken, the lion on the top gave a great roar, thus giving the proof; on which their opponents were frightened, bowed to the decision, and withdrew.
As Buddha descended from his elevated position in the Trayastrimsas heaven, three flights of precious steps appeared as he came down. Buddha was on the middle flight, which was made from seven precious materials. The king of Brahma-loka created a flight of silver steps on the right side, where he was seen attending with a white chowry in his hand. Sakra, the Ruler of Devas, created a flight of purple gold steps on the left side, where he was seen attending and holding an umbrella made of the seven precious substances. An endless crowd of devas followed Buddha on his descent. Once he reached the ground, all three flights disappeared except for seven steps that remained visible. Later, King Asoka, wanting to know where the steps ended, sent people to dig and investigate. They dug down to the yellow springs but couldn’t reach the bottom of the steps, which deepened the king's reverence and faith. He built a vihâra over the steps, with a standing image of Buddha, sixteen cubits high, placed right over the middle flight. Behind the vihâra, he erected a stone pillar, about fifty cubits tall, topped with a lion. On each of the four sides of the pillar, there is a shining and transparent image of Buddha, pure as if made of lapis lazuli. Some teachers from another doctrine once argued with the Sramanas over the right to this residence, and the Sramanas were losing the debate. They agreed to an oath on both sides that if the place truly belonged to the Sramanas, there would be some marvelous evidence of it. As soon as these words were spoken, the lion on top let out a powerful roar, providing the proof. The opponents were startled, bowed to the outcome, and left.
Through Buddha having for three months partaken of the food of heaven, his body emitted a heavenly fragrance, unlike that of an ordinary man. He went immediately and bathed; and afterwards, at the spot where he did so, a bathing-house was built, which is still existing. At the place where the bhikshuni Utpala was the first to do reverence to Buddha, a tope has now been built.
Through Buddha having enjoyed heavenly food for three months, his body emitted a divine fragrance, unlike that of an ordinary person. He immediately went and bathed; afterward, at the spot where he bathed, a bathing house was constructed, which still exists today. At the location where the bhikshuni Utpala was the first to pay respect to Buddha, a memorial has now been built.
At the places where Buddha, when he was in the world, cut his hair and nails, topes are erected; and where the three Buddhas(16) that preceded Sâkyamuni Buddha and he himself sat; where they walked,(17) and where images of their persons were made. At all these places topes were made, and are still existing. At the place where Sakra, Ruler of the Devas, and the king of the Brahma-loka followed Buddha down (from the Trayastrimsas heaven) they have also raised a tope.
At the locations where Buddha, when he was alive, cut his hair and nails, shrines are built; and where the three Buddhas(16) who came before Sâkyamuni Buddha and he himself sat; where they walked,(17) and where their images were created. Shrines have been erected at all these places, and they still stand today. At the spot where Sakra, Ruler of the Devas, and the king of the Brahma-loka accompanied Buddha down (from the Trayastrimsas heaven), a shrine has also been raised.
At this place the monks and nuns may be a thousand, who all receive their food from the common store, and pursue their studies, some of the mahayana and some of the hinayana. Where they live, there is a white-eared dragon, which acts the part of danapati to the community of these monks, causing abundant harvests in the country, and the enriching rains to come in season, without the occurrence of any calamities, so that the monks enjoy their repose and ease. In gratitude for its kindness, they have made for it a dragon-house, with a carpet for it to sit on, and appointed for it a diet of blessing, which they present for its nourishment. Every day they set apart three of their number to go to its house, and eat there. Whenever the summer retreat is ended, the dragon straightway changes its form, and appears as a small snake,(18) with white spots at the side of its ears. As soon as the monks recognise it, they fill a copper vessel with cream, into which they put the creature, and then carry it round from the one who has the highest seat (at their tables) to him who has the lowest, when it appears as if saluting them. When it has been taken round, immediately it disappeared; and every year it thus comes forth once. The country is very productive, and the people are prosperous, and happy beyond comparison. When people of other countries come to it, they are exceedingly attentive to them all, and supply them with what they need.
In this place, there may be a thousand monks and nuns, all of whom get their food from a common supply and engage in their studies, some focusing on Mahayana and others on Hinayana. Living there is a white-eared dragon, which acts as a benefactor to this community of monks, bringing in abundant harvests and timely, nourishing rains, without any disasters, allowing the monks to enjoy peace and ease. In gratitude for its generosity, they've built a dragon-house for it, complete with a carpet for it to rest on, and have prepared a special diet of offering for its nourishment. Each day, they designate three of their members to visit its house and share a meal there. When the summer retreat ends, the dragon immediately transforms into a small snake with white spots on the sides of its ears. As soon as the monks recognize it, they fill a copper vessel with cream, place the creature inside, and carry it around from the monk seated in the highest position to the one in the lowest, as if it's greeting them. After this, it quickly disappears, and every year, it makes this appearance once. The land is very fertile, and the people are flourishing and incredibly happy. When visitors from other countries arrive, the locals are exceptionally welcoming and provide them with everything they need.
Fifty yojanas north-west from the monastery there is another, called “The Great Heap.”(19) Great Heap was the name of a wicked demon, who was converted by Buddha, and men subsequently at this place reared a vihâra. When it was being made over to an Arhat by pouring water on his hands,(20) some drops fell on the ground. They are still on the spot, and however they may be brushed away and removed, they continue to be visible, and cannot be made to disappear.
Fifty yojanas northwest of the monastery, there's another one called "The Great Heap." The Great Heap was the name of a wicked demon who was converted by Buddha, and people later built a vihara at this site. When it was being handed over to an Arhat by pouring water on his hands, some drops fell to the ground. They are still there, and no matter how much they are brushed away or removed, they remain visible and can't be made to disappear.
At this place there is also a tope to Buddha, where a good spirit constantly keeps (all about it) swept and watered, without any labour of man being required. A king of corrupt views once said, “Since you are able to do this, I will lead a multitude of troops and reside there till the dirt and filth has increased and accumulated, and (see) whether you can cleanse it away or not.” The spirit thereupon raised a great wind, which blew (the filth away), and made the place pure.
At this location, there’s also a stupa dedicated to Buddha, where a benevolent spirit continuously keeps it clean and watered, without any effort from humans. A king with misguided beliefs once proclaimed, “Since you can do this, I will gather a large army and stay here until dirt and grime build up, and we’ll see if you can clean it up or not.” In response, the spirit summoned a strong wind that blew the debris away, leaving the place spotless.
At this place there are a hundred small topes, at which a man may keep counting a whole day without being able to know (their exact number). If he be firmly bent on knowing it, he will place a man by the side of each tope. When this is done, proceeding to count the number of men, whether they be many or few, he will not get to know (the number).(21)
At this location, there are a hundred small shrines where a person could spend an entire day trying to tally them, but he won't be able to find out their exact number. If he's really determined to know it, he will assign a person to stand next to each shrine. Once that's done, when he counts the number of people, no matter if there are many or few, he still won’t know the total. (21)
There is a monastery, containing perhaps 600 or 700 monks, in which there is a place where a Pratyeka Buddha used to take his food. The nirvâna ground (where he was burned(22) after death) is as large as a carriage wheel; and while grass grows all around, on this spot there is none. The ground also where he dried his clothes produces no grass, but the impression of them, where they lay on it, continues to the present day.
There is a monastery with about 600 or 700 monks, where a Pratyeka Buddha used to eat. The nirvana ground (where he was cremated after death) is about the size of a carriage wheel; and while grass grows all around, there's none in this specific spot. The area where he dried his clothes also has no grass, but the marks where they rested can still be seen today.
NOTES
Notes
(1) The name is still remaining in Samkassam, a village forty-five miles northwest of Canouge, lat. 27° 3′ N., lon. 79° 50′ E.
(1) The name is still found in Samkassam, a village forty-five miles northwest of Canouge, lat. 27° 3′ N., lon. 79° 50′ E.
(2) The heaven of Indra or Sakya, meaning “the heaven of thirty-three classes,” a name which has been explained both historically and mythologically. “The description of it,” says Eitel, p. 148, “tallies in all respects with the Svarga of Brahmanic mythology. It is situated between the four peaks of the Meru, and consists of thirty-two cities of devas, eight on each of the four corners of the mountain. Indra’s capital of Bellevue is in the centre. There he is enthroned, with a thousand heads and a thousand eyes, and four arms grasping the vajra, with his wife and 119,000 concubines. There he receives the monthly reports of the four Maharajas, concerning the progress of good and evil in the world,” &c. &c.
(2) The heaven of Indra or Sakya, meaning “the heaven of thirty-three classes,” a name explained both historically and mythologically. “The description of it,” says Eitel, p. 148, “matches perfectly with the Svarga of Brahmanic mythology. It is located between the four peaks of Meru and consists of thirty-two cities of devas, eight at each of the four corners of the mountain. Indra’s capital, Bellevue, is at the center. There he sits on his throne, with a thousand heads and a thousand eyes, and four arms holding the vajra, alongside his wife and 119,000 concubines. He receives the monthly reports from the four Maharajas regarding the progress of good and evil in the world,” etc. etc.
(3) Buddha’s mother, Maya and Mahamaya, the mater immaculata of the Buddhists, died seven days after his birth. Eitel says, “Reborn in Tushita, she was visited there by her son and converted.” The Tushita heaven was a more likely place to find her than the Trayastrimsas; but was the former a part of the latter? Hardy gives a long account of Buddha’s visit to the Trayastrimsas (M. B., pp. 298-302), which he calls Tawutisa, and speaks of his mother (Matru) in it, who had now become a deva by the changing of her sex.
(3) Buddha’s mother, Maya and Mahamaya, the mater immaculata of the Buddhists, passed away seven days after his birth. Eitel says, “Reborn in Tushita, she was visited there by her son and converted.” Tushita heaven was a more likely place to find her than Trayastrimsas; but was the former part of the latter? Hardy provides a lengthy account of Buddha’s visit to Trayastrimsas (M. B., pp. 298-302), which he refers to as Tawutisa, and mentions his mother (Matru) in it, who had now transformed into a deva after changing her sex.
(4) Compare the account of the Arhat’s conveyance of the artist to the Tushita heaven in chap. v. The first expression here is more comprehensive.
(4) Compare the story of the Arhat taking the artist to the Tushita heaven in chap. v. The first expression here is broader.
(5) Anuruddha was a first cousin of Sâkyamuni, being the son of his uncle Amritodana. He is often mentioned in the account we have of Buddha’s last moments. His special gift was the divyachakshus or “heavenly eye,” the first of the six abhijnas or “supernatural talents,” the faculty of comprehending in one instantaneous view, or by intuition, all beings in all worlds. “He could see,” says Hardy, M. B., p. 232, “all things in 100,000 sakvalas as plainly as a mustard seed held in the hand.”
(5) Anuruddha was a first cousin of Sâkyamuni, being the son of his uncle Amritodana. He is often mentioned in the account of the Buddha’s last moments. His special ability was the divyachakshus or “heavenly eye,” the first of the six abhijnas or “supernatural talents,” allowing him to understand, in an instant, all beings in every world. “He could see,” says Hardy, M. B., p. 232, “all things in 100,000 sakvalas as clearly as a mustard seed held in the hand.”
(6) Eitel gives the name Utpala with the same Chinese phonetisation as in the text, but not as the name of any bhikshuni. The Sanskrit word, however, is explained by “blue lotus flowers;” and Hsuan-chwang calls her the nun “Lotus-flower colour ({.} {.} {.});”—the same as Hardy’s Upulwan and Uppalawarna.
(6) Eitel uses the name Utpala with the same Chinese pronunciation as in the text, but not as the name of any female monk. The Sanskrit word, however, is defined as “blue lotus flowers;” and Hsuan-chwang refers to her as the nun “Lotus-flower color ({.} {.} {.});”—the same as Hardy’s Upulwan and Uppalawarna.
(7) Perhaps we should read here “to see Buddha,” and then ascribe the transformation to the nun herself. It depends on the punctuation which view we adopt; and in the structure of the passage, there is nothing to indicate that the stop should be made before or after “Buddha.” And the one view is as reasonable, or rather as unreasonable, as the other.
(7) Maybe we should interpret this as “to see Buddha,” and then credit the transformation to the nun herself. It depends on the punctuation we choose; and in the structure of the passage, there’s nothing to show that the pause should come before or after “Buddha.” Both interpretations are equally reasonable, or rather, equally unreasonable.
(8) “A holy king who turns the wheel;” that is, the military conqueror and monarch of the whole or part of a universe. “The symbol,” says Eitel (p. 142) “of such a king is the chakra or wheel, for when he ascends the throne, a chakra falls from heaven, indicating by its material (gold, silver, copper, or iron) the extent and character of his reign. The office, however, of the highest Chakravartti, who hurls his wheel among his enemies, is inferior to the peaceful mission of a Buddha, who meekly turns the wheel of the Law, and conquers every universe by his teaching.”
(8) “A holy king who turns the wheel;” that is, the military conqueror and ruler of all or part of a universe. “The symbol,” says Eitel (p. 142) “of such a king is the chakra or wheel, for when he takes the throne, a chakra falls from heaven, showing by its material (gold, silver, copper, or iron) the scope and nature of his reign. However, the role of the highest Chakravartti, who sends his wheel among his enemies, is less significant than the peaceful mission of a Buddha, who humbly turns the wheel of the Law and conquers every universe through his teachings.”
(9) This was Brahma, the first person of the Brahmanical Trimurti, adopted by Buddhism, but placed in an inferior position, and surpassed by every Buddhist saint who attains to bodhi.
(9) This was Brahma, the first figure of the Brahmanical Trimurti, embraced by Buddhism, but positioned lower and surpassed by every Buddhist saint who reaches enlightenment.
(10) A common name for the earth below, where, on digging, water is found.
(10) A common name for the ground below, where water is found when you dig.
(11) The height is given as thirty chow, the chow being the distance from the elbow to the finger-tip, which is variously estimated.
(11) The height is stated as thirty chow, with a chow being the distance from the elbow to the fingertip, which is measured differently by different people.
(12) A note of Mr. Beal says on this:—“General Cunningham, who visited the spot (1862), found a pillar, evidently of the age of Asoka, with a well-carved elephant on the top, which, however, was minus trunk and tail. He supposes this to be the pillar seen by Fâ-Hien, who mistook the top of it for a lion. It is possible such a mistake may have been made, as in the account of one of the pillars at Sravasti, Fâ-Hien says an ox formed the capital, whilst Hsuan-chwang calls it an elephant (P. 19, Arch. Survey).”
(12) A note from Mr. Beal states: “General Cunningham, who visited the site in 1862, found a pillar that is clearly from the time of Asoka, featuring a well-carved elephant on top, although it was missing its trunk and tail. He thinks this might be the pillar seen by Fâ-Hien, who mistakenly identified the top as a lion. Such a mix-up could happen, as in his account of one of the pillars at Sravasti, Fâ-Hien describes the capital as an ox, while Hsuan-chwang refers to it as an elephant (P. 19, Arch. Survey).”
(13) That is, in niches on the sides. The pillar or column must have been square.
(13) That is, in spaces on the sides. The pillar or column must have been square.
(14) Equivalent to “all through.”
All the way through.
(15) Has always been translated “heretical teachers;” but I eschew the terms heresy and heretical. The parties would not be Buddhists of any creed or school, but Brahmans or of some other false doctrine, as Fâ-Hien deemed it. The Chinese term means “outside” or “foreign;”—in Pâli, anna-titthiya,=“those belonging to another school.”
(15) Has always been translated as “heretical teachers;” but I avoid the terms heresy and heretical. The groups would not be Buddhists of any creed or school, but Brahmans or followers of some other false doctrine, as Fâ-Hien considered it. The Chinese term means “outside” or “foreign;”—in Pâli, anna-titthiya, =“those belonging to another school.”
(16) These three predecessors of Sâkyamuni were the three Buddhas of the present or Maha-bhadra Kalpa, of which he was the fourth, and Maitreya is to be the fifth and last. They were: (1) Krakuchanda (Pâli, Kakusanda), “he who readily solves all doubts;” a scion of the Kasyapa family. Human life reached in his time 40,000 years, and so many persons were converted by him. (2) Kanakamuni (Pâli, Konagamana), “body radiant with the colour of pure gold;” of the same family. Human life reached in his time 30,000 years, and so many persons were converted by him. (3) Kasyapa (Pâli, Kassapa), “swallower of light.” Human life reached in his time 20,000 years, and so many persons were converted by him. See Eitel, under the several names; Hardy’s M. B., pp. 95-97; and Davids’ “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 51.
(16) The three predecessors of Sâkyamuni were the three Buddhas of the current Maha-bhadra Kalpa, of which he was the fourth, and Maitreya is set to be the fifth and last. They were: (1) Krakuchanda (Pâli, Kakusanda), “the one who easily clears away all doubts;” a member of the Kasyapa family. During his time, human life lasted 40,000 years, and many people were converted by him. (2) Kanakamuni (Pâli, Konagamana), “his body shining with the radiance of pure gold;” also from the same family. Human life lasted 30,000 years during his time, and many people were converted by him. (3) Kasyapa (Pâli, Kassapa), “the one who swallows light.” Human life lasted 20,000 years in his era, and many people were converted by him. See Eitel, under the different names; Hardy’s M. B., pp. 95-97; and Davids’ “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 51.
(17) That is, walked in meditation. Such places are called Chankramana (Pâli, Chankama); promenades or corridors connected with a monastery, made sometimes with costly stones, for the purpose of peripatetic meditation. The “sitting” would be not because of weariness or for rest, but for meditation. E. H., p. 144.
(17) That is, walked in meditation. These areas are called Chankramana (Pâli, Chankama); walkways or corridors linked to a monastery, often constructed with expensive stones, meant for walking meditation. The “sitting” would not be due to tiredness or for resting, but for meditation. E. H., p. 144.
(18) The character in my Corean copy is {.}, which must be a mistake for the {.} of the Chinese editions. Otherwise, the meaning would be “a small medusa.”
(18) The character in my Korean copy is {.}, which must be a mistake for the {.} in the Chinese editions. Otherwise, the meaning would be "a small jellyfish."
(19) The reading here seems to me a great improvement on that of the Chinese editions, which means “Fire Limit.” Buddha, it is said, {.} converted this demon, which Chinese character Beal rendered at first by “in one of his incarnations;” and in his revised version he has “himself.” The difference between Fâ-Hien’s usage of {.} and {.} throughout his narrative is quite marked. {.} always refers to the doings of Sâkyamuni; {.}, “formerly,” is often used of him and others in the sense of “in a former age or birth.”
(19) The reading here seems to me a big improvement over that of the Chinese editions, which means “Fire Limit.” Buddha, it is said, {.} converted this demon, which the Chinese character Beal initially translated as “in one of his incarnations;” and in his revised version, he changed it to “himself.” The difference between Fâ-Hien’s use of {.} and {.} throughout his narrative is quite noticeable. {.} always refers to the actions of Sâkyamuni; {.}, “formerly,” is often used for him and others in the sense of “in a former age or life.”
(20) See Hardy, M. B., p. 194:—“As a token of the giving over of the garden, the king poured water upon the hands of Buddha; and from this time it became one of the principal residences of the sage.”
(20) See Hardy, M. B., p. 194:—“As a sign of handing over the garden, the king poured water over Buddha's hands; and from that moment, it became one of the main homes of the sage.”
(21) This would seem to be absurd; but the writer evidently intended to convey the idea that there was something mysterious about the number of the topes.
(21) This might seem ridiculous, but the author clearly meant to suggest that there was something mysterious about the number of the topes.
(22) This seems to be the meaning. The bodies of the monks are all burned. Hardy’s E. M., pp. 322-324.
(22) This appears to be the meaning. The bodies of the monks are all cremated. Hardy’s E. M., pp. 322-324.
CHAPTER XVIII.
KANYAKUBJA, OR CANOUGE. BUDDHA’S PREACHING.
Fâ-Hien stayed at the Dragon vihâra till after the summer retreat,(1) and then, travelling to the south-east for seven yojanas, he arrived at the city of Kanyakubja,(2) lying along the Ganges.(3) There are two monasteries in it, the inmates of which are students of the hinayana. At a distance from the city of six or seven le, on the west, on the northern bank of the Ganges, is a place where Buddha preached the Law to his disciples. It has been handed down that his subjects of discourse were such as “The bitterness and vanity (of life) as impermanent and uncertain,” and that “The body is as a bubble or foam on the water.” At this spot a tope was erected, and still exists.
Fâ-Hien stayed at the Dragon vihâra until after the summer retreat,(1) and then, traveling southeast for seven yojanas, he reached the city of Kanyakubja,(2) located along the Ganges.(3) There are two monasteries there, where the residents study hinayana. About six or seven le to the west of the city, on the northern bank of the Ganges, is a place where Buddha preached the Law to his disciples. It has been passed down that his topics included “The bitterness and vanity (of life) as impermanent and uncertain,” and that “The body is like a bubble or foam on the water.” A tope was built at this site, and it still stands today.
Having crossed the Ganges, and gone south for three yojanas, (the travellers) arrived at a village named A-le,(4) containing places where Buddha preached the Law, where he sat, and where he walked, at all of which topes have been built.
Having crossed the Ganges and traveled south for three yojanas, the travelers arrived at a village called A-le, which has places where Buddha taught the Law, where he sat, and where he walked, all of which have been marked by the construction of topes.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) We are now, probably, in 405.
(1) We are likely in the year 405 now.
(2) Canouge, the latitude and longitude of which have been given in a previous note. The Sanskrit name means “the city of humpbacked maidens;” with reference to the legend of the hundred daughters of king Brahma-datta, who were made deformed by the curse of the rishi Maha-vriksha, whose overtures they had refused. E. H., p. 51.
(2) Canouge, whose latitude and longitude were provided in an earlier note. The Sanskrit name translates to “the city of humpbacked maidens,” referencing the legend of the hundred daughters of King Brahma-datta, who were disfigured by the curse of the sage Maha-vriksha, after they rejected his advances. E. H., p. 51.
(3) Ganga, explained by “Blessed water,” and “Come from heaven to earth.”
(3) Ganga, described as "Holy water," and "Coming from heaven to earth."
(4) This village (the Chinese editions read “forest”) has hardly been clearly identified.
(4) This village (the Chinese editions say “forest”) has barely been clearly identified.
CHAPTER XIX.
SHA-CHE. LEGEND OF BUDDHA’S DANTA-KASHTHA.
Going on from this to the south-east for three yojanas, they came to the great kingdom of Sha-che.(1) As you go out of the city of Sha-che by the southern gate, on the east of the road (is the place) where Buddha, after he had chewed his willow branch,(2) stuck it in the ground, when it forthwith grew up seven cubits, (at which height it remained) neither increasing nor diminishing. The Brahmans with their contrary doctrines(3) became angry and jealous. Sometimes they cut the tree down, sometimes they plucked it up, and cast it to a distance, but it grew again on the same spot as at first. Here also is the place where the four Buddhas walked and sat, and at which a tope was built that is still existing.
Traveling southeast for three yojanas, they arrived at the large kingdom of Sha-che. As you exit the city of Sha-che through the southern gate, to the east of the road is the spot where Buddha, after chewing on his willow branch, stuck it in the ground. It immediately grew to seven cubits high, remaining at that height without changing. The Brahmans, with their opposing beliefs, became angry and jealous. They would sometimes cut the tree down, other times pull it up and throw it away, but it always grew back in the same place as before. This is also where the four Buddhas walked and sat, and a stupa was built here that still stands today.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Sha-che should probably be Sha-khe, making Cunningham’s identification of the name with the present Saket still more likely. The change of {.} into {.} is slight; and, indeed, the Khang-hsi dictionary thinks the two characters should be but one and the same.
(1) Sha-che should probably be Sha-khe, making Cunningham’s identification of the name with the current Saket even more likely. The change from {.} to {.} is minor; in fact, the Khang-hsi dictionary believes the two characters should actually be one and the same.
(2) This was, no doubt, what was called the danta-kashtha, or “dental wood,” mostly a bit of the ficus Indicus or banyan tree, which the monk chews every morning to cleanse his teeth, and for the purpose of health generally. The Chinese, not having the banyan, have used, or at least Fâ-Hien used, Yang ({.}, the general name for the willow) instead of it.
(2) This was definitely what was referred to as danta-kashtha, or “dental wood,” usually a piece of the ficus Indicus or banyan tree, which the monk chews every morning to clean his teeth and for overall health. The Chinese, not having the banyan tree, have used, or at least Fâ-Hien used, Yang ({.}, the general name for the willow) instead.
(3) Are two classes of opponents, or only one, intended here, so that we should read “all the unbelievers and Brahmans,” or “heretics and Brahmans?” I think the Brahmans were also “the unbelievers” and “heretics,” having {.} {.}, views and ways outside of, and opposed to, Buddha’s.
(3) Are there two types of opponents, or just one? Should we interpret this as “all the unbelievers and Brahmans,” or “heretics and Brahmans?” I believe the Brahmans were also “the unbelievers” and “heretics,” holding views and practices that were outside of and against Buddha’s teachings.
CHAPTER XX.
KOSALA AND SRAVASTI. THE JETAVANA VIHARA AND OTHER MEMORIALS AND LEGENDS OF
BUDDHA. SYMPATHY OF THE MONKS WITH THE PILGRIMS.
Going on from this to the south, for eight yojanas, (the travellers) came to the city of Sravasti(1) in the kingdom of Kosala,(2) in which the inhabitants were few and far between, amounting in all (only) to a few more than two hundred families; the city where king Prasenajit(3) ruled, and the place of the old vihâra of Maha-prajapti;(4) of the well and walls of (the house of) the (Vaisya) head Sudatta;(5) and where the Angulimalya(6) became an Arhat, and his body was (afterwards) burned on his attaining to pari-nirvâna. At all these places topes were subsequently erected, which are still existing in the city. The Brahmans, with their contrary doctrine, became full of hatred and envy in their hearts, and wished to destroy them, but there came from the heavens such a storm of crashing thunder and flashing lightning that they were not able in the end to effect their purpose.
Heading south for eight yojanas, the travelers arrived in the city of Sravasti in the kingdom of Kosala, where the population was sparse, amounting to just over two hundred families. This was the city ruled by King Prasenajit and home to the old vihara of Maha-prajapati, the well and walls of the house of the Vaisya head Sudatta, and where Angulimalya became an Arhat, with his body later cremated upon achieving pari-nirvana. At these sites, stupas were eventually built, which still stand in the city today. The Brahmans, holding their opposing beliefs, were filled with hatred and envy and sought to destroy them, but a fierce storm of thunder and lightning came down from the heavens, preventing them from succeeding in their attempts.
As you go out from the city by the south gate, and 1,200 paces from it, the (Vaisya) head Sudatta built a vihâra, facing the south; and when the door was open, on each side of it there was a stone pillar, with the figure of a wheel on the top of that on the left, and the figure of an ox on the top of that on the right. On the left and right of the building the ponds of water clear and pure, the thickets of trees always luxuriant, and the numerous flowers of various hues, constituted a lovely scene, the whole forming what is called the Jetavana vihâra.(7)
As you exit the city through the south gate and walk 1,200 paces from it, the head of the Vaisya community, Sudatta, built a vihara facing south. When the door was opened, there was a stone pillar on each side, with a wheel on top of the pillar on the left and an ox on top of the one on the right. On both sides of the building were clear and pure ponds, lush thickets of trees, and numerous flowers of various colors, creating a beautiful scene, all together known as the Jetavana vihara.(7)
When Buddha went up to the Trayastrimsas heaven,(8) and preached the Law for the benefit of his mother, (after he had been absent for) ninety days, Prasenajit, longing to see him, caused an image of him to be carved in Gosîrsha Chandana wood,(9) and put in the place where he usually sat. When Buddha on his return entered the vihâra, this image immediately left its place, and came forth to meet him. Buddha said to it, “Return to your seat. After I have attained to pari-nirvâna, you will serve as a pattern to the four classes of my disciples,”(10) and on this the image returned to its seat. This was the very first of all the images (of Buddha), and that which men subsequently copied. Buddha then removed, and dwelt in a small vihâra on the south side (of the other), a different place from that containing the image, and twenty paces distant from it.
When Buddha went up to the Trayastrimsas heaven, and preached the Law for the benefit of his mother, after being away for ninety days, Prasenajit, eager to see him, had an image of him carved from Gosîrsha Chandana wood and placed it where he usually sat. When Buddha returned and entered the vihâra, the image immediately left its place and came to meet him. Buddha told it, “Go back to your seat. After I achieve pari-nirvâna, you will serve as a model for the four classes of my disciples,” and with that, the image returned to its seat. This was the very first image of Buddha, which others later copied. Buddha then moved and stayed in a small vihâra on the south side, a different place from where the image was, twenty paces away.
The Jetavana vihâra was originally of seven storeys. The kings and people of the countries around vied with one another in their offerings, hanging up about it silken streamers and canopies, scattering flowers, burning incense, and lighting lamps, so as to make the night as bright as the day. This they did day after day without ceasing. (It happened that) a rat, carrying in its mouth the wick of a lamp, set one of the streamers or canopies on fire, which caught the vihâra, and the seven storeys were all consumed. The kings, with their officers and people, were all very sad and distressed, supposing that the sandal-wood image had been burned; but lo! after four or five days, when the door of a small vihâra on the east was opened, there was immediately seen the original image. They were all greatly rejoiced, and co-operated in restoring the vihâra. When they had succeeded in completing two storeys, they removed the image back to its former place.
The Jetavana vihâra originally had seven stories. The kings and people from the surrounding regions competed with each other in making offerings, hanging up silk streamers and canopies, scattering flowers, burning incense, and lighting lamps to make the night as bright as day. They did this day after day without stopping. One day, a rat, carrying the wick of a lamp, accidentally set one of the streamers or canopies on fire, which ignited the vihâra, and all seven stories were destroyed. The kings, along with their officials and the people, were very sad and distressed, thinking the sandalwood image had been burned. But after four or five days, when the door of a small vihâra on the east was opened, the original image was revealed. Everyone was greatly relieved and worked together to restore the vihâra. Once they completed two stories, they returned the image to its original place.
When Fâ-Hien and Tao-ching first arrived at the Jetavana monastery, and thought how the World-honoured one had formerly resided there for twenty-five years, painful reflections arose in their minds. Born in a border-land, along with their like-minded friends, they had travelled through so many kingdoms; some of those friends had returned (to their own land), and some had (died), proving the impermanence and uncertainty of life; and to-day they saw the place where Buddha had lived now unoccupied by him. They were melancholy through their pain of heart, and the crowd of monks came out, and asked them from what kingdom they were come. “We are come,” they replied, “from the land of Han.” “Strange,” said the monks with a sigh, “that men of a border country should be able to come here in search of our Law!” Then they said to one another, “During all the time that we, preceptors and monks,(11) have succeeded to one another, we have never seen men of Han, followers of our system, arrive here.”
When Fâ-Hien and Tao-ching first got to the Jetavana monastery and thought about how the World-honored One had lived there for twenty-five years, painful memories flooded their minds. Born in a border region, along with their like-minded friends, they had traveled through many kingdoms; some of those friends had gone back home, and some had died, highlighting the impermanence and uncertainty of life. Today, they saw the place where Buddha had lived, now empty without him. They felt a deep sadness in their hearts when a group of monks came out and asked them which kingdom they were from. “We’ve come,” they replied, “from the land of Han.” “Strange,” said the monks with a sigh, “that people from a border country would come here seeking our teachings!” Then they said to each other, “In all the time that we, the teachers and monks, have taken turns here, we have never seen followers from Han arrive.”
Four le to the north-west of the vihâra there is a grove called “The Getting of Eyes.” Formerly there were five hundred blind men, who lived here in order that they might be near the vihâra.(12) Buddha preached his Law to them, and they all got back their eyesight. Full of joy, they stuck their staves in the earth, and with their heads and faces on the ground, did reverence. The staves immediately began to grow, and they grew to be great. People made much of them, and no one dared to cut them down, so that they came to form a grove. It was in this way that it got its name, and most of the Jetavana monks, after they had taken their midday meal, went to the grove, and sat there in meditation.
To the northwest of the vihâra, there’s a grove called “The Getting of Eyes.” A long time ago, there were five hundred blind men living here so they could be close to the vihâra. Buddha taught them his teachings, and they all regained their sight. Overjoyed, they planted their staffs in the ground and bowed with their heads and faces down. The staffs quickly began to grow and became large trees. People valued them, and no one dared to cut them down, so they eventually formed a grove. That’s how it got its name, and most of the Jetavana monks, after finishing their midday meal, went to the grove to sit in meditation.
Six or seven le north-east from the Jetavana, mother Vaisakha(13) built another vihâra, to which she invited Buddha and his monks, and which is still existing.
Six or seven leagues northeast of the Jetavana, Mother Vaisakha built another vihara, to which she invited the Buddha and his monks, and it still exists today.
To each of the great residences for monks at the Jetavana vihâra there were two gates, one facing the east and the other facing the north. The park (containing the whole) was the space of ground which the (Vaisya) head Sudatta purchased by covering it with gold coins. The vihâra was exactly in the centre. Here Buddha lived for a longer time than at any other place, preaching his Law and converting men. At the places where he walked and sat they also (subsequently) reared topes, each having its particular name; and here was the place where Sundari(14) murdered a person and then falsely charged Buddha (with the crime). Outside the east gate of the Jetavana, at a distance of seventy paces to the north, on the west of the road, Buddha held a discussion with the (advocates of the) ninety-six schemes of erroneous doctrine, when the king and his great officers, the householders, and people were all assembled in crowds to hear it. Then a woman belonging to one of the erroneous systems, by name Chanchamana,(15) prompted by the envious hatred in her heart, and having put on (extra) clothes in front of her person, so as to give her the appearance of being with child, falsely accused Buddha before all the assembly of having acted unlawfully (towards her). On this, Sakra, Ruler of Devas, changed himself and some devas into white mice, which bit through the strings about her waist; and when this was done, the (extra) clothes which she wore dropt down on the ground. The earth at the same time was rent, and she went (down) alive into hell.(16) (This) also is the place where Devadatta,(17) trying with empoisoned claws to injure Buddha, went down alive into hell. Men subsequently set up marks to distinguish where both these events took place.
At each of the major residences for monks at the Jetavana monastery, there were two gates: one facing east and the other facing north. The entire area was the piece of land that the wealthy Sudatta bought, covering it with gold coins. The monastery was situated right in the center. Here, Buddha lived longer than anywhere else, teaching his principles and converting people. In the spots where he walked and sat, monuments were later built, each with its own name; and this was also the location where Sundari murdered someone and falsely accused Buddha of the crime. Outside the east gate of the Jetavana, about seventy paces to the north, on the west side of the road, Buddha held a discussion with the proponents of ninety-six false doctrines, while the king, his top officials, householders, and many people gathered in large crowds to listen. Then a woman from one of those false doctrines, named Chanchamana, driven by envy and hatred, dressed up in extra clothes to make it look like she was pregnant, and falsely accused Buddha of wrongdoing in front of everyone. In response, Sakra, the Ruler of the Devas, transformed himself and some deities into white mice, which chewed through the strings of her waist. When that happened, the extra clothes she was wearing fell to the ground. At the same moment, the earth裂, and she was swallowed alive into hell. This is also the place where Devadatta, trying to harm Buddha with poisoned claws, was also taken down alive into hell. Later, people marked the spots to indicate where these events occurred.
Further, at the place where the discussion took place, they reared a vihâra rather more than sixty cubits high, having in it an image of Buddha in a sitting posture. On the east of the road there was a devalaya(18) of (one of) the contrary systems, called “The Shadow Covered,” right opposite the vihâra on the place of discussion, with (only) the road between them, and also rather more than sixty cubits high. The reason why it was called “The Shadow Covered” was this:—When the sun was in the west, the shadow of the vihâra of the World-honoured one fell on the devalaya of a contrary system; but when the sun was in the east, the shadow of that devalaya was diverted to the north, and never fell on the vihâra of Buddha. The mal-believers regularly employed men to watch their devalaya, to sweep and water (all about it), to burn incense, light the lamps, and present offerings; but in the morning the lamps were found to have been suddenly removed, and in the vihâra of Buddha. The Brahmans were indignant, and said, “Those Sramanas take out lamps and use them for their own service of Buddha, but we will not stop our service for you!”(19) On that night the Brahmans themselves kept watch, when they saw the deva spirits which they served take the lamps and go three times round the vihâra of Buddha and present offerings. After this ministration to Buddha they suddenly disappeared. The Brahmans thereupon knowing how great was the spiritual power of Buddha, forthwith left their families, and became monks.(20) It has been handed down, that, near the time when these things occurred, around the Jetavana vihâra there were ninety-eight monasteries, in all of which there were monks residing, excepting only in one place which was vacant. In this Middle Kingdom(21) there are ninety-six(21) sorts of views, erroneous and different from our system, all of which recognise this world and the future world(22) (and the connexion between them). Each had its multitude of followers, and they all beg their food: only they do not carry the alms-bowl. They also, moreover, seek (to acquire) the blessing (of good deeds) on unfrequented ways, setting up on the road-side houses of charity, where rooms, couches, beds, and food and drink are supplied to travellers, and also to monks, coming and going as guests, the only difference being in the time (for which those parties remain).
Further, at the place where the discussion took place, they built a vihāra that was more than sixty cubits high, containing an image of Buddha in a sitting posture. On the east side of the road, there was a devalaya of a different belief system called “The Shadow Covered,” located directly opposite the vihāra at the discussion site, separated only by the road, and also standing more than sixty cubits high. It was named “The Shadow Covered” because when the sun was in the west, the shadow of the vihāra of the World-honored one fell on the devalaya of the opposing belief; but when the sun was in the east, the shadow of that devalaya shifted to the north and never fell on the vihāra of Buddha. The non-believers regularly employed individuals to monitor their devalaya, sweeping and watering the surrounding area, burning incense, lighting lamps, and making offerings; yet in the morning, the lamps were found to have been mysteriously moved and placed in the vihāra of Buddha. The Brahmans were furious and said, “Those Sramanas take our lamps and use them for their own service to Buddha, but we will not stop our service for you!” That night, the Brahmans decided to keep watch, and they saw the deva spirits they served take the lamps and circle the vihāra of Buddha three times, presenting offerings. After this service to Buddha, the spirits suddenly vanished. The Brahmans, realizing the immense spiritual power of Buddha, immediately left their families and became monks. It has been recorded that around the time these events took place, there were ninety-eight monasteries near the Jetavana vihāra, all of which housed monks except for one that was empty. In this Middle Kingdom, there are ninety-six different views, all erroneous and differing from our system, which recognize both this world and the next, as well as the connection between them. Each had many followers, and they all begged for food but did not carry alms-bowls. Additionally, they sought to gain the merit of good deeds on less-traveled paths, establishing roadside shelters where rooms, beds, and food and drink were provided for travelers and monks alike, with the only difference being how long each stayed as guests.
There are also companies of the followers of Devadatta still existing. They regularly make offerings to the three previous Buddhas, but not to Sâkyamuni Buddha.
There are still groups of followers of Devadatta today. They regularly make offerings to the three earlier Buddhas, but not to Sâkyamuni Buddha.
Four le south-east from the city of Sravasti, a tope has been erected at the place where the World-honoured one encountered king Virudhaha,(23) when he wished to attack the kingdom of Shay-e,(23) and took his stand before him at the side of the road.(24)
Four leagues southeast from the city of Sravasti, a stupa has been built at the spot where the World-Honored One met King Virudhaka when he intended to invade the kingdom of Shay-e, and positioned himself beside the road.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) In Singhalese, Sewet; here evidently the capital of Kosala. It is placed by Cunningham (Archaeological Survey) on the south bank of the Rapti, about fifty-eight miles north of Ayodya or Oude. There are still the ruins of a great town, the name being Sahet Mahat. It was in this town, or in its neighbourhood, that Sâkyamuni spent many years of his life after he became Buddha.
(1) In Singhalese, Sewet; this is clearly the capital of Kosala. Cunningham (Archaeological Survey) places it on the south bank of the Rapti, about fifty-eight miles north of Ayodya or Oude. There are still the ruins of a large town, known as Sahet Mahat. It was in this town, or nearby, that Sâkyamuni spent many years of his life after becoming the Buddha.
(2) There were two Indian kingdoms of this name, a southern and a northern. This was the northern, a part of the present Oudh.
(2) There were two Indian kingdoms with this name, one in the south and one in the north. This was the northern one, which is now part of Oudh.
(3) In Singhalese, Pase-nadi, meaning “leader of the victorious army.” He was one of the earliest converts and chief patrons of Sâkyamuni. Eitel calls him (p. 95) one of the originators of Buddhist idolatory, because of the statue which is mentioned in this chapter. See Hardy’s M. B., pp. 283, 284, et al.
(3) In Singhalese, Pase-nadi means “leader of the victorious army.” He was one of the first converts and main supporters of Sâkyamuni. Eitel refers to him (p. 95) as one of the founders of Buddhist idol worship, due to the statue mentioned in this chapter. See Hardy’s M. B., pp. 283, 284, et al.
(4) Explained by “Path of Love,” and “Lord of Life.” Prajapati was aunt and nurse of Sâkyamuni, the first woman admitted to the monkhood, and the first superior of the first Buddhistic convent. She is yet to become a Buddha.
(4) Explained by “Path of Love,” and “Lord of Life.” Prajapati was the aunt and nurse of Sâkyamuni, the first woman to be allowed into the monkhood, and the first head of the first Buddhist convent. She has yet to achieve Buddhahood.
(5) Sudatta, meaning “almsgiver,” was the original name of Anatha-pindika (or Pindada), a wealthy householder, or Vaisya head, of Sravasti, famous for his liberality (Hardy, Anepidu). Of his old house, only the well and walls remained at the time of Fâ-Hien’s visit to Sravasti.
(5) Sudatta, meaning “almsgiver,” was the original name of Anatha-pindika (or Pindada), a wealthy homeowner, or Vaisya leader, of Sravasti, known for his generosity (Hardy, Anepidu). At the time of Fâ-Hien’s visit to Sravasti, only the well and walls of his old house remained.
(6) The Angulimalya were a sect or set of Sivaitic fanatics, who made assassination a religious act. The one of them here mentioned had joined them by the force of circumstances. Being converted by Buddha, he became a monk; but when it is said in the text that he “got the Tao,” or doctrine, I think that expression implies more than his conversion, and is equivalent to his becoming an Arhat. His name in Pâli is Angulimala. That he did become an Arhat is clear from his autobiographical poem in the “Songs of the Theras.”
(6) The Angulimalya were a group of extreme followers of Shiva who turned killing into a religious practice. The one mentioned here joined them due to circumstances beyond his control. After being converted by Buddha, he became a monk; however, when the text states that he “got the Tao,” or teachings, I believe that suggests more than just his conversion and means he became an Arhat. His name in Pâli is Angulimala. It is evident he became an Arhat from his autobiographical poem in the “Songs of the Theras.”
(7) Eitel (p. 37) says:—“A noted vihâra in the suburbs of Sravasti, erected in a park which Anatha-pindika bought of prince Jeta, the son of Prasenajit. Sâkyamuni made this place his favourite residence for many years. Most of the Sûtras (authentic and supposititious) date from this spot.”
(7) Eitel (p. 37) says:—“A famous monastery in the outskirts of Sravasti, built in a park that Anatha-pindika purchased from Prince Jeta, the son of Prasenajit. Sâkyamuni made this place his preferred home for many years. Most of the Sûtras (both genuine and questionable) originate from this location.”
(8) See chapter xvii.
See chapter 17.
(9) See chapter xiii.
(9) See chapter 13.
(10) Arya, meaning “honourable,” “venerable,” is a title given only to those who have mastered the four spiritual truths:—(1) that “misery” is a necessary condition of all sentient existence; this is duhkha: (2) that the “accumulation” of misery is caused by the passions; this is samudaya: (3) that the “extinction” of passion is possible; this is nirodha: and (4) that the “path” leads to the extinction of passion; which is marga. According to their attainment of these truths, the Aryas, or followers of Buddha, are distinguished into four classes,—Srotapannas, Sakridagamins, Anagamins, and Arhats. E. H., p. 14.
(10) Arya, which means “honorable” or “venerable,” is a title given only to those who have mastered the four spiritual truths:—(1) that “misery” is a necessary condition of all sentient existence; this is duhkha: (2) that the “accumulation” of misery is caused by passions; this is samudaya: (3) that the “extinction” of passion is possible; this is nirodha: and (4) that the “path” leads to the extinction of passion; this is marga. Based on their understanding of these truths, the Aryas, or followers of Buddha, are classified into four groups—Srotapannas, Sakridagamins, Anagamins, and Arhats. E. H., p. 14.
(11) This is the first time that Fâ-Hien employs the name Ho-shang {.} {.}, which is now popularly used in China for all Buddhist monks without distinction of rank or office. It is the representative of the Sanskrit term Upadhyaya, “explained,” says Eitel (p. 155) by “a self-taught teacher,” or by “he who knows what is sinful and what is not sinful,” with the note, “In India the vernacular of this term is {.} {.} (? munshee (? Bronze)); in Kustana and Kashgar they say {.} {.} (hwa-shay); and from the latter term are derived the Chinese synonyms, {.} {.} (ho-shay) and {.} {.} (ho-shang).” The Indian term was originally a designation for those who teach only a part of the Vedas, the Vedangas. Adopted by Buddhists of Central Asia, it was made to signify the priests of the older ritual, in distinction from the Lamas. In China it has been used first as a synonym for {.} {.}, monks engaged in popular teaching (teachers of the Law), in distinction from {.} {.}, disciplinists, and {.} {.}, contemplative philosophers (meditationists); then it was used to designate the abbots of monasteries. But it is now popularly applied to all Buddhist monks. In the text there seems to be implied some distinction between the “teachers” and the “ho-shang;”—probably, the Pâli Akariya and Upagghaya; see Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 178, 179.
(11) This is the first time that Fâ-Hien uses the name Ho-shang {.} {.}, which is now commonly used in China for all Buddhist monks, regardless of rank or position. It represents the Sanskrit term Upadhyaya, which Eitel (p. 155) explains as “a self-taught teacher” or “he who knows what is sinful and what is not sinful,” with a note stating, “In India, the vernacular for this term is {.} {.} (? munshee (? Bronze)); in Kustana and Kashgar, they say {.} {.} (hwa-shay); and from the latter term, we get the Chinese synonyms, {.} {.} (ho-shay) and {.} {.} (ho-shang).” The Indian term was originally a label for those who teach only part of the Vedas, the Vedangas. Adopted by Buddhists of Central Asia, it came to signify the priests of the older rituals, distinguishing them from the Lamas. In China, it was first used as a synonym for {.} {.}, monks involved in popular teaching (teachers of the Law), as opposed to {.} {.}, disciplinarians, and {.} {.}, contemplative philosophers (meditationists); then it was used to refer to the abbots of monasteries. But now, it’s commonly applied to all Buddhist monks. The text seems to suggest a distinction between the “teachers” and the “ho-shang;”—likely referring to the Pâli Akariya and Upagghaya; see Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 178, 179.
(12) It might be added, “as depending on it,” in order to bring out the full meaning of the {.} in the text. If I recollect aright, the help of the police had to be called in at Hong Kong in its early years, to keep the approaches to the Cathedral free from the number of beggars, who squatted down there during service, hoping that the hearers would come out with softened hearts, and disposed to be charitable. I found the popular tutelary temples in Peking and other places, and the path up Mount T’ai in Shan-lung similarly frequented.
(12) It might be added, “as depending on it,” to highlight the full meaning of the {.} in the text. If I remember correctly, the police had to be called in Hong Kong in its early years to keep the entrances to the Cathedral clear of beggars who sat there during services, hoping that people would come out with softened hearts and be willing to give. I found the popular guardian temples in Beijing and other places, as well as the path up Mount T’ai in Shan-lung, were similarly crowded.
(13) The wife of Anatha-pindika, and who became “mother superior” of many nunneries. See her history in M. B., pp. 220-227. I am surprised it does not end with the statement that she is to become a Buddha.
(13) The wife of Anatha-pindika, who became the "mother superior" of many nunneries. See her history in M. B., pp. 220-227. I'm surprised it doesn't conclude with the statement that she will become a Buddha.
(14) See E. H., p. 136. Hsuan-chwang does not give the name of this murderer; see in Julien’s “Vie et Voyages de Hiouen-thsang,” p. 125,—“a heretical Brahman killed a woman and calumniated Buddha.” See also the fuller account in Beal’s “Records of Western Countries,” pp. 7, 8, where the murder is committed by several Brahmacharins. In this passage Beal makes Sundari to be the name of the murdered person (a harlot). But the text cannot be so construed.
(14) See E. H., p. 136. Hsuan-chwang doesn’t mention the name of this murderer; check Julien’s “Vie et Voyages de Hiouen-thsang,” p. 125,—“a heretical Brahman killed a woman and slandered Buddha.” You can also find a more detailed account in Beal’s “Records of Western Countries,” pp. 7, 8, where the murder is carried out by several Brahmacharins. In this section, Beal refers to the murdered woman as Sundari (a prostitute). However, the text doesn’t support that interpretation.
(15) Eitel (p. 144) calls her Chancha; in Singhalese, Chinchi. See the story about her, M. B., pp. 275-277.
(15) Eitel (p. 144) refers to her as Chancha; in Singhalese, it's Chinchi. Check out the story about her in M. B., pp. 275-277.
(16) “Earth’s prison,” or “one of Earth’s prisons.” It was the Avichi naraka to which she went, the last of the eight hot prisons, where the culprits die, and are born again in uninterrupted succession (such being the meaning of Avichi), though not without hope of final redemption. E. H. p. 21.
(16) “Earth’s prison,” or “one of Earth’s prisons.” It was the Avichi naraka she went to, the last of the eight hot prisons, where the wrongdoers die and are reborn continuously (that’s what Avichi means), though there’s still hope for ultimate redemption. E. H. p. 21.
(17) Devadatta was brother of Ananda, and a near relative therefore of Sâkyamuni. He was the deadly enemy, however, of the latter. He had become so in an earlier state of existence, and the hatred continued in every successive birth, through which they reappeared in the world. See the accounts of him, and of his various devices against Buddha, and his own destruction at the last, in M. B., pp. 315-321, 326-330; and still better, in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 233-265. For the particular attempt referred to in the text, see “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 107. When he was engulphed, and the flames were around him, he cried out to Buddha to save him, and we are told that he is expected yet to appear as a Buddha under the name of Devaraja, in a universe called Deva-soppana. E. H., p. 39.
(17) Devadatta was Ananda's brother and, therefore, a close relative of Sakyamuni. However, he was the bitter enemy of the latter. This enmity originated in a past life, and the hatred persisted through every subsequent birth as they reappeared in the world. You can read about him and his various schemes against the Buddha, as well as his eventual downfall, in M. B., pp. 315-321, 326-330; and even better, in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 233-265. For the specific attempt mentioned in the text, see “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 107. When he was engulfed by flames, he cried out to the Buddha for help, and we are told that he is still expected to appear as a Buddha under the name of Devaraja in a universe called Deva-soppana. E. H., p. 39.
(18) “A devalaya ({.} {.} or {.} {.}), a place in which a deva is worshipped,—a general name for all Brahmanical temples” (Eitel, p. 30). We read in the Khang-hsi dictionary under {.}, that when Kasyapa Matanga came to the Western Regions, with his Classics or Sûtras, he was lodged in the Court of State-Ceremonial, and that afterwards there was built for him “The Court of the White-horse” ({.} {.} {.}), and in consequence the name of Sze {.} came to be given to all Buddhistic temples. Fâ-Hien, however, applies this term only to Brahmanical temples.
(18) “A devalaya ({{.}} {{.}} or {{.}} {{.}}), a place where a god is worshipped—a general term for all Brahmanical temples” (Eitel, p. 30). We read in the Khang-hsi dictionary under {{.}}, that when Kasyapa Matanga came to the Western Regions with his Classics or Sûtras, he was hosted in the Court of State-Ceremonial, and later, “The Court of the White-horse” ({{.}} {{.}} {{.}}) was built for him, which led to the name Sze {{.}} being applied to all Buddhistic temples. However, Fâ-Hien uses this term only for Brahmanical temples.
(19) Their speech was somewhat unconnected, but natural enough in the circumstances. Compare the whole account with the narrative in I Samuel v. about the Ark and Dagon, that “twice-battered god of Palestine.”
(19) Their speech was a bit disjointed, but it felt natural given the situation. Compare the entire account with the story in I Samuel v. about the Ark and Dagon, that “twice-battered god of Palestine.”
(20) “Entered the doctrine or path.” Three stages in the Buddhistic life are indicated by Fâ-Hien:—“entering it,” as here, by becoming monks ({.} {.}); “getting it,” by becoming Arhats ({.} {.}); and “completing it,” by becoming Buddha ({.} {.}).
(20) “Entered the doctrine or path.” Fâ-Hien highlights three stages in Buddhist life: “entering it,” which means becoming monks ({.} {.}); “getting it,” which refers to becoming Arhats ({.} {.}); and “completing it,” signifying becoming Buddha ({.} {.}).
(21) It is not quite clear whether the author had in mind here Central India as a whole, which I think he had, or only Kosala, the part of it where he then was. In the older teaching, there were only thirty-two sects, but there may have been three subdivisions of each. See Rhys Davids’ “Buddhism,” pp. 98, 99.
(21) It's not entirely clear whether the author was referring to all of Central India, which I believe he was, or just to Kosala, the area where he was at the time. In older teachings, there were only thirty-two sects, but there might have been three subdivisions of each. See Rhys Davids’ “Buddhism,” pp. 98, 99.
(22) This mention of “the future world” is an important difference between the Corean and Chinese texts. The want of it in the latter has been a stumbling-block in the way of all previous translators. Rémusat says in a note that “the heretics limited themselves to speak of the duties of man in his actual life without connecting it by the notion that the metempsychosis with the anterior periods of existence through which he had passed.” But this is just the opposite of what Fâ-Hien’s meaning was, according to our Corean text. The notion of “the metempsychosis” was just that in which all the ninety-six erroneous systems agreed among themselves and with Buddhism. If he had wished to say what the French sinologue thinks he does say, moreover, he would probably have written {.} {.} {.} {.} {.}. Let me add, however, that the connexion which Buddhism holds between the past world (including the present) and the future is not that of a metempsychosis, or transmigration of souls, for it does not appear to admit any separate existence of the soul. Adhering to its own phraseology of “the wheel,” I would call its doctrine that of “The Transrotation of Births.” See Rhys Davids’ third Hibbert Lecture.
(22) This mention of “the future world” is a significant difference between the Corean and Chinese texts. Its absence in the latter has been a major obstacle for all previous translators. Rémusat notes that “the heretics focused on the duties of man in his present life without connecting it to the idea that metempsychosis relates to the earlier periods of existence he had experienced.” But this is exactly the opposite of what Fâ-Hien meant according to our Corean text. The idea of “metempsychosis” was the concept that all ninety-six erroneous systems agreed upon and with Buddhism. If he wanted to convey what the French sinologist thinks he said, he would likely have written {.} {.} {.} {.} {.}. However, I should point out that the connection Buddhism makes between the past world (including the present) and the future is not that of metempsychosis, or the transmigration of souls, as it seems to deny any separate existence of the soul. Sticking to its own terminology of “the wheel,” I would describe its doctrine as “The Transrotation of Births.” See Rhys Davids’ third Hibbert Lecture.
(23) Or, more according to the phonetisation of the text, Vaidurya. He was king of Kosala, the son and successor of Prasenajit, and the destroyer of Kapilavastu, the city of the Sakya family. His hostility to the Sakyas is sufficiently established, and it may be considered as certain that the name Shay-e, which, according to Julien’s “Methode,” p. 89, may be read Chia-e, is the same as Kia-e ({.} {.}), one of the phonetisations of Kapilavastu, as given by Eitel.
(23) Or, more in line with the phonetic spelling of the text, Vaidurya. He was the king of Kosala, the son and successor of Prasenajit, and the destroyer of Kapilavastu, the city of the Sakya family. His animosity towards the Sakyas is well-documented, and it can be considered certain that the name Shay-e, which, according to Julien’s “Methode,” p. 89, can also be read as Chia-e, is the same as Kia-e ({.} {.}), one of the phonetic spellings of Kapilavastu, as noted by Eitel.
(24) This would be the interview in the “Life of the Buddha” in Trübner’s Oriental Series, p. 116, when Virudhaha on his march found Buddha under an old sakotato tree. It afforded him no shade; but he told the king that the thought of the danger of “his relatives and kindred made it shady.” The king was moved to sympathy for the time, and went back to Sravasti; but the destruction of Kapilavastu was only postponed for a short space, and Buddha himself acknowledged it to be inevitable in the connexion of cause and effect.
(24) This refers to the interview in the “Life of the Buddha” in Trübner’s Oriental Series, p. 116, when Virudhaha, during his march, found Buddha under an old sakotato tree. It didn't provide any shade, but he told the king that the thought of the danger facing "his relatives and kindred made it feel shady." The king felt sympathy at that moment and returned to Sravasti; however, the destruction of Kapilavastu was only delayed for a short time, and Buddha himself recognized it as inevitable in the context of cause and effect.
CHAPTER XXI.
THE THREE PREDECESSORS OF SAKYAMUNI IN THE BUDDHASHIP.
Fifty le to the west of the city bring (the traveller) to a town named Too-wei,(1) the birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha.(1) At the place where he and his father met,(2) and at that where he attained to pari-nirvâna, topes were erected. Over the entire relic of the whole body of him, the Kasyapa Tathagata,(3) a great tope was also erected.
Fifty leagues west of the city leads the traveler to a town called Too-wei, the birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha. At the location where he met his father, and at the site where he achieved parinirvana, monuments were built. A large stupa was also constructed over the entire relic of the body of Kasyapa Tathagata.
Going on south-east from the city of Sravasti for twelve yojanas, (the travellers) came to a town named Na-pei-kea,(4) the birthplace of Krakuchanda Buddha. At the place where he and his father met, and at that where he attained to pari-nirvâna, topes were erected. Going north from here less than a yojana, they came to a town which had been the birthplace of Kanakamuni Buddha. At the place where he and his father met, and where he attained to pari-nirvâna, topes were erected.
Traveling southeast from the city of Sravasti for twelve yojanas, the travelers arrived at a town called Na-pei-kea, the birthplace of Krakuchanda Buddha. At the locations where he and his father met, as well as where he reached pari-nirvana, memorial mounds were built. Heading north from there, less than a yojana, they reached a town that was the birthplace of Kanakamuni Buddha. At the places where he and his father met, and where he attained pari-nirvana, memorial mounds were also erected.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Identified, as Beal says, by Cunningham with Tadwa, a village nine miles to the west of Sahara-mahat. The birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha is generally thought to have been Benares. According to a calculation of Rémusat, from his birth to A.D. 1832 there were 1,992,859 years!
(1) Beal identifies it, as Cunningham does, with Tadwa, a village nine miles to the west of Sahara-mahat. Most people believe that Benares is the birthplace of Kasyapa Buddha. Rémusat calculated that from his birth to A.D. 1832, there were 1,992,859 years!
(2) It seems to be necessary to have a meeting between every Buddha and his father. One at least is ascribed to Sâkyamuni and his father (real or supposed) Suddhodana.
(2) It appears that a meeting between every Buddha and his father is necessary. At least one is attributed to Sâkyamuni and his father (whether real or assumed) Suddhodana.
(3) This is the highest epithet given to every supreme Buddha; in Chinese {.} {.}, meaning, as Eitel, p. 147 says, “Sic profectus sum.” It is equivalent to “Rightful Buddha, the true successor in the Supreme Buddha Line.” Hardy concludes his account of the Kasyapa Buddha (M. B., p. 97) with the following sentence:—“After his body was burnt, the bones still remained in their usual position, presenting the appearance of a perfect skeleton; and the whole of the inhabitants of Jambudvipa, assembling together, erected a dagoba over his relics one yojana in height!”
(3) This is the highest title given to every supreme Buddha; in Chinese {.} {.}, which means, as Eitel, p. 147 says, “Sic profectus sum.” It’s equivalent to “Rightful Buddha, the true successor in the Supreme Buddha Line.” Hardy wraps up his account of the Kasyapa Buddha (M. B., p. 97) with this sentence:—“After his body was cremated, the bones remained in their usual position, looking like a perfect skeleton; and all the people of Jambudvipa gathered together and built a dagoba over his relics, which was one yojana high!”
(4) Na-pei-kea or Nabhiga is not mentioned elsewhere. Eitel says this Buddha was born at the city of Gan-ho ({.} {.} {.}) and Hardy gives his birthplace as Mekhala. It may be possible, by means of Sanskrit, to reconcile these statements.
(4) Na-pei-kea or Nabhiga isn't mentioned anywhere else. Eitel states that this Buddha was born in the city of Gan-ho ({.} {.} {.}) while Hardy claims his birthplace is Mekhala. It might be possible to reconcile these claims using Sanskrit.
CHAPTER XXII.
KAPILAVASTU. ITS DESOLATION. LEGENDS OF BUDDHA’S BIRTH, AND OTHER
INCIDENTS IN CONNEXION WITH IT.
Less than a yojana to the east from this brought them to the city of Kapilavastu;(1) but in it there was neither king nor people. All was mound and desolation. Of inhabitants there were only some monks and a score or two of families of the common people. At the spot where stood the old palace of king Suddhodana(2) there have been made images of the prince (his eldest son) and his mother;(3) and at the places where that son appeared mounted on a white elephant when he entered his mother’s womb,(4) and where he turned his carriage round on seeing the sick man after he had gone out of the city by the eastern gate,(5) topes have been erected. The places (were also pointed out)(6) where (the rishi) A-e(7) inspected the marks (of Buddhaship on the body) of the heir-apparent (when an infant); where, when he was in company with Nanda and others, on the elephant being struck down and drawn to one side, he tossed it away;(8) where he shot an arrow to the south-east, and it went a distance of thirty le, then entering the ground and making a spring to come forth, which men subsequently fashioned into a well from which travellers might drink;(9) where, after he had attained to Wisdom, Buddha returned and saw the king, his father;(10) where five hundred Sakyas quitted their families and did reverence to Upali(11) while the earth shook and moved in six different ways; where Buddha preached his Law to the devas, and the four deva kings and others kept the four doors (of the hall), so that (even) the king, his father, could not enter;(12) where Buddha sat under a nyagrodha tree, which is still standing,(13) with his face to the east, and (his aunt) Maja-prajapati presented him with a Sanghali;(14) and (where) king Vaidurya slew the seed of Sakya, and they all in dying became Srotapannas.(15) A tope was erected at this last place, which is still existing.
Less than a yojana to the east brought them to the city of Kapilavastu;(1) but it was deserted, with neither king nor people. It was all mounds and emptiness. The only residents were a few monks and a couple of dozen common families. At the site of the old palace of King Suddhodana(2), statues of the prince (his eldest son) and his mother(3) had been created; at the places where that son entered his mother’s womb mounted on a white elephant(4), and where he turned his carriage around upon seeing a sick man after leaving the city through the eastern gate,(5) memorial mounds, or topes, were erected. The locations were also indicated(6) where (the sage) A-e(7) checked the marks (of Buddhaship on the infant's body); where, along with Nanda and others, he effortlessly tossed aside an elephant that had been struck down; (8) where he shot an arrow to the southeast, which traveled thirty le before entering the ground and sprouting back up, later made into a well for travelers to drink from;(9) where, after achieving Enlightenment, Buddha returned to see his father, the king;(10) where five hundred Sakyas left their families and revered Upali(11) while the earth shook in six different directions; where Buddha preached his teachings to the devas, and the four deva kings and others guarded the four entrances (of the hall), preventing even his father, the king, from entering;(12) where Buddha sat under a nyagrodha tree, still standing today,(13) facing east, while his aunt Maja-prajapati offered him a Sanghali;(14) and (where) King Vaidurya killed the lineage of Sakya, and in death, they all became Srotapannas.(15) A stupa was built at this last location, which still exists.
Several le north-east from the city was the king’s field, where the heir-apparent sat under a tree, and looked at the ploughers.(16)
Several leagues northeast of the city was the king’s field, where the heir-apparent sat under a tree and watched the plowmen.
Fifty le east from the city was a garden, named Lumbini,(17) where the queen entered the pond and bathed. Having come forth from the pond on the northern bank, after (walking) twenty paces, she lifted up her hand, laid hold of a branch of a tree, and, with her face to the east, gave birth to the heir-apparent.(18) When he fell to the ground, he (immediately) walked seven paces. Two dragon-kings (appeared) and washed his body. At the place where they did so, there was immediately formed a well, and from it, as well as from the above pond, where (the queen) bathed,(19) the monks (even) now constantly take the water, and drink it.
Fifty leagues east of the city was a garden called Lumbini,(17) where the queen entered the pond and bathed. After coming out of the pond on the northern bank, she walked twenty paces, lifted her hand, grabbed a branch of a tree, and, facing east, gave birth to the heir apparent.(18) As soon as he touched the ground, he walked seven paces. Two dragon kings appeared and washed his body. At the spot where they did this, a well instantly formed, and from it, as well as from the pond where the queen bathed,(19) the monks still regularly take water to drink.
There are four places of regular and fixed occurrence (in the history of) all Buddhas:—first, the place where they attained to perfect Wisdom (and became Buddha); second, the place where they turned the wheel of the Law;(20) third, the place where they preached the Law, discoursed of righteousness, and discomfited (the advocates of) erroneous doctrines; and fourth, the place where they came down, after going up to the Trayatrimsas heaven to preach the Law for the benefit of their mothers. Other places in connexion with them became remarkable, according to the manifestations which were made at them at particular times.
There are four significant places associated with all Buddhas: first, the spot where they achieved perfect Wisdom (and became Buddhas); second, the location where they set the wheel of the Law in motion; third, the site where they taught the Law, spoke about righteousness, and challenged false beliefs; and fourth, the place where they descended after going up to the Trayatrimsas heaven to teach the Law for the benefit of their mothers. Other sites related to them became noteworthy due to specific events that occurred at those times.
The country of Kapilavastu is a great scene of empty desolation. The inhabitants are few and far between. On the roads people have to be on their guard against white elephants(21) and lions, and should not travel incautiously.
The country of Kapilavastu is a vast area of empty desolation. The inhabitants are sparse. On the roads, people need to be cautious of white elephants and lions, and they shouldn't travel carelessly.
NOTES
Notes
(1) Kapilavastu, “the city of beautiful virtue,” was the birthplace of Sâkyamuni, but was destroyed, as intimated in the notes on last chapter, during his lifetime. It was situated a short distance north-west of the present Goruckpoor, lat. 26° 46′ N., lon. 83° 19′ E. Davids says (Manual, p. 25), “It was on the banks of the river Rohini, the modern Kohana, about 100 miles north-west of the city of Benares.”
(1) Kapilavastu, “the city of beautiful virtue,” was the birthplace of Sâkyamuni but was destroyed, as mentioned in the notes on the last chapter, during his lifetime. It was located a short distance northwest of present-day Goruckpoor, lat. 26° 46′ N., lon. 83° 19′ E. Davids says (Manual, p. 25), “It was on the banks of the river Rohini, the modern Kohana, about 100 miles northwest of the city of Benares.”
(2) The father, or supposed father, of Sâkyamuni. He is here called “the king white and pure” ({.} {.} {.}). A more common appellation is “the king of pure rice” ({.} {.} {.}); but the character {.}, or “rice,” must be a mistake for {.}, “Brahman,” and the appellation= “Pure Brahman king.”
(2) The father, or supposed father, of Sâkyamuni. He is referred to here as "the king white and pure" ({.} {.} {.}). A more common title is "the king of pure rice" ({.} {.} {.}); however, the character {.}, or "rice," is likely a mistake for {.}, "Brahman," making the title "Pure Brahman king."
(3) The “eldest son,” or “prince” was Sâkyamuni, and his mother had no other son. For “his mother,” see chap. xvii, note 3. She was a daughter of Anjana or Anusakya, king of the neighbouring country of Koli, and Yasodhara, an aunt of Suddhodana. There appear to have been various intermarriages between the royal houses of Kapila and Koli.
(3) The “eldest son,” or “prince,” was Sâkyamuni, and his mother had no other son. For “his mother,” see chap. xvii, note 3. She was a daughter of Anjana or Anusakya, king of the neighboring country of Koli, and Yasodhara, an aunt of Suddhodana. There seem to have been several intermarriages between the royal families of Kapila and Koli.
(4) In “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 15, we read that “Buddha was now in the Tushita heaven, and knowing that his time was come (the time for his last rebirth in the course of which he would become Buddha), he made the necessary examinations; and having decided that Maha-maya was the right mother, in the midnight watch he entered her womb under the appearance of an elephant.” See M. B., pp. 140-143, and, still better, Rhys Davids’ “Birth Stories,” pp. 58-63.
(4) In “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 15, it states that “Buddha was now in Tushita heaven, and realizing that his time had come (the time for his final rebirth during which he would become Buddha), he conducted the necessary assessments; and having determined that Maha-maya was the chosen mother, he entered her womb in the middle of the night in the form of an elephant.” See M. B., pp. 140-143, and even better, Rhys Davids’ “Birth Stories,” pp. 58-63.
(5) In Hardy’s M. B., pp. 154, 155, we read, “As the prince (Siddhartha, the first name given to Sâkyamuni; see Eitel, under Sarvarthasiddha) was one day passing along, he saw a deva under the appearance of a leper, full of sores, with a body like a water-vessel, and legs like the pestle for pounding rice; and when he learned from his charioteer what it was that he saw, he became agitated, and returned at once to the palace.” See also Rhys Davids’ “Buddhism,” p. 29.
(5) In Hardy’s M. B., pp. 154, 155, we read, “As the prince (Siddhartha, the first name given to Sâkyamuni; see Eitel, under Sarvarthasiddha) was walking by one day, he saw a deity disguised as a leper, covered in sores, with a body like a water vessel and legs like a rice pestle; and when he found out from his charioteer what he was looking at, he became upset and immediately went back to the palace.” See also Rhys Davids’ “Buddhism,” p. 29.
(6) This is an addition of my own, instead of “There are also topes erected at the following spots,” of former translators. Fâ-Hien does not say that there were memorial topes at all these places.
(6) This is my own addition instead of “There are also topes erected at the following spots,” from earlier translators. Fâ-Hien doesn’t mention that there were memorial topes at any of these locations.
(7) Asita; see Eitel, p. 15. He is called in Pâli Kala Devala, and had been a minister of Suddhodana’s father.
(7) Asita; see Eitel, p. 15. He is referred to in Pāli as Kala Devala and was a minister for Suddhodana’s father.
(8) In “The Life of Buddha” we read that the Lichchhavis of Vaisali had sent to the young prince a very fine elephant; but when it was near Kapilavastu, Devadatta, out of envy, killed it with a blow of his fist. Nanda (not Ananda, but a half-brother of Siddhartha), coming that way, saw the carcase lying on the road, and pulled it on one side; but the Bodhisattva, seeing it there, took it by the tail, and tossed it over seven fences and ditches, when the force of its fall made a great ditch. I suspect that the characters in the column have been disarranged, and that we should read {.} {.} {.} {.}, {.} {.}, {.} {.}. Buddha, that is Siddhartha, was at this time only ten years old.
(8) In “The Life of Buddha,” we read that the Lichchhavis of Vaisali sent a beautiful elephant to the young prince. However, when it got close to Kapilavastu, Devadatta, out of jealousy, killed it with a punch. Nanda (not Ananda, but a half-brother of Siddhartha), passing by, saw the dead elephant on the road and moved it to the side. But the Bodhisattva, seeing it there, took it by the tail and tossed it over seven fences and ditches, causing it to land with such force that it created a large ditch. I suspect that the characters in the column have been mixed up and that we should read {.} {.} {.} {.}, {.} {.}, {.} {.}. Buddha, who is Siddhartha, was only ten years old at this time.
(9) The young Sakyas were shooting when the prince thus surpassed them all. He was then seventeen.
(9) The young Sakyas were hunting when the prince outperformed them all. He was seventeen at the time.
(10) This was not the night when he finally fled from Kapilavastu, and as he was leaving the palace, perceiving his sleeping father, and said, “Father, though I love thee, yet a fear possesses me, and I may not stay;”—The Life of the Buddha, p. 25. Most probably it was that related in M. B., pp. 199-204. See “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 120-127.
(10) This wasn't the night he finally escaped from Kapilavastu. As he was leaving the palace and saw his father sleeping, he said, “Father, even though I love you, fear overwhelms me, and I can't stay;”—The Life of the Buddha, p. 25. It most likely relates to what is discussed in M. B., pp. 199-204. See “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 120-127.
(11) They did this, I suppose, to show their humility, for Upali was only a Sudra by birth, and had been a barber; so from the first did Buddhism assert its superiority to the conditions of rank and caste. Upali was distinguished by his knowledge of the rules of discipline, and praised on that account by Buddha. He was one of the three leaders of the first synod, and the principal compiler of the original Vinaya books.
(11) They probably did this to demonstrate their humility because Upali was born a Sudra and had been a barber. From the beginning, Buddhism claimed to be above social status and caste. Upali was recognized for his knowledge of the rules of discipline, and Buddha praised him for it. He was one of the three leaders of the first synod and the main compiler of the original Vinaya books.
(12) I have not met with the particulars of this preaching.
(12) I haven't come across the details of this sermon.
(13) Meaning, as explained in Chinese, “a tree without knots;” the ficus Indica. See Rhys Davids’ note, Manual, p. 39, where he says that a branch of one of these trees was taken from Buddha Gaya to Anuradhapura in Ceylon in the middle of the third century B.C, and is still growing there, the oldest historical tree in the world.
(13) Meaning, as explained in Chinese, “a tree without knots;” the ficus Indica. See Rhys Davids’ note, Manual, p. 39, where he states that a branch from one of these trees was taken from Buddha Gaya to Anuradhapura in Ceylon in the middle of the third century B.C. and is still growing there, making it the oldest historical tree in the world.
(14) See chap. xiii, note 11. I have not met with the account of this presentation. See the long account of Prajapati in M. B., pp. 306-315.
(14) See chap. xiii, note 11. I haven't come across the details of this presentation. Check the detailed description of Prajapati in M. B., pp. 306-315.
(15) See chap. xx, note 10. The Srotapannas are the first class of saints, who are not to be reborn in a lower sphere, but attain to nirvâna after having been reborn seven times consecutively as men or devas. The Chinese editions state there were “1000” of the Sakya seed. The general account is that they were 500, all maidens, who refused to take their place in king Vaidurya’s harem, and were in consequence taken to a pond, and had their hands and feet cut off. There Buddha came to them, had their wounds dressed, and preached to them the Law. They died in the faith, and were reborn in the region of the four Great Kings. Thence they came back and visited Buddha at Jetavana in the night, and there they obtained the reward of Srotapanna. “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 121.
(15) See chap. xx, note 10. The Srotapannas are the first group of saints who are not reincarnated into a lower realm but achieve nirvana after being reborn seven times as humans or deities. The Chinese editions say there were “1000” of the Sakya lineage. The general story is that there were 500 maidens who refused to join King Vaidurya's harem and were subsequently taken to a pond where their hands and feet were cut off. There, the Buddha visited them, dressed their wounds, and taught them the Law. They died with faith and were reborn in the realm of the four Great Kings. From there, they came back to visit the Buddha at Jetavana at night, where they attained the reward of Srotapanna. “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 121.
(16) See the account of this event in M. B., p. 150. The account of it reminds me of the ploughing by the sovereign, which has been an institution in China from the earliest times. But there we have no magic and no extravagance.
(16) Check out the description of this event in M. B., p. 150. It makes me think of the emperor plowing the fields, which has been a tradition in China since ancient times. But there’s no magic or extravagance involved there.
(17) “The place of Liberation;” see chap. xiii, note 7.
(17) “The place of Liberation;” see chap. xiii, note 7.
(18) See the accounts of this event in M. B., pp. 145, 146; “The Life of the Buddha,” pp. 15, 16; and “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 66.
(18) See the accounts of this event in M. B., pp. 145, 146; “The Life of the Buddha,” pp. 15, 16; and “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 66.
(19) There is difficulty in construing the text of this last statement. Mr. Beal had, no doubt inadvertently, omitted it in his first translation. In his revised version he gives for it, I cannot say happily, “As well as at the pool, the water of which came down from above for washing (the child).”
(19) It’s hard to interpret the wording of this final statement. Mr. Beal, probably by mistake, left it out in his first translation. In his updated version, he awkwardly phrases it as, “Just like at the pool, the water from above was used for washing (the child).”
(20) See chap. xvii, note 8. See also Davids’ Manual, p. 45. The latter says, that “to turn the wheel of the Law” means “to set rolling the royal chariot wheel of a universal empire of truth and righteousness;” but he admits that this is more grandiloquent than the phraseology was in the ears of Buddhists. I prefer the words quoted from Eitel in the note referred to. “They turned” is probably equivalent to “They began to turn.”
(20) See chap. xvii, note 8. See also Davids’ Manual, p. 45. The latter says that “to turn the wheel of the Law” means “to start the royal chariot wheel of a universal empire of truth and righteousness;” but he admits that this sounds more grand than what it meant to Buddhists. I prefer the words quoted from Eitel in the note mentioned. “They turned” probably means “They began to turn.”
(21) Fâ-Hien does not say that he himself saw any of these white elephants, nor does he speak of the lions as of any particular colour. We shall find by-and-by, in a note further on, that, to make them appear more terrible, they are spoken of as “black.”
(21) Fâ-Hien doesn't claim that he personally saw any of these white elephants, nor does he mention the lions as having any specific color. Later on, in a note further down, we'll discover that, to make them seem more fearsome, they are referred to as “black.”
CHAPTER XXIII.
RAMA, AND ITS TOPE.
East from Buddha’s birthplace, and at a distance of five yojanas, there is a kingdom called Rama.(1) The king of this country, having obtained one portion of the relics of Buddha’s body,(2) returned with it and built over it a tope, named the Rama tope. By the side of it there was a pool, and in the pool a dragon, which constantly kept watch over (the tope), and presented offerings to it day and night. When king Asoka came forth into the world, he wished to destroy the eight topes (over the relics), and to build (instead of them) 84,000 topes.(3) After he had thrown down the seven (others), he wished next to destroy this tope. But then the dragon showed itself, took the king into its palace;(4) and when he had seen all the things provided for offerings, it said to him, “If you are able with your offerings to exceed these, you can destroy the tope, and take it all away. I will not contend with you.” The king, however, knew that such appliances for offerings were not to be had anywhere in the world, and thereupon returned (without carrying out his purpose).
East of Buddha's birthplace, about five yojanas away, lies a kingdom called Rama.(1) The king of this kingdom, having acquired a share of Buddha's relics,(2) returned and built a stupa over them, known as the Rama stupa. Next to it was a pool, which housed a dragon that constantly watched over the stupa, making offerings to it day and night. When King Asoka came into power, he planned to destroy the eight stupas (that housed the relics) and replace them with 84,000 stupas.(3) After he had toppled seven of them, he decided to destroy this stupa next. However, the dragon revealed itself, took the king into its palace;(4) and after showing him all the offerings laid out, it said, “If you can surpass these offerings, you can destroy the stupa and take everything away. I won’t fight you on it.” The king, realizing that such offerings couldn’t be found anywhere else in the world, then turned back without fulfilling his intention.
(Afterwards), the ground all about became overgrown with vegetation, and there was nobody to sprinkle and sweep (about the tope); but a herd of elephants came regularly, which brought water with their trunks to water the ground, and various kinds of flowers and incense, which they presented at the tope. (Once) there came from one of the kingdoms a devotee(5) to worship at the tope. When he encountered the elephants he was greatly alarmed, and screened himself among the trees; but when he saw them go through with the offerings in the most proper manner, the thought filled him with great sadness—that there should be no monastery here, (the inmates of which) might serve the tope, but the elephants have to do the watering and sweeping. Forthwith he gave up the great prohibitions (by which he was bound),(6) and resumed the status of a Sramanera.(7) With his own hands he cleared away the grass and trees, put the place in good order, and made it pure and clean. By the power of his exhortations, he prevailed on the king of the country to form a residence for monks; and when that was done, he became head of the monastery. At the present day there are monks residing in it. This event is of recent occurrence; but in all the succession from that time till now, there has always been a Sramanera head of the establishment.
Afterwards, the ground around became overgrown with plants, and there was no one to sprinkle and sweep the area around the monument; but a herd of elephants regularly came by, bringing water with their trunks to water the ground, along with various types of flowers and incense that they offered at the monument. Once, a devotee from one of the kingdoms came to worship at the monument. When he saw the elephants, he was really scared and hid among the trees; but when he watched them make their offerings in the proper way, he felt a deep sadness—that there was no monastery here where monks could serve the monument, and instead, the elephants had to do the watering and cleaning. Immediately, he gave up the strict vows he was following and took on the status of a novice monk. He cleared away the grass and trees with his own hands, tidied up the place, and made it pure and clean. Through the power of his encouragement, he convinced the king of the country to establish a residence for monks; and once that was done, he became the head of the monastery. Nowadays, there are monks living there. This event happened recently; but ever since then, there has always been a novice monk as the head of the establishment.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Rama or Ramagrama, between Kapilavastu and Kusanagara.
(1) Rama or Ramagrama, located between Kapilavastu and Kusanagara.
(2) See the account of the eightfold division of the relics of Buddha’s body in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 133-136.
(2) Check out the description of the eightfold division of Buddha's relics in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 133-136.
(3) The bones of the human body are supposed to consist of 84,000 atoms, and hence the legend of Asoka’s wish to build 84,000 topes, one over each atom of Sâkyamuni’s skeleton.
(3) The bones of the human body are believed to contain 84,000 atoms, which is why there's a legend about Asoka wanting to build 84,000 stupas, one for each atom of Sâkyamuni’s skeleton.
(4) Fâ-Hien, it appears to me, intended his readers to understand that the naga-guardian had a palace of his own, inside or underneath the pool or tank.
(4) It seems to me that Fâ-Hien wanted his readers to know that the naga-guardian had his own palace, either inside or beneath the pool or tank.
(5) It stands out on the narrative as a whole that we have not here “some pilgrims,” but one devotee.
(5) It stands out in the overall story that we don't have “some pilgrims,” but one devoted individual.
(6) What the “great prohibitions” which the devotee now gave up were we cannot tell. Being what he was, a monk of more than ordinary ascetical habits, he may have undertaken peculiar and difficult vows.
(6) We can't say exactly what the “great prohibitions” were that the devotee has now given up. Given who he was, a monk with particularly strict ascetic practices, he may have taken on some unusual and challenging vows.
(7) The Sramanera, or in Chinese Shamei. See chap. xvi, note 19.
(7) The Sramanera, or in Chinese Shamei. See chap. xvi, note 19.
CHAPTER XXIV.
WHERE BUDDHA FINALLY RENOUNCED THE WORLD, AND WHERE HE DIED.
East from here four yojanas, there is the place where the heir-apparent sent back Chandaka, with his white horse;(1) and there also a tope was erected.
East from here, four yojanas away, there's the spot where the crown prince sent Chandaka back with his white horse; a monument was also built there.
Four yojanas to the east from this, (the travellers) came to the Charcoal tope,(2) where there is also a monastery.
Four yojanas to the east from here, the travelers reached the Charcoal tope, where there is also a monastery.
Going on twelve yojanas, still to the east, they came to the city of Kusanagara,(3) on the north of which, between two trees,(4) on the bank of the Nairanjana(5) river, is the place where the World-honoured one, with his head to the north, attained to pari-nirvâna (and died). There also are the places where Subhadra,(6) the last (of his converts), attained to Wisdom (and became an Arhat); where in his coffin of gold they made offerings to the World-honoured one for seven days,(7) where the Vajrapani laid aside his golden club,(8) and where the eight kings(9) divided the relics (of the burnt body):—at all these places were built topes and monasteries, all of which are now existing.
Traveling nearly twelve yojanas further east, they arrived at the city of Kusanagara, where to the north, between two trees on the bank of the Nairanjana river, is the spot where the World-Honored One lay with his head to the north and reached pari-nirvana (and passed away). It’s also the place where Subhadra, the last of his followers, attained Wisdom (and became an Arhat); where offerings were made to the World-Honored One for seven days in his golden coffin; where Vajrapani set aside his golden club; and where the eight kings divided the relics of the cremated body. Topes and monasteries were built at all these sites, and they still exist today.
In the city the inhabitants are few and far between, comprising only the families belonging to the (different) societies of monks.
In the city, the residents are sparse, consisting solely of families from various monk societies.
Going from this to the south-east for twelve yojanas, they came to the place where the Lichchhavis(10) wished to follow Buddha to (the place of) his pari-nirvâna, and where, when he would not listen to them and they kept cleaving to him, unwilling to go away, he made to appear a large and deep ditch which they could not cross over, and gave them his alms-bowl, as a pledge of his regard, (thus) sending them back to their families. There a stone pillar was erected with an account of this event engraved upon it.
Going southeast for twelve yojanas, they arrived at the spot where the Lichchhavis wanted to follow Buddha to his final nirvana. When he refused to listen to them and they clung to him, unwilling to leave, he made a large and deep ditch appear that they couldn't cross. He gave them his alms-bowl as a sign of his affection, effectively sending them back to their families. There, a stone pillar was erected with an inscription detailing this event.
NOTES
Notes
(1) This was on the night when Sâkyamuni finally left his palace and family to fulfil the course to which he felt that he was called. Chandaka, in Pâli Channa, was the prince’s charioteer, and in sympathy with him. So also was the white horse Kanthaka (Kanthakanam Asvaraja), which neighed his delight till the devas heard him. See M. B., pp. 158-161, and Davids’ Manual, pp. 32, 33. According to “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 87, the noble horse never returned to the city, but died of grief at being left by his master, to be reborn immediately in the Trayastrimsas heaven as the deva Kanthaka!
(1) This was the night when Sâkyamuni finally left his palace and family to follow the path he believed he was meant to take. Chandaka, also known as Channa in Pâli, was the prince’s charioteer and fully supported him. So did the white horse Kanthaka (Kanthakanam Asvaraja), who neighed with joy until the deities heard him. See M. B., pp. 158-161, and Davids’ Manual, pp. 32, 33. According to “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 87, the noble horse never returned to the city but died of sorrow after being left by his master, only to be reborn immediately in the Trayastrimsas heaven as the deva Kanthaka!
(2) Beal and Giles call this the “Ashes” tope. I also would have preferred to call it so; but the Chinese character is {.}, not {.}. Rémusat has “la tour des charbons.” It was over the place of Buddha’s cremation.
(2) Beal and Giles refer to this as the “Ashes” tope. I would have liked to call it that too; but the Chinese character is {.}, not {.}. Rémusat has “the tower of coals.” It was located over the site of Buddha’s cremation.
(3) In Pâli Kusinara. It got its name from the Kusa grass (the poa cynosuroides); and its ruins are still extant, near Kusiah, 180 N.W. from Patna; “about,” says Davids, “120 miles N.N.E. of Benares, and 80 miles due east of Kapilavastu.”
(3) In Pâli Kusinara. It got its name from the Kusa grass (the poa cynosuroides); and its ruins still exist, near Kusiah, 180 NW of Patna; “about,” says Davids, “120 miles NNE of Benares, and 80 miles directly east of Kapilavastu.”
(4) The Sala tree, the Shorea robusta, which yields the famous teak wood.
(4) The Sala tree, the Shorea robusta, produces the well-known teak wood.
(5) Confounded, according to Eitel, even by Hsuan-chwang, with the Hiranyavati, which flows past the city on the south.
(5) Confused, according to Eitel, even by Hsuan-chwang, with the Hiranyavati, which flows past the city on the south.
(6) A Brahman of Benares, said to have been 120 years old, who came to learn from Buddha the very night he died. Ananda would have repulsed him; but Buddha ordered him to be introduced; and then putting aside the ingenious but unimportant question which he propounded, preached to him the Law. The Brahman was converted and attained at once to Arhatship. Eitel says that he attained to nirvâna a few moments before Sâkyamuni; but see the full account of him and his conversion in “Buddhist Suttas,” p. 103-110.
(6) A Brahmin from Benares, said to be 120 years old, came to learn from Buddha on the very night he died. Ananda would have turned him away, but Buddha instructed him to be let in. Then, setting aside the clever but unimportant question he asked, Buddha taught him the Law. The Brahmin was converted and immediately achieved Arhatship. Eitel mentions that he reached nirvana just moments before Sakyamuni, but you can find the full story of him and his conversion in “Buddhist Suttas,” p. 103-110.
(7) Thus treating the dead Buddha as if he had been a Chakravartti king. Hardy’s M. B., p. 347, says:—“For the place of cremation, the princes (of Kusinara) offered their own coronation-hall, which was decorated with the utmost magnificence, and the body was deposited in a golden sarcophagus.” See the account of a cremation which Fâ-Hien witnessed in Ceylon, chap. xxxix.
(7) So, they treated the deceased Buddha as if he were a universal monarch. Hardy’s M. B., p. 347, states:—“For the cremation site, the princes of Kusinara offered their own coronation hall, which was decorated with great splendor, and the body was placed in a golden sarcophagus.” See the account of a cremation that Fâ-Hien observed in Ceylon, chap. xxxix.
(8) The name Vajrapani is explained as “he who holds in his hand the diamond club (or pestle=sceptre),” which is one of the many names of Indra or Sakra. He therefore, that great protector of Buddhism, would seem to be intended here; but the difficulty with me is that neither in Hardy nor Rockhill, nor any other writer, have I met with any manifestation of himself made by Indra on this occasion. The princes of Kusanagara were called mallas, “strong or mighty heroes;” so also were those of Pava and Vaisali; and a question arises whether the language may not refer to some story which Fâ-Hien had heard,—something which they did on this great occasion. Vajrapani is also explained as meaning “the diamond mighty hero;” but the epithet of “diamond” is not so applicable to them as to Indra. The clause may hereafter obtain more elucidation.
(8) The name Vajrapani means “he who holds the diamond club (or pestle=sceptre),” which is one of the many names for Indra or Sakra. Therefore, that great protector of Buddhism seems to be referenced here; however, I have not found any instance of Indra showing himself on this occasion in the works of Hardy, Rockhill, or any other author. The princes of Kusanagara were called mallas, meaning “strong or mighty heroes;” the same was true for those in Pava and Vaisali. This raises the question of whether the language might refer to some story that Fâ-Hien heard—something they did during this significant event. Vajrapani is also interpreted as “the diamond mighty hero;” however, the term “diamond” applies more fittingly to Indra than to them. This point may become clearer later.
(9) Of Kusanagara, Pava, Vaisali, and other kingdoms. Kings, princes, brahmans,—each wanted the whole relic; but they agreed to an eightfold division at the suggestion of the brahman Drona.
(9) About Kusanagara, Pava, Vaisali, and other kingdoms. Kings, princes, and brahmins—each wanted the entire relic; however, they agreed to divide it into eight parts at the suggestion of the brahmin Drona.
(10) These “strong heroes” were the chiefs of Vaisali, a kingdom and city, with an oligarchical constitution. They embraced Buddhism early, and were noted for their peculiar attachment to Buddha. The second synod was held at Vaisali, as related in the next chapter. The ruins of the city still exist at Bassahar, north of Patna, the same, I suppose, as Besarh, twenty miles north of Hajipur. See Beal’s Revised Version, p. lii.
(10) These “strong heroes” were the leaders of Vaisali, a kingdom and city with an oligarchic system. They adopted Buddhism early on and were known for their special connection to Buddha. The second synod took place in Vaisali, as mentioned in the next chapter. The ruins of the city still remain at Bassahar, north of Patna, which I assume is the same as Besarh, twenty miles north of Hajipur. See Beal’s Revised Version, p. lii.
CHAPTER XXV.
VAISALI. THE TOPE CALLED “WEAPONS LAID DOWN.” THE COUNCIL OF
VAISALI.
East from this city ten yojanas, (the travellers) came to the kingdom of Vaisali. North of the city so named is a large forest, having in it the double-galleried vihâra(1) where Buddha dwelt, and the tope over half the body of Ananda.(2) Inside the city the woman Ambapali(3) built a vihâra in honour of Buddha, which is now standing as it was at first. Three le south of the city, on the west of the road, (is the) garden (which) the same Ambapali presented to Buddha, in which he might reside. When Buddha was about to attain to his pari-nirvâna, as he was quitting the city by the west gate, he turned round, and, beholding the city on his right, said to them, “Here I have taken my last walk.”(4) Men subsequently built a tope at this spot.
East of this city, about ten yojanas away, the travelers arrived at the kingdom of Vaisali. To the north of this city is a large forest that contains the double-galleried vihara where Buddha lived and the tope holding half of Ananda's body. Inside the city, the woman Ambapali built a vihara in honor of Buddha, which still stands as it originally did. Three leagues south of the city, on the west side of the road, is the garden that Ambapali gave to Buddha, where he could stay. When Buddha was about to reach his pari-nirvana and was leaving the city through the west gate, he turned around, saw the city on his right, and said, “Here I have taken my last walk.” Later, people built a tope at this location.
Three le north-west of the city there is a tope called, “Bows and weapons laid down.” The reason why it got that name was this:—The inferior wife of a king, whose country lay along the river Ganges, brought forth from her womb a ball of flesh. The superior wife, jealous of the other, said, “You have brought forth a thing of evil omen,” and immediately it was put into a box of wood and thrown into the river. Farther down the stream another king was walking and looking about, when he saw the wooden box (floating) in the water. (He had it brought to him), opened it, and found a thousand little boys, upright and complete, and each one different from the others. He took them and had them brought up. They grew tall and large, and very daring, and strong, crushing all opposition in every expedition which they undertook. By and by they attacked the kingdom of their real father, who became in consequence greatly distressed and sad. His inferior wife asked what it was that made him so, and he replied, “That king has a thousand sons, daring and strong beyond compare, and he wishes with them to attack my kingdom; this is what makes me sad.” The wife said, “You need not be sad and sorrowful. Only make a high gallery on the wall of the city on the east; and when the thieves come, I shall be able to make them retire.” The king did as she said; and when the enemies came, she said to them from the tower, “You are my sons; why are you acting so unnaturally and rebelliously?” They replied, “If you do not believe me,” she said, “look, all of you, towards me, and open your mouths.” She then pressed her breasts with her two hands, and each sent forth 500 jets of milk, which fell into the mouths of the thousand sons. The thieves (thus) knew that she was their mother, and laid down their bows and weapons.(5) The two kings, the fathers, thereupon fell into reflection, and both got to be Pratyeka Buddhas.(6) The tope of the two Pratyeka Buddhas is still existing.
Three leagues northwest of the city, there's a mound called “Bows and Weapons Laid Down.” It got that name because of a story: the lesser wife of a king from a kingdom along the Ganges gave birth to a fleshy ball. The main wife, jealous of her, said, “You’ve brought something cursed,” so they put it in a wooden box and tossed it into the river. Further down, another king was walking along the riverbank when he spotted the floating box. He had it brought to him, opened it, and found a thousand little boys, all standing upright and unique. He took them in and raised them. They grew tall, strong, and fearless, defeating all challenges they faced. Eventually, they launched an attack on the kingdom of their true father, which made him very troubled. His lesser wife asked him what was wrong, and he told her, “That king has a thousand sons, unmatched in bravery and strength, and he plans to invade my kingdom; that’s why I’m upset.” She said, “Don’t be sad. Just build a high platform on the east wall of the city; when the attackers come, I’ll make them retreat.” The king followed her advice, and when the enemy arrived, she called from the tower, “You are my sons; why act so ungratefully against me?” They said, “If you don’t believe us,” she said, “look at me and open your mouths.” She then squeezed her breasts, and streams of milk poured into the mouths of the thousand sons. Recognizing her as their mother, they laid down their bows and weapons. The two kings, their fathers, then reflected deeply and both became Pratyeka Buddhas. The mound of the two Pratyeka Buddhas still exists today.
In a subsequent age, when the World-honoured one had attained to perfect Wisdom (and become Buddha), he said to is disciples, “This is the place where I in a former age laid down my bow and weapons.”(7) It was thus that subsequently men got to know (the fact), and raised the tope on this spot, which in this way received its name. The thousand little boys were the thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa.(8)
In a later time, when the World-Honored One had reached perfect Wisdom (and become Buddha), he said to his disciples, “This is the place where I, in a past life, laid down my bow and weapons.”(7) That’s how people came to know about it and built a stupa at this location, giving it its name. The thousand little boys were the thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa.(8)
It was by the side of the “Weapons-laid-down” tope that Buddha, having given up the idea of living longer, said to Ananda, “In three months from this I will attain to pavi-nirvâna;” and king Mara(9) had so fascinated and stupefied Ananda, that he was not able to ask Buddha to remain longer in this world.
It was by the "Weapons-laid-down" grove that Buddha, having decided to stop living, said to Ananda, “In three months from now, I will reach pavi-nirvana;” and King Mara had so captivated and stunned Ananda that he couldn’t ask Buddha to stay longer in this world.
Three or four le east from this place there is a tope (commemorating the following occurrence):—A hundred years after the pari-nirvâna of Buddha, some Bhikshus of Vaisali went wrong in the matter of the disciplinary rules in ten particulars, and appealed for their justification to what they said were the words of Buddha. Hereupon the Arhats and Bhikshus observant of the rules, to the number in all of 700 monks, examined afresh and collated the collection of disciplinary books.(10) Subsequently men built at this place the tope (in question), which is still existing.
Three or four miles east of here, there's a stupa (commemorating the following event): A hundred years after Buddha's passing, some monks from Vaisali misinterpreted the disciplinary rules in ten ways and tried to justify themselves by claiming they were following Buddha's words. In response, the respected monks and practicing monks, totaling 700, reexamined and compiled the collection of disciplinary texts. Later, people built the stupa at this location, which still stands today.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) It is difficult to tell what was the peculiar form of this vihâra from which it gets its name; something about the construction of its door, or cupboards, or galleries.
(1) It's hard to say what the unique design of this vihâra was that gave it its name; maybe it had something to do with the way its door, cupboards, or galleries were built.
(2) See the explanation of this in the next chapter.
(2) Check out the explanation of this in the next chapter.
(3) Ambapali, Amrapali, or Amradarika, “the guardian of the Amra (probably the mango) tree,” is famous in Buddhist annals. See the account of her in M. B., pp. 456-8. She was a courtesan. She had been in many narakas or hells, was 100,000 times a female beggar, and 10,000 times a prostitute; but maintaining perfect continence during the period of Kasyapa Buddha, Sâkyamuni’s predecessor, she had been born a devi, and finally appeared in earth under an Amra tree in Vaisali. There again she fell into her old ways, and had a son by king Bimbisara; but she was won over by Buddha to virtue and chastity, renounced the world, and attained to the state of an Arhat. See the earliest account of Ambapali’s presentation of the garden in “Buddhist Suttas,” pp. 30-33, and the note there from Bishop Bigandet on pp. 33, 34.
(3) Ambapali, Amrapali, or Amradarika, “the guardian of the Amra (likely the mango) tree,” is well-known in Buddhist history. Check out her story in M. B., pp. 456-8. She was a courtesan. She had experienced many narakas or hells, lived as a female beggar a hundred thousand times, and was a prostitute ten thousand times; however, by maintaining perfect self-control during the time of Kasyapa Buddha, Sâkyamuni’s predecessor, she was reborn as a devi and eventually appeared on earth beneath an Amra tree in Vaisali. There, she reverted to her old habits and had a son with King Bimbisara; but Buddha inspired her towards virtue and chastity, leading her to renounce worldly life and achieve the state of an Arhat. For the earliest account of Ambapali presenting the garden, refer to “Buddhist Suttas,” pp. 30-33, and see the note from Bishop Bigandet on pp. 33, 34.
(4) Beal gives, “In this place I have performed the last religious act of my earthly career;” Giles, “This is the last place I shall visit;” Rémusat, “C’est un lieu ou je reviendrai bien longtemps apres ceci.” Perhaps the “walk” to which Buddha referred had been for meditation.
(4) Beal states, “In this spot, I’ve carried out the final religious act of my life;” Giles says, “This is the last place I will go;” Rémusat remarks, “This is a place where I will return a long time after this.” Maybe the “walk” Buddha mentioned was meant for meditation.
(5) See the account of this legend in the note in M. B., pp. 235, 236, different, but not less absurd. The first part of Fâ-Hien’s narrative will have sent the thoughts of some of my readers to the exposure of the infant Moses, as related in Exodus.
(5) See the account of this legend in the note in M. B., pp. 235, 236, different, but not less absurd. The first part of Fâ-Hien’s narrative will have reminded some of my readers of the story of the infant Moses being placed in the basket, as described in Exodus.
(6) See chap. xiii, note 14.
(6) See chap. 13, note 14.
(7) Thus Sâkyamuni had been one of the thousand little boys who floated in the box in the Ganges. How long back the former age was we cannot tell. I suppose the tope of the two fathers who became Pratyeka Buddhas had been built like the one commemorating the laying down of weapons after Buddha had told his disciples of the strange events in the past.
(7) So, Sâkyamuni was one of the thousand little boys who drifted in the box on the Ganges. We can’t say how long ago that was. I imagine the stupa of the two fathers who became Pratyeka Buddhas was built like the one that marks the end of fighting after Buddha shared the strange events of the past with his disciples.
(8) Bhadra-kalpa, “the Kalpa of worthies or sages.” “This,” says Eitel, p. 22, “is a designation for a Kalpa of stability, so called because 1000 Buddhas appear in the course of it. Our present period is a Bhadra-kalpa, and four Buddhas have already appeared. It is to last 236 million years, but over 151 millions have already elapsed.”
(8) Bhadra-kalpa, “the Era of Worthies or Sages.” “This,” says Eitel, p. 22, “is a term for an era of stability, named because 1000 Buddhas appear during it. Our current period is a Bhadra-kalpa, and four Buddhas have already appeared. It will last 236 million years, but over 151 million years have already passed.”
(9) “The king of demons.” The name Mara is explained by “the murderer,” “the destroyer of virtue,” and similar appellations. “He is,” says Eitel, “the personification of lust, the god of love, sin, and death, the arch-enemy of goodness, residing in the heaven Paranirmita Vasavartin on the top of the Kamadhatu. He assumes different forms, especially monstrous ones, to tempt or frighten the saints, or sends his daughters, or inspires wicked men like Devadatta or the Nirgranthas to do his work. He is often represented with 100 arms, and riding on an elephant.” The oldest form of the legend in this paragraph is in “Buddhist Suttas,” Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, pp. 41-55, where Buddha says that, if Ananda had asked him thrice, he would have postponed his death.
(9) “The king of demons.” The name Mara is described as “the murderer,” “the destroyer of virtue,” and similar titles. “He is,” says Eitel, “the embodiment of lust, the god of love, sin, and death, the main adversary of goodness, residing in the heaven Paranirmita Vasavartin at the top of the Kamadhatu. He takes on various forms, especially monstrous ones, to tempt or scare the saints, or sends his daughters, or inspires wicked individuals like Devadatta or the Nirgranthas to carry out his wishes. He is often depicted with 100 arms and riding an elephant.” The earliest version of the legend in this paragraph can be found in “Buddhist Suttas,” Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, pp. 41-55, where Buddha mentions that if Ananda had asked him three times, he would have delayed his death.
(10) Or the Vinaya-pitaka. The meeting referred to was an important one, and is
generally spoken of as the second Great Council of the Buddhist Church. See, on
the formation of the Buddhist Canon, Hardy’s E. M., chap. xviii, and the
last chapter of Davids’ Manual, on the History of the Order. The first
Council was that held at Rajagriha, shortly after Buddha’s death, under
the presidency of Kasyapa;—say about B.C. 410. The second was that spoken
of here;—say about B.C. 300. In Davids’ Manual (p. 216) we find the
ten points of discipline, in which the heretics (I can use that term here)
claimed at least indulgence. Two meetings were held to consider and discuss
them. At the former the orthodox party barely succeeded in carrying their
condemnation of the laxer monks; and a second and larger meeting, of which
Fâ-Hien speaks, was held in consequence, and a more emphatic condemnation
passed. At the same time all the books and subjects of discipline seem to have
undergone a careful revision.
The Corean text is clearer than the Chinese as to those who composed the
Council,—the Arhats and orthodox monks. The leader among them was a
Yasas, or Yasada, or Yedsaputtra, who had been a disciple of Ananda, and must
therefore have been a very old man.
(10) Or the Vinaya-pitaka. The meeting mentioned was significant and is usually referred to as the second Great Council of the Buddhist Church. For information on the formation of the Buddhist Canon, see Hardy’s E. M., chap. xviii, and the last chapter of Davids’ Manual on the History of the Order. The first Council took place at Rajagriha, shortly after Buddha’s death, led by Kasyapa—around 410 B.C. The second Council mentioned here happened around 300 B.C. In Davids’ Manual (p. 216), we find the ten points of discipline, where the heretics (I can use that term here) sought at least some leniency. Two meetings were held to consider and discuss them. In the first, the orthodox group barely managed to condemn the less strict monks; a second and larger meeting, which Fâ-Hien references, was held as a result, and a stronger condemnation was issued. During this time, all the texts and subjects of discipline seem to have undergone a thorough revision.
The Corean text is clearer than the Chinese about who composed the Council—the Arhats and orthodox monks. The leader among them was a Yasas, or Yasada, or Yedsaputtra, who had been a disciple of Ananda and must have been quite old.
CHAPTER XXVI.
REMARKABLE DEATH OF ANANDA.
Four yojanas on from this place to the east brought the travellers to the confluence of the five rivers.(1) When Ananda was going from Magadha(2) to Vaisali, wishing his pari-nirvâna to take place (there), the devas informed king Ajatasatru(3) of it, and the king immediately pursued him, in his own grand carriage, with a body of soldiers, and had reached the river. (On the other hand), the Lichchhavis of Vaisali had heard that Ananda was coming (to their city), and they on their part came to meet him. (In this way), they all arrived together at the river, and Ananda considered that, if he went forward, king Ajatasatru would be very angry, while, if he went back, the Lichchhavis would resent his conduct. He thereupon in the very middle of the river burnt his body in a fiery ecstasy of Samadhi,(4) and his pari-nirvâna was attained. He divided his body (also) into two, (leaving) the half of it on each bank; so that each of the two kings got one half as a (sacred) relic, and took it back (to his own capital), and there raised a tope over it.
Four yojanas from this place to the east brought the travelers to the meeting point of the five rivers. When Ananda was traveling from Magadha to Vaisali, hoping for his pari-nirvana to happen there, the devas informed King Ajatasatru about it, and the king immediately set off after him in his grand carriage with a group of soldiers, reaching the river. Meanwhile, the Lichchhavis of Vaisali had heard that Ananda was coming to their city, and they came out to greet him. In this way, they all arrived together at the river, and Ananda realized that if he went forward, King Ajatasatru would be very angry, while if he turned back, the Lichchhavis would be upset with him. So, in the middle of the river, he burned his body in a fiery ecstasy of Samadhi, achieving his pari-nirvana. He split his body into two, leaving half of it on each bank, so that each king received one half as a sacred relic and took it back to his own capital, where they erected a stupa over it.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) This spot does not appear to have been identified. It could not be far from Patna.
(1) This location doesn't seem to have been identified. It can't be too far from Patna.
(2) Magadha was for some time the headquarters of Buddhism; the holy land, covered with vihâras; a fact perpetuated, as has been observed in a previous note, in the name of the present Behar, the southern portion of which corresponds to the ancient kingdom of Magadha.
(2) Magadha was for a while the center of Buddhism; the holy land, filled with monasteries; a fact noted, as mentioned in a previous note, in the name of the current Behar, the southern part of which corresponds to the ancient kingdom of Magadha.
(3) In Singhalese, Ajasat. See the account of his conversion in M. B., pp. 321-326. He was the son of king Bimbisara, who was one of the first royal converts to Buddhism. Ajasat murdered his father, or at least wrought his death; and was at first opposed to Sâkyamuni, and a favourer of Devadatta. When converted, he became famous for his liberality in almsgiving.
(3) In Singhalese, Ajasat. See the account of his conversion in M. B., pp. 321-326. He was the son of King Bimbisara, one of the first royal converts to Buddhism. Ajasat killed his father, or at least caused his death; and was initially against Sâkyamuni, supporting Devadatta instead. After his conversion, he became known for his generosity in giving alms.
(4) Eitel has a long article (pp. 114, 115) on the meaning of Samadhi, which is one of the seven sections of wisdom (bodhyanga). Hardy defines it as meaning “perfect tranquillity;” Turnour, as “meditative abstraction;” Burnouf, as “self-control;” and Edkins, as “ecstatic reverie.” “Samadhi,” says Eitel, “signifies the highest pitch of abstract, ecstatic meditation; a state of absolute indifference to all influences from within or without; a state of torpor of both the material and spiritual forces of vitality; a sort of terrestrial nirvâna, consistently culminating in total destruction of life.” He then quotes apparently the language of the text, “He consumed his body by Agni (the fire of) Samadhi,” and says it is “a common expression for the effects of such ecstatic, ultra-mystic self-annihilation.” All this is simply “a darkening of counsel by words without knowledge.” Some facts concerning the death of Ananda are hidden beneath the darkness of the phraseology, which it is impossible for us to ascertain. By or in Samadhi he burns his body in the very middle of the river, and then he divides the relic of the burnt body into two parts (for so evidently Fâ-Hien intended his narration to be taken), and leaves one half on each bank. The account of Ananda’s death in Nien-ch’ang’s “History of Buddha and the Patriarchs” is much more extravagant. Crowds of men and devas are brought together to witness it. The body is divided into four parts. One is conveyed to the Tushita heaven; a second, to the palace of a certain Naga king; a third is given to Ajatasatru; and the fourth to the Lichchhavis. What it all really means I cannot tell.
(4) Eitel has a lengthy article (pp. 114, 115) discussing the meaning of Samadhi, which is one of the seven sections of wisdom (bodhyanga). Hardy describes it as “perfect tranquility;” Turnour defines it as “meditative abstraction;” Burnouf calls it “self-control;” and Edkins terms it “ecstatic reverie.” Eitel states, “Samadhi signifies the highest level of abstract, ecstatic meditation; a state of complete indifference to all influences from within or outside; a state of inactivity for both physical and spiritual forces of life; a kind of earthly nirvâna, consistently leading to total destruction of life.” He then quotes what seems to be the language of the text, “He consumed his body by Agni (the fire of) Samadhi,” and remarks that it is “a common expression for the effects of such ecstatic, ultra-mystic self-annihilation.” All of this is simply “a confusing use of words without true understanding.” Some details about Ananda’s death are hidden beneath the obscurity of the phrasing, which we cannot fully uncover. In Samadhi, he burns his body in the middle of the river, and then he divides the relics of the burned body into two parts (as Fâ-Hien clearly intended his narration to be interpreted), leaving one part on each bank. The description of Ananda’s death in Nien-ch’ang’s “History of Buddha and the Patriarchs” is much more extravagant. Crowds of people and devas gather to witness it. The body is split into four parts. One portion is taken to Tushita heaven; another goes to the palace of a certain Naga king; a third is given to Ajatasatru; and the fourth to the Lichchhavis. What it all actually means, I cannot say.
CHAPTER XXVII.
PATALIPUTTRA OR PATNA, IN MAGADHA. KING ASOKA’S SPIRIT-BUILT PALACE AND
HALLS. THE BUDDHIST BRAHMAN, RADHA-SAMI. DISPENSARIES AND HOSPITALS.
Having crossed the river, and descended south for a yojana, (the travellers) came to the town of Pataliputtra,(1) in the kingdom of Magadha, the city where king Asoka(2) ruled. The royal palace and halls in the midst of the city, which exist now as of old, were all made by spirits which he employed, and which piled up the stones, reared the walls and gates, and executed the elegant carving and inlaid sculpture-work,—in a way which no human hands of this world could accomplish.
After crossing the river and traveling south for a yojana, the travelers arrived in the town of Pataliputtra, in the kingdom of Magadha, where King Asoka ruled. The royal palace and halls in the center of the city, which still exist today just as they did before, were all built by spirits that he employed. These spirits gathered the stones, raised the walls and gates, and created the intricate carvings and inlaid sculptures in a way that no human hands in this world could achieve.
King Asoka had a younger brother who had attained to be an Arhat, and resided on Gridhra-kuta(3) hill, finding his delight in solitude and quiet. The king, who sincerely reverenced him, wished and begged him (to come and live) in his family, where he could supply all his wants. The other, however, through his delight in the stillness of the mountain, was unwilling to accept the invitation, on which the king said to him, “Only accept my invitation, and I will make a hill for you inside the city.” Accordingly, he provided the materials of a feast, called to him the spirits, and announced to them, “To-morrow you will all receive my invitation; but as there are no mats for you to sit on, let each one bring (his own seat).” Next day the spirits came, each one bringing with him a great rock, (like) a wall, four or five paces square, (for a seat). When their sitting was over, the king made them form a hill with the large stones piled on one another, and also at the foot of the hill, with five large square stones, to make an apartment, which might be more than thirty cubits long, twenty cubits wide, and more than ten cubits high.
King Asoka had a younger brother who had become an Arhat and lived on Gridhra-kuta(3) hill, enjoying solitude and peace. The king, who deeply respected him, wanted and asked him to come live with his family, where he could provide for all his needs. However, the brother, cherishing the tranquility of the mountain, was reluctant to accept the invitation. In response, the king said to him, “Just accept my invitation, and I’ll create a hill for you right in the city.” So, he organized a feast, called on the spirits, and announced to them, “Tomorrow, you’ll all receive my invitation; but since there are no mats for you to sit on, each of you should bring your own seat.” The next day, the spirits came, each bringing a large rock, about four or five paces square, as their seat. After they finished sitting, the king had them arrange the big stones on top of each other to form a hill, and at the base of the hill, with five large square stones, he created a space that was over thirty cubits long, twenty cubits wide, and more than ten cubits high.
In this city there had resided a great Brahman,(4) named Radha-sami,(5) a professor of the mahayana, of clear discernment and much wisdom, who understood everything, living by himself in spotless purity. The king of the country honoured and reverenced him, and served him as his teacher. If he went to inquire for and greet him, the king did not presume to sit down alongside of him; and if, in his love and reverence, he took hold of his hand, as soon as he let it go, the Brahman made haste to pour water on it and wash it. He might be more than fifty years old, and all the kingdom looked up to him. By means of this one man, the Law of Buddha was widely made known, and the followers of other doctrines did not find it in their power to persecute the body of monks in any way.
In this city, there lived a great Brahman named Radha-sami, a professor of the Mahayana, known for his clear insight and vast wisdom. He was knowledgeable about everything and lived in complete purity. The king of the region honored and respected him, serving as his student. When the king came to visit and greet him, he never dared to sit beside him. If the king, in his affection and respect, took Radha-sami's hand, as soon as he let go, the Brahman would quickly pour water over it to wash it. He was likely over fifty years old, and the entire kingdom looked up to him. Through this one man, the Law of Buddha became widely known, and followers of other beliefs were unable to persecute the monastic community in any way.
By the side of the tope of Asoka, there has been made a mahayana monastery, very grand and beautiful; there is also a hinayana one; the two together containing six or seven hundred monks. The rules of demeanour and the scholastic arrangements(6) in them are worthy of observation.
By the side of the Asoka stupa, a large and beautiful Mahayana monastery has been built; there is also a Hinayana one. Together, they accommodate around six or seven hundred monks. The conduct rules and academic setup in both are noteworthy.
Shamans of the highest virtue from all quarters, and students, inquirers wishing to find out truth and the grounds of it, all resort to these monasteries. There also resides in this monastery a Brahman teacher, whose name also is Manjusri,(7) whom the Shamans of greatest virtue in the kingdom, and the mahayana Bhikshus honour and look up to.
Shamans of the highest virtue from all over, along with students and seekers wanting to uncover the truth and its foundation, all come to these monasteries. In this monastery, there is also a Brahman teacher named Manjusri,(7) whom the most virtuous shamans in the kingdom and the Mahayana monks respect and admire.
The cities and towns of this country are the greatest of all in the Middle Kingdom. The inhabitants are rich and prosperous, and vie with one another in the practice of benevolence and righteousness. Every year on the eighth day of the second month they celebrate a procession of images. They make a four-wheeled car, and on it erect a structure of four storeys by means of bamboos tied together. This is supported by a king-post, with poles and lances slanting from it, and is rather more than twenty cubits high, having the shape of a tope. White and silk-like cloth of hair(8) is wrapped all round it, which is then painted in various colours. They make figures of devas, with gold, silver, and lapis lazuli grandly blended and having silken streamers and canopies hung out over them. On the four sides are niches, with a Buddha seated in each, and a Bodhisattva standing in attendance on him. There may be twenty cars, all grand and imposing, but each one different from the others. On the day mentioned, the monks and laity within the borders all come together; they have singers and skilful musicians; they pay their devotion with flowers and incense. The Brahmans come and invite the Buddhas to enter the city. These do so in order, and remain two nights in it. All through the night they keep lamps burning, have skilful music, and present offerings. This is the practice in all the other kingdoms as well. The Heads of the Vaisya families in them establish in the cities houses for dispensing charity and medicines. All the poor and destitute in the country, orphans, widowers, and childless men, maimed people and cripples, and all who are diseased, go to those houses, and are provided with every kind of help, and doctors examine their diseases. They get the food and medicines which their cases require, and are made to feel at ease; and when they are better, they go away of themselves.
The cities and towns of this country are the best in the Middle Kingdom. The people are wealthy and thriving, competing with each other in kindness and righteousness. Every year on the eighth day of the second month, they celebrate a parade of images. They create a four-wheeled cart and build a four-story structure on it using tied bamboos. This is supported by a king-post, with poles and lances slanting from it, reaching a little over twenty cubits high and shaped like a tope. White, silky cloth is wrapped around it, which is then painted in various colors. They create figures of devas, using a grand mix of gold, silver, and lapis lazuli, adorned with silky streamers and canopies above them. On all four sides, there are niches, each with a seated Buddha and a Bodhisattva standing beside him. There can be up to twenty carts, all impressive and distinct from each other. On the mentioned day, monks and laypeople gather from the surrounding areas; they have singers and talented musicians; they show their devotion with flowers and incense. The Brahmans come to invite the Buddhas to enter the city. They do so in an orderly manner and stay for two nights. Throughout the night, they keep lamps lit, play beautiful music, and offer their gifts. This practice is similar in all the other kingdoms as well. The leaders of the Vaisya families in those regions set up houses in the cities to provide charity and medicines. All the poor and needy in the country, orphans, widowers, childless individuals, disabled people, and those who are ill visit these houses for help. They receive the food and medicines they need and are taken care of; once they feel better, they leave on their own.
When king Asoka destroyed the seven topes, (intending) to make eighty-four thousand,(9) the first which he made was the great tope, more than three le to the south of this city. In front of this there is a footprint of Buddha, where a vihâra has been built. The door of it faces the north, and on the south of it there is a stone pillar, fourteen or fifteen cubits in circumference, and more than thirty cubits high, on which there is an inscription, saying, “Asoka gave the jambudvipa to the general body of all the monks, and then redeemed it from them with money. This he did three times.”(10) North from the tope 300 or 400 paces, king Asoka built the city of Ne-le.(11) In it there is a stone pillar, which also is more than thirty feet high, with a lion on the top of it. On the pillar there is an inscription recording the things which led to the building of Ne-le, with the number of the year, the day, and the month.
When King Asoka destroyed the seven topes, aiming to create eighty-four thousand, the first one he built was the great tope, located more than three le to the south of this city. In front of it, there's a footprint of Buddha, where a vihara has been constructed. The entrance faces north, and to the south of it, there's a stone pillar, fourteen or fifteen cubits around and over thirty cubits tall, with an inscription saying, “Asoka gave the Jambudvipa to all the monks, and then redeemed it from them for money. He did this three times.” North of the tope, 300 or 400 paces away, King Asoka built the city of Ne-le. In this city, there's a stone pillar that is also more than thirty feet high, topped with a lion. The pillar features an inscription detailing the reasons for building Ne-le, including the year, day, and month.
NOTES
Notes
(1) The modern Patna, lat. 25° 28′ N., lon. 85° 15′ E. The Sanskrit name means “The city of flowers.” It is the Indian Florence.
(1) The modern Patna, lat. 25° 28′ N., lon. 85° 15′ E. The Sanskrit name means “The city of flowers.” It is India’s Florence.
(2) See chap. x, note 3. Asoka transferred his court from Rajagriha to Pataliputtra, and there, in the eighteenth year of his reign, he convoked the third Great Synod,—according, at least, to southern Buddhism. It must have been held a few years before B.C. 250; Eitel says in 246.
(2) See chap. x, note 3. Asoka moved his court from Rajagriha to Pataliputtra, and there, in the eighteenth year of his reign, he called together the third Great Synod,—at least according to southern Buddhism. It likely took place a few years before 250 B.C.; Eitel states it was in 246.
(3) “The Vulture-hill;” so called because Mara, according to Buddhist tradition, once assumed the form of a vulture on it to interrupt the meditation of Ananda; or, more probably, because it was a resort of vultures. It was near Rajagriha, the earlier capital of Asoka, so that Fâ-Hien connects a legend of it with his account of Patna. It abounded in caverns, and was famous as a resort of ascetics.
(3) “The Vulture-hill,” named because Mara, according to Buddhist tradition, once took the shape of a vulture there to disturb Ananda's meditation; or more likely, because it was a place where vultures gathered. It was close to Rajagriha, the earlier capital of Asoka, so Fâ-Hien links a legend about it with his description of Patna. It was full of caves and well-known as a retreat for ascetics.
(4) A Brahman by cast, but a Buddhist in faith.
(4) A Brahmin by caste, but a Buddhist in belief.
(5) So, by the help of Julien’s “Methode,” I transliterate the Chinese characters {.} {.} {.} {.}. Beal gives Radhasvami, his Chinese text having a {.} between {.} and {.}. I suppose the name was Radhasvami or Radhasami.
(5) With the help of Julien’s “Method,” I convert the Chinese characters {.} {.} {.} {.}. Beal provides Radhasvami, his Chinese text that has a {.} between {.} and {.}. I think the name was Radhasvami or Radhasami.
(6) {.} {.}, the names of two kinds of schools, often occurring in the Li Ki and Mencius. Why should there not have been schools in those monasteries in India as there were in China? Fâ-Hien himself grew up with other boys in a monastery, and no doubt had to “go to school.” And the next sentence shows us there might be schools for more advanced students as well as for the Sramaneras.
(6) {.} {.}, the names of two types of schools, frequently found in the Li Ki and Mencius. Why wouldn't there have been schools in those monasteries in India like there were in China? Fâ-Hien himself grew up with other boys in a monastery and undoubtedly had to “go to school.” The next sentence suggests that there could be schools for more advanced students in addition to those for the Sramaneras.
(7) See chap. xvi, note 22. It is perhaps with reference to the famous Bodhisattva that the Brahman here is said to be “also” named Manjusri.
(7) See chap. xvi, note 22. It might be in reference to the famous Bodhisattva that the Brahman is referred to as “also” named Manjusri.
(8) ? Cashmere cloth.
Cashmere fabric.
(9) See chap. xxiii, note 3.
(9) See chap. 23, note 3.
(10) We wish that we had more particulars of this great transaction, and that we knew what value in money Asoka set on the whole world. It is to be observed that he gave it to the monks, and did not receive it from them. Their right was from him, and he bought it back. He was the only “Power” that was.
(10) We wish we had more details about this significant event and knew how much value Asoka placed on the entire world. It's important to note that he gave it to the monks and didn't take it from them. Their ownership came from him, and he purchased it back. He was the only "Power" there was.
(11) We know nothing more of Ne-le. It could only have been a small place; an outpost for the defence of Pataliputtra.
(11) We don’t know anything else about Ne-le. It must have been a small place, just a post for the defense of Pataliputtra.
CHAPTER XXVIII.
RAJAGRIHA, NEW AND OLD. LEGENDS AND INCIDENTS CONNECTED WITH IT.
(The travellers) went on from this to the south-east for nine yojanas, and came to a small solitary rocky hill,(1) at the head or end of which(2) was an apartment of stone, facing the south,—the place where Buddha sat, when Sakra, Ruler of Devas, brought the deva-musician, Pancha-(sikha),(3) to give pleasure to him by playing on his lute. Sakra then asked Buddha about forty-two subjects, tracing (the questions) out with his finger one by one on the rock.(4) The prints of his tracing are still there; and here also there is a monastery.
The travelers went southeast for nine yojanas and arrived at a small, isolated rocky hill. At one end of the hill, there was a stone room facing south—the spot where Buddha sat when Sakra, the Ruler of Devas, brought the deva musician, Pancha-(sikha), to entertain him with his lute. Sakra then asked Buddha about forty-two topics, tracing the questions one by one on the rock with his finger. The marks from his tracing are still visible, and there is also a monastery here.
A yojana south-west from this place brought them to the village of Nala,(5) where Sariputtra(6) was born, and to which also he returned, and attained here his pari-nirvâna. Over the spot (where his body was burned) there was built a tope, which is still in existence.
A yojana southwest from here led them to the village of Nala, where Sariputtra was born and where he also returned to achieve his parinirvana. A stupa was built over the spot where his body was cremated, and it still exists today.
Another yojana to the west brought them to New Rajagriha,(7)—the new city which was built by king Ajatasatru. There were two monasteries in it. Three hundred paces outside the west gate, king Ajatasatru, having obtained one portion of the relics of Buddha, built (over them) a tope, high, large, grand, and beautiful. Leaving the city by the south gate, and proceeding south four le, one enters a valley, and comes to a circular space formed by five hills, which stand all round it, and have the appearance of the suburban wall of a city. Here was the old city of king Bimbisara; from east to west about five or six le, and from north to south seven or eight. It was here that Sariputtra and Maudgalyayana first saw Upasena;(8) that the Nirgrantha(9) made a pit of fire and poisoned the rice, and then invited Buddha (to eat with him); that king Ajatasatru made a black elephant intoxicated with liquor, wishing him to injure Buddha;(10) and that at the north-east corner of the city in a (large) curving (space) Jivaka built a vihâra in the garden of Ambapali,(11) and invited Buddha with his 1250 disciples to it, that he might there make his offerings to support them. (These places) are still there as of old, but inside the city all is emptiness and desolation; no man dwells in it.
Another journey to the west brought them to New Rajagriha,(7)—the new city built by King Ajatasatru. There were two monasteries there. Three hundred paces outside the west gate, King Ajatasatru, having received a portion of the Buddha's relics, constructed a large, impressive, and beautiful stupa over them. Leaving the city through the south gate and traveling south for four le, one enters a valley that forms a circular area surrounded by five hills, resembling a suburban wall of a city. This was the old city of King Bimbisara, which stretched about five or six le from east to west and seven or eight from north to south. It was here that Sariputtra and Maudgalyayana first met Upasena;(8) where the Nirgrantha(9) created a fire pit and poisoned rice, and then invited Buddha to dine with him; where King Ajatasatru got a black elephant drunk, hoping it would harm Buddha;(10) and where, at the northeast corner of the city in a (large) curved area, Jivaka built a vihâra in Ambapali's garden,(11) inviting Buddha and his 1250 disciples to receive his offerings to support them. (These places) still exist as they did before, but inside the city, everything is empty and desolate; no one lives there.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Called by Hsuan-chwang Indra-sila-guha, or “The cavern of Indra.” It has been identified with a hill near the village of Giryek, on the bank of the Panchana river, about thirty-six miles from Gaya. The hill terminates in two peaks overhanging the river, and it is the more northern and higher of these which Fâ-Hien had in mind. It bears an oblong terrace covered with the ruins of several buildings, especially of a vihâra.
(1) Referred to by Hsuan-chwang as Indra-sila-guha, or "The Cave of Indra." It's been matched with a hill near the village of Giryek, along the Panchana River, approximately thirty-six miles from Gaya. The hill ends in two peaks that overlook the river, and it's the northern and taller one that Fâ-Hien was thinking of. It has a long terrace that's covered with the remnants of several structures, particularly a vihâra.
(2) This does not mean the top or summit of the hill, but its “headland,” where it ended at the river.
(2) This does not mean the peak or top of the hill, but its "headland," where it met the river.
(3) See the account of this visit of Sakra in M. B., pp. 288-290. It is from Hardy that we are able to complete here the name of the musician, which appears in Fâ-Hien as only Pancha, or “Five.” His harp or lute, we are told, was “twelve miles long.”
(3) See the account of this visit from Sakra in M. B., pp. 288-290. We can find the full name of the musician from Hardy, which is mentioned in Fâ-Hien as only Pancha, or “Five.” We're told his harp or lute was “twelve miles long.”
(4) Hardy (M. B., pp. 288, 289) makes the subjects only thirteen, which are still to be found in one of the Sûtras (“the Dik-Sanga, in the Sakra-prasna Sutra”). Whether it was Sakra who wrote his questions, or Buddha who wrote the answers, depends on the punctuation. It seems better to make Sakra the writer.
(4) Hardy (M. B., pp. 288, 289) lists only thirteen subjects, which are still found in one of the Sûtras (“the Dik-Sanga, in the Sakra-prasna Sutra”). Whether it was Sakra who wrote the questions or Buddha who wrote the answers depends on the punctuation. It seems more appropriate to attribute the writing to Sakra.
(5) Or Nalanda; identified with the present Baragong. A grand monastery was subsequently built at it, famous by the residence for five years of Hsuan-chwang.
(5) Or Nalanda; identified with the current Baragong. A great monastery was later built there, known for being the home of Hsuan-chwang for five years.
(6) See chap. xvi, note 11. There is some doubt as to the statement that Nala was his birthplace.
(6) See chap. xvi, note 11. There is some uncertainty about the claim that Nala was his birthplace.
(7) The city of “Royal Palaces;” “the residence of the Magadha kings from Bimbisara to Asoka, the first metropolis of Buddhism, at the foot of the Gridhrakuta mountains. Here the first synod assembled within a year after Sâkyamuni’s death. Its ruins are still extant at the village of Rajghir, sixteen miles S.W. of Behar, and form an object of pilgrimage to the Jains (E. H., p. 100).” It is called New Rajagriha to distinguish it from Kusagarapura, a few miles from it, the old residence of the kings. Eitel says it was built by Bimbisara, while Fâ-Hien ascribes it to Ajatasatru. I suppose the son finished what the father had begun.
(7) The city of “Royal Palaces;” “the home of the Magadha kings from Bimbisara to Asoka, the first major city of Buddhism, at the base of the Gridhrakuta mountains. This is where the first council met within a year after Sakyamuni’s death. Its ruins still exist at the village of Rajghir, sixteen miles southwest of Behar, and are a pilgrimage site for the Jains (E. H., p. 100).” It’s referred to as New Rajagriha to differentiate it from Kusagarapura, a few miles away, the former home of the kings. Eitel claims it was built by Bimbisara, while Fâ-Hien attributes it to Ajatasatru. I guess the son completed what the father had started.
(8) One of the five first followers of Sâkyamuni. He is also called Asvajit; in Pâli Assaji; but Asvajit seems to be a military title= “Master or trainer of horses.” The two more famous disciples met him, not to lead him, but to be directed by him, to Buddha. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 144-147.
(8) One of the first five followers of Sâkyamuni. He is also known as Asvajit; in Pâli, he's called Assaji; but Asvajit appears to be a military title meaning "Master or trainer of horses." The two more well-known disciples met him, not to lead him, but to be guided by him to the Buddha. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xiii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 144-147.
(9) One of the six Tirthyas (Tirthakas=“erroneous teachers;” M. B., pp. 290-292, but I have not found the particulars of the attempts on Buddha’s life referred to by Fâ-Hien), or Brahmanical opponents of Buddha. He was an ascetic, one of the Jnati clan, and is therefore called Nirgranthajnati. He taught a system of fatalism, condemned the use of clothes, and thought he could subdue all passions by fasting. He had a body of followers, who called themselves by his name (Eitel, pp. 84, 85), and were the forerunners of the Jains.
(9) One of the six Tirthyas (Tirthakas = “false teachers;” M. B., pp. 290-292, but I haven't found the details of the attempts on Buddha’s life mentioned by Fâ-Hien), or Brahmanical opponents of Buddha. He was an ascetic from the Jnati clan, which is why he is called Nirgranthajnati. He taught a belief system based on fatalism, rejected the use of clothing, and believed he could overcome all desires through fasting. He had a group of followers who called themselves by his name (Eitel, pp. 84, 85) and were the predecessors of the Jains.
(10) The king was moved to this by Devadatta. Of course the elephant disappointed them, and did homage to Sâkyamuni. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 247.
(10) The king was affected by Devadatta. Naturally, the elephant let them down and showed respect to Sâkyamuni. See Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 247.
(11) See chap. xxv, note 3. Jivaka was Ambapali’s son by king Bimbisara, and devoted himself to the practice of medicine. See the account of him in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xvii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 171-194.
(11) See chap. xxv, note 3. Jivaka was Ambapali's son with King Bimbisara and dedicated himself to practicing medicine. See the account of him in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xvii, Vinaya Texts, pp. 171-194.
CHAPTER XXIX.
GRIDHRA-KUTA HILL, AND LEGENDS. FÂ-HIEN PASSES A NIGHT ON IT. HIS REFLECTIONS.
Entering the valley, and keeping along the mountains on the south-east, after ascending fifteen le, (the travellers) came to mount Gridhra-kuta.(1) Three le before you reach the top, there is a cavern in the rocks, facing the south, in which Buddha sat in meditation. Thirty paces to the north-west there is another, where Ananda was sitting in meditation, when the deva Mara Pisuna,(2) having assumed the form of a large vulture, took his place in front of the cavern, and frightened the disciple. Then Buddha, by his mysterious, supernatural power, made a cleft in the rock, introduced his hand, and stroked Ananda’s shoulder, so that his fear immediately passed away. The footprints of the bird and the cleft for (Buddha’s) hand are still there, and hence comes the name of “The Hill of the Vulture Cavern.”
As they entered the valley and continued along the mountains to the southeast, after climbing for fifteen leagues, the travelers arrived at Mount Gridhra-kuta. Three leagues before reaching the summit, there’s a cave in the rocks facing south, where Buddha meditated. Thirty paces to the northwest, there’s another cave where Ananda was meditating when the deity Mara Pisuna, taking the form of a large vulture, landed in front of the cave and frightened him. Then Buddha, using his mysterious supernatural power, created a split in the rock, reached in, and gently touched Ananda’s shoulder, banishing his fear. The bird's footprints and the mark from Buddha's hand are still there, which is why it's called “The Hill of the Vulture Cavern.”
In front of the cavern there are the places where the four Buddhas sat. There are caverns also of the Arhats, one where each sat and meditated, amounting to several hundred in all. At the place where in front of his rocky apartment Buddha was walking from east to west (in meditation), and Devadatta, from among the beetling cliffs on the north of the mountain, threw a rock across, and hurt Buddha’s toes,(3) the rock is still there.(4)
In front of the cave, there are the spots where the four Buddhas sat. There are also caves of the Arhats, with one for each where they meditated, totaling several hundred. At the place where Buddha was walking from east to west (in meditation) in front of his rocky dwelling, Devadatta, from among the steep cliffs on the north side of the mountain, threw a rock across and hit Buddha’s toes; the rock is still there.
The hall where Buddha preached his Law has been destroyed, and only the foundations of the brick walls remain. On this hill the peak is beautifully green, and rises grandly up; it is the highest of all the five hills. In the New City Fâ-Hien bought incense-(sticks), flowers, oil and lamps, and hired two bhikshus, long resident (at the place), to carry them (to the peak). When he himself got to it, he made his offerings with the flowers and incense, and lighted the lamps when the darkness began to come on. He felt melancholy, but restrained his tears and said, “Here Buddha delivered the Surangama (Sutra).(5) I, Fâ-Hien, was born when I could not meet with Buddha; and now I only see the footprints which he has left, and the place where he lived, and nothing more.” With this, in front of the rock cavern, he chanted the Surangama Sutra, remained there over the night, and then returned towards the New City.(6)
The hall where Buddha preached his teachings has been destroyed, and only the foundations of the brick walls are left. On this hill, the peak is lush and rises majestically; it is the tallest of all five hills. In the New City, Fâ-Hien bought incense sticks, flowers, oil, and lamps, and hired two monks who had lived there for a long time to carry them to the peak. When he finally reached it, he made his offerings with the flowers and incense, lighting the lamps as darkness fell. He felt a sense of sadness but held back his tears and said, “Here Buddha delivered the Surangama Sutra. I, Fâ-Hien, was born when I could not meet Buddha; now I only see the footprints he left and the place where he lived, and nothing more.” With that, in front of the rock cave, he chanted the Surangama Sutra, stayed there through the night, and then headed back toward the New City.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) See chap. xxviii, note 1.
(1) See chap. 28, note 1.
(2) See chap. xxv, note 9. Pisuna is a name given to Mara, and signifies “sinful lust.”
(2) See chap. xxv, note 9. Pisuna is a name used for Mara, and means “sinful desire.”
(3) See M. B., p. 320. Hardy says that Devadatta’s attempt was “by the help of a machine;” but the oldest account in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 245, agrees with what Fâ-Hien implies that he threw the rock with his own arm.
(3) See M. B., p. 320. Hardy mentions that Devadatta’s attempt was “with the help of a machine;” however, the oldest account in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, p. 245, aligns with what Fâ-Hien suggests, indicating that he threw the rock using his own arm.
(4) And, as described by Hsuan-chwang, fourteen or fifteen cubits high, and thirty paces round.
(4) And, as described by Hsuan-chwang, about fourteen or fifteen feet high, and thirty paces around.
(5) See Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio’s “Catalogue of the Chinese Translation of the Buddhist Tripitaka,” Sutra Pitaka, Nos. 399, 446. It was the former of these that came on this occasion to the thoughts and memory of Fâ-Hien.
(5) See Mr. Bunyiu Nanjio’s “Catalogue of the Chinese Translation of the Buddhist Tripitaka,” Sutra Pitaka, Nos. 399, 446. It was the first of these that came to Fâ-Hien’s mind and memory on this occasion.
(6) In a note (p. lx) to his revised version of our author, Mr. Beal says, “There is a full account of this perilous visit of Fâ-Hien, and how he was attacked by tigers, in the ‘History of the High Priests.’” But “the high priests” merely means distinguished monks, “eminent monks,” as Mr. Nanjio exactly renders the adjectival character. Nor was Fâ-Hien “attacked by tigers” on the peak. No “tigers” appear in the Memoir. “Two black lions” indeed crouched before him for a time this night, “licking their lips and waving their tails;” but their appearance was to “try,” and not to attack him; and when they saw him resolute, they “drooped their heads, put down their tails, and prostrated themselves before him.” This of course is not an historical account, but a legendary tribute to his bold perseverance.
(6) In a note (p. lx) to his updated version of our author, Mr. Beal says, “There’s a detailed account of this dangerous visit of Fâ-Hien, and how he was confronted by tigers, in the ‘History of the High Priests.’” But “the high priests” just refers to distinguished monks, or “eminent monks,” as Mr. Nanjio accurately describes the adjective. Also, Fâ-Hien wasn’t “attacked by tigers” on the peak. No “tigers” show up in the Memoir. “Two black lions,” in fact, crouched in front of him for a while that night, “licking their lips and waving their tails;” but they were there to “test” him, not to attack. When they saw that he was determined, they “lowered their heads, put down their tails, and bowed before him.” This is, of course, not a historical account, but a legendary homage to his courage and determination.
CHAPTER XXX.
THE SRATAPARNA CAVE, OR CAVE OF THE FIRST COUNCIL. LEGENDS. SUICIDE OF A
BHIKSHU.
Out from the old city, after walking over 300 paces, on the west of the road, (the travellers) found the Karanda Bamboo garden,(1) where the (old) vihâra is still in existence, with a company of monks, who keep (the ground about it) swept and watered.
Out of the old city, after walking over 300 steps, to the west of the road, the travelers came across the Karanda Bamboo garden, where the old vihâra still stands, along with a group of monks who maintain the area by sweeping and watering the grounds.
North of the vihâra two or three le there was the Smasanam, which name means in Chinese “the field of graves into which the dead are thrown.”(2)
North of the vihâra, two or three le away, was the Smasanam, which in Chinese means “the field of graves into which the dead are thrown.”(2)
As they kept along the mountain on the south, and went west for 300 paces, they found a dwelling among the rocks, named the Pippala cave,(3) in which Buddha regularly sat in meditation after taking his (midday) meal.
As they continued along the mountain to the south and traveled west for 300 steps, they discovered a dwelling among the rocks called the Pippala cave,(3) where Buddha often sat in meditation after his midday meal.
Going on still to the west for five or six le, on the north of the hill, in the shade, they found the cavern called Srataparna,(4) the place where, after the nirvâna(5) of Buddha, 500 Arhats collected the Sûtras. When they brought the Sûtras forth, three lofty seats(6) had been prepared and grandly ornamented. Sariputtra occupied the one on the left, and Maudgalyayana that on the right. Of the number of five hundred one was wanting. Mahakasyapa was president (on the middle seat). Ananda was then outside the door, and could not get in.(7) At the place there was (subsequently) raised a tope, which is still existing.
Heading further west for five or six leagues, on the north side of the hill, in the shade, they discovered the cave known as Srataparna, the location where, after Buddha's nirvana, 500 Arhats gathered the Sutras. When they brought the Sutras out, three tall seats were set up and beautifully decorated. Sariputra took the seat on the left, and Maudgalyayana took the one on the right. There was one missing from the number of five hundred. Mahakasyapa was the leader in the middle seat. Ananda was outside the door and couldn’t get in. Later, a stupa was built at the site, which still exists today.
Along (the sides of) the hill, there are also a very great many cells among the rocks, where the various Arhans sat and meditated. As you leave the old city on the north, and go down east for three le, there is the rock dwelling of Devadatta, and at a distance of fifty paces from it there is a large, square, black rock. Formerly there was a bhikshu, who, as he walked backwards and forwards upon it, thought with himself:—“This body(8) is impermanent, a thing of bitterness and vanity,(9) and which cannot be looked on as pure.(10) I am weary of this body, and troubled by it as an evil.” With this he grasped a knife, and was about to kill himself. But he thought again:—“The World-honoured one laid down a prohibition against one’s killing himself.”(11) Further it occurred to him:—“Yes, he did; but I now only wish to kill three poisonous thieves.”(12) Immediately with the knife he cut his throat. With the first gash into the flesh he attained the state of a Srotapanna;(13) when he had gone half through, he attained to be an Anagamin;(14) and when he had cut right through, he was an Arhat, and attained to pari-nirvâna;(15) (and died).
Along the sides of the hill, there are many caves among the rocks where various Arhans sat and meditated. As you leave the old city to the north and head east for three miles, you’ll find the rock dwelling of Devadatta, and about fifty paces away, there’s a large, square black rock. Once, there was a bhikshu who, as he walked back and forth on it, reflected: “This body is temporary, a source of suffering and emptiness, and cannot be seen as pure. I am tired of this body and troubled by it like an affliction.” With that, he picked up a knife and was about to take his own life. But then he thought again: “The World-honored one forbade us from killing ourselves.” Then it struck him: “Yes, he did; but I only want to kill three poisonous thieves.” Immediately, with the knife, he cut his throat. With the first cut into his flesh, he reached the state of a Srotapanna; when he had cut halfway through, he became an Anagamin; and when he had cut all the way through, he was an Arhat and achieved pari-nirvana (and died).
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Karanda Venuvana; a park presented to Buddha by king Bimbisara, who also built a vihâra in it. See the account of the transaction in M. B., p. 194. The place was called Karanda, from a creature so named, which awoke the king just as a snake was about to bite him, and thus saved his life. In Hardy the creature appears as a squirrel, but Eitel says that the Karanda is a bird of sweet voice, resembling a magpie, but herding in flocks; the cuculus melanoleucus. See “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 118.
(1) Karanda Venuvana; a park given to Buddha by King Bimbisara, who also built a vihara there. You can find the details of the transaction in M. B., p. 194. The place was named Karanda after a creature with the same name, which woke the king just as a snake was about to bite him, saving his life. In Hardy, the creature is described as a squirrel, but Eitel states that the Karanda is a bird with a sweet voice, similar to a magpie, but found in flocks; the cuculus melanoleucus. See “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 118.
(2) The language here is rather contemptuous, as if our author had no sympathy with any other mode of disposing of the dead, but by his own Buddhistic method of cremation.
(2) The tone here is pretty dismissive, as if the author has no understanding or acceptance of any other way to handle the dead besides his own Buddhist practice of cremation.
(3) The Chinese characters used for the name of this cavern serve also to name the pippala (peepul) tree, the ficus religiosa. They make us think that there was such a tree overshadowing the cave; but Fâ-Hien would hardly have neglected to mention such a circumstance.
(3) The Chinese characters used for the name of this cave also refer to the pippala (peepul) tree, the ficus religiosa. This makes us think there was a tree providing shade over the cave; however, Fâ-Hien likely would have mentioned that detail.
(4) A very great place in the annals of Buddhism. The Council in the Srataparna cave did not come together fortuitously, but appears to have been convoked by the older members to settle the rules and doctrines of the order. The cave was prepared for the occasion by king Ajatasatru. From the expression about the “bringing forth of the King,” it would seem that the Sûtras or some of them had been already committed to writing. May not the meaning of King {.} here be extended to the Vinaya rules, as well as the Sûtras, and mean “the standards” of the system generally? See Davids’ Manual, chapter ix, and Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 370-385.
(4) A significant moment in the history of Buddhism. The Council in the Srataparna cave didn’t just happen by chance; it seems to have been organized by the senior members to establish the rules and teachings of the community. The cave was prepared for this gathering by King Ajatasatru. From the mention of the “bringing forth of the King,” it appears that some of the Sûtras had already been written down. Could the term King here also refer to the Vinaya rules, as well as the Sûtras, essentially meaning “the standards” of the system as a whole? See Davids’ Manual, chapter ix, and Sacred Books of the East, vol. xx, Vinaya Texts, pp. 370-385.
(5) So in the text, evidently for pari-nirvâna.
(5) So in the text, clearly referring to pari-nirvâna.
(6) Instead of “high” seats, the Chinese texts have “vacant.” The character for “prepared” denotes “spread;”—they were carpeted; perhaps, both cushioned and carpeted, being rugs spread on the ground, raised higher than the other places for seats.
(6) Instead of “high” seats, the Chinese texts say “vacant.” The character for “prepared” means “spread;”—they were carpeted; maybe, both cushioned and carpeted, with rugs laid on the ground, elevated above the other seating areas.
(7) Did they not contrive to let him in, with some cachinnation, even in so august an assembly, that so important a member should have been shut out?
(7) Didn’t they come up with a way to let him in, laughing a little, even in such a prestigious gathering, that such an important member was kept out?
(8) “The life of this body” would, I think, fairly express the idea of the bhikshu.
(8) “The life of this body” would, I believe, accurately convey the idea of the monk.
(9) See the account of Buddha’s preaching in chapter xviii.
(9) Check out the account of Buddha’s preaching in chapter eighteen.
(10) The sentiment of this clause is not easily caught.
(10) The feeling of this clause is not easy to grasp.
(11) See E. M., p. 152:—“Buddha made a law forbidding the monks to commit suicide. He prohibited any one from discoursing on the miseries of life in such a manner as to cause desperation.” See also M. B., pp. 464, 465.
(11) See E. M., p. 152:—“Buddha established a rule that forbids monks from taking their own lives. He also banned anyone from discussing the pains of life in a way that could lead to hopelessness.” See also M. B., pp. 464, 465.
(12) Beal says:—“Evil desire; hatred; ignorance.”
(12) Beal says:—“Bad desire; hatred; ignorance.”
(13) See chap. xx, note 10.
(13) See chap. xx, note 10.
(14) The Anagamin belong to the third degree of Buddhistic saintship, the third class of Aryas, who are no more liable to be reborn as men, but are to be born once more as devas, when they will forthwith become Arhats, and attain to nirvâna. E. H., pp. 8, 9.
(14) The Anagamin belong to the third level of Buddhist sainthood, the third group of Aryas, who will no longer be reborn as humans, but will be reborn as divine beings, where they will immediately become Arhats and achieve nirvana. E. H., pp. 8, 9.
(15) Our author expresses no opinion of his own on the act of this bhikshu. Must it not have been a good act, when it was attended, in the very act of performance, by such blessed consequences? But if Buddhism had not something better to show than what appears here, it would not attract the interest which it now does. The bhikshu was evidently rather out of his mind; and the verdict of a coroner’s inquest of this nineteenth century would have pronounced that he killed himself “in a fit of insanity.”
(15) Our author doesn't express his own opinion on the actions of this monk. Could it not have been a good deed, considering the positive outcomes that followed its execution? However, if Buddhism didn't offer something superior to what's presented here, it wouldn't draw the interest it currently does. The monk was clearly somewhat out of his mind; and a coroner's inquest in this nineteenth century would likely have determined that he took his own life "in a fit of insanity."
CHAPTER XXXI.
GAYA. SAKYAMUNI’S ATTAINING TO THE BUDDHASHIP; AND OTHER LEGENDS.
From this place, after travelling to the west for four yojanas, (the pilgrims) came to the city of Gaya;(1) but inside the city all was emptiness and desolation. Going on again to the south for twenty le, they arrived at the place where the Bodhisattva for six years practised with himself painful austerities. All around was forest.
From this location, after traveling west for four yojanas, the pilgrims arrived at the city of Gaya; but within the city, there was only emptiness and desolation. Continuing south for twenty le, they reached the spot where the Bodhisattva practiced severe austerities for six years. The area was surrounded by forest.
Three le west from here they came to the place where, when Buddha had gone into the water to bathe, a deva bent down the branch of a tree, by means of which he succeeded in getting out of the pool.(2)
Three leagues west from here, they arrived at the spot where, when Buddha went into the water to bathe, a deva bent down a tree branch, allowing him to get out of the pool.
Two le north from this was the place where the Gramika girls presented to Buddha the rice-gruel made with milk;(3) and two le north from this (again) was the place where, seated on a rock under a great tree, and facing the east, he ate (the gruel). The tree and the rock are there at the present day. The rock may be six cubits in breadth and length, and rather more than two cubits in height. In Central India the cold and heat are so equally tempered that trees will live in it for several thousand and even for ten thousand years.
Two leagues north of here is the spot where the Gramika girls offered Buddha rice porridge made with milk; and two leagues further north is the location where he sat on a rock beneath a large tree, facing east, and ate the porridge. The tree and the rock still exist today. The rock is about six cubits wide and long, and just over two cubits high. In Central India, the climate is so mild that trees can thrive for several thousand, even ten thousand years.
Half a yojana from this place to the north-east there was a cavern in the rocks, into which the Bodhisattva entered, and sat cross-legged with his face to the west. (As he did so), he said to himself, “If I am to attain to perfect wisdom (and become Buddha), let there be a supernatural attestation of it.” On the wall of the rock there appeared immediately the shadow of a Buddha, rather more than three feet in length, which is still bright at the present day. At this moment heaven and earth were greatly moved, and devas in the air spoke plainly, “This is not the place where any Buddha of the past, or he that is to come, has attained, or will attain, to perfect Wisdom. Less than half a yojana from this to the south-west will bring you to the patra(4) tree, where all past Buddhas have attained, and all to come must attain, to perfect Wisdom.” When they had spoken these words, they immediately led the way forwards to the place, singing as they did so. As they thus went away, the Bodhisattva arose and walked (after them). At a distance of thirty paces from the tree, a deva gave him the grass of lucky omen,(5) which he received and went on. After (he had proceeded) fifteen paces, 500 green birds came flying towards him, went round him thrice, and disappeared. The Bodhisattva went forward to the patra tree, placed the kusa grass at the foot of it, and sat down with his face to the east. Then king Mara sent three beautiful young ladies, who came from the north, to tempt him, while he himself came from the south to do the same. The Bodhisattva put his toes down on the ground, and the demon soldiers retired and dispersed, and the three young ladies were changed into old (grand-)mothers.(6)
Half a yojana from this place to the northeast, there was a cave in the rocks where the Bodhisattva entered and sat cross-legged facing west. As he did this, he said to himself, “If I am to achieve perfect wisdom and become Buddha, let there be a supernatural sign of it.” Immediately, the shadow of a Buddha, about three feet long, appeared on the rock wall, which still shines brightly today. At that moment, heaven and earth were greatly stirred, and devas in the air clearly proclaimed, “This is not the place where any Buddha of the past, or the future, has attained or will attain perfect wisdom. Less than half a yojana to the southwest will lead you to the patra tree, where all past Buddhas have attained, and all future Buddhas must attain perfect wisdom.” After they spoke these words, they led the way forward to the place, singing as they went. As they departed, the Bodhisattva stood up and walked after them. Thirty paces from the tree, a deva handed him the grass of lucky omen, which he accepted and continued on. After he had walked fifteen paces, 500 green birds flew toward him, circled around him three times, and then vanished. The Bodhisattva approached the patra tree, placed the kusa grass at its base, and sat down facing east. Then King Mara sent three beautiful young women from the north to tempt him, while he himself came from the south to do the same. The Bodhisattva pressed his toes against the ground, causing the demon soldiers to retreat and scatter, and the three young women transformed into old grandmothers.
At the place mentioned above of the six years’ painful austerities, and at all these other places, men subsequently reared topes and set up images, which all exist at the present day.
At the location mentioned earlier, where the six years of intense hardships took place, along with all these other sites, people later built stupas and erected statues, many of which still stand today.
Where Buddha, after attaining to perfect wisdom, for seven days contemplated the tree, and experienced the joy of vimukti;(7) where, under the patra tree, he walked backwards and forwards from west to east for seven days; where the devas made a hall appear, composed of the seven precious substances, and presented offerings to him for seven days; where the blind dragon Muchilinda(8) encircled him for seven days; where he sat under the nyagrodha tree, on a square rock, with his face to the east, and Brahma-deva(9) came and made his request to him; where the four deva kings brought to him their alms-bowls;(10) where the 500 merchants(11) presented to him the roasted flour and honey; and where he converted the brothers Kasyapa and their thousand disciples;(12)—at all these places topes were reared.
Where Buddha, after achieving perfect wisdom, contemplated the tree for seven days and experienced the joy of liberation; where, under the patra tree, he walked back and forth from west to east for seven days; where the gods made a hall appear, built from the seven precious substances, and offered him gifts for seven days; where the blind dragon Muchilinda encircled him for seven days; where he sat under the nyagrodha tree, on a square rock, facing east, and Brahma-deva came to him with a request; where the four deva kings brought him their alms-bowls; where the 500 merchants presented him with roasted flour and honey; and where he converted the brothers Kasyapa and their thousand disciples—at all these places, stupas were built.
At the place where Buddha attained to perfect Wisdom, there are three monasteries, in all of which there are monks residing. The families of their people around supply the societies of these monks with an abundant sufficiency of what they require, so that there is no lack or stint.(13) The disciplinary rules are strictly observed by them. The laws regulating their demeanour in sitting, rising, and entering when the others are assembled, are those which have been practised by all the saints since Buddha was in the world down to the present day. The places of the four great topes have been fixed, and handed down without break, since Buddha attained to nirvâna. Those four great topes are those at the places where Buddha was born; where he attained to Wisdom; where he (began to) move the wheel of his Law; and where he attained to pari-nirvâna.
At the site where Buddha achieved perfect Wisdom, there are three monasteries, each home to resident monks. The families in the surrounding areas provide these monks with a plentiful supply of everything they need, so there is never any shortage. They strictly adhere to their disciplinary rules. The guidelines for their behavior while sitting, standing, and entering the assembly are the same ones practiced by all the saints from the time of Buddha right up to today. The locations of the four great stupas have been established and preserved since Buddha reached nirvana. These four great stupas are located at the places where Buddha was born, where he attained Wisdom, where he first taught his Law, and where he entered parinirvana.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Gaya, a city of Magadha, was north-west of the present Gayah (lat. 24° 47′ N., lon. 85° 1′ E). It was here that Sâkyamuni lived for seven years, after quitting his family, until he attained to Buddhaship. The place is still frequented by pilgrims. E. H., p. 41.
(1) Gaya, a city in Magadha, was northwest of the current Gayah (lat. 24° 47′ N., lon. 85° 1′ E). It was here that Sâkyamuni lived for seven years after leaving his family, until he became the Buddha. This location is still visited by pilgrims. E. H., p. 41.
(2) This is told so as to make us think that he was in danger of being drowned; but this does not appear in the only other account of the incident I have met with,—in “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 31. And he was not yet Buddha, though he is here called so; unless indeed the narrative is confused, and the incidents do not follow in the order of time.
(2) This is told in a way that suggests he was at risk of drowning; however, this doesn’t show up in the only other version of the story I’ve come across—in “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 31. And he wasn’t Buddha yet, even though he’s referred to as such here; unless the narrative is mixed up and the events don’t occur in chronological order.
(3) An incident similar to this is told, with many additions, in Hardy’s M. B., pp. 166-168; “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 30; and the “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 91, 92; but the name of the ministering girl or girls is different. I take Gramika from a note in Beal’s revised version; it seems to me a happy solution of the difficulty caused by the {.} {.} of Fâ-Hien.
(3) A similar incident is recounted, with many additions, in Hardy’s M. B., pp. 166-168; “The Life of the Buddha,” p. 30; and the “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 91, 92; but the name of the serving girl or girls is different. I choose Gramika from a note in Beal’s revised version; it seems to me a good answer to the confusion caused by the {.} {.} of Fâ-Hien.
(4) Called “the tree of leaves,” and “the tree of reflection;” a palm tree, the borassus flabellifera, described as a tree which never loses its leaves. It is often confounded with the pippala. E. H., p. 92.
(4) Known as “the tree of leaves” and “the tree of reflection,” the palm tree, borassus flabellifera, is described as a tree that never loses its leaves. It is often mistaken for the pippala. E. H., p. 92.
(5) The kusa grass, mentioned in a previous note.
(5) The kusa grass, mentioned in an earlier note.
(6) See the account of this contest with Mara in M. B., pp. 171-179, and “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 96-101.
(6) See the description of this contest with Mara in M. B., pp. 171-179, and “Buddhist Birth Stories,” pp. 96-101.
(7) See chap. xiii, note 7.
(7) See chap. xiii, note 7.
(8) Called also Maha, or the Great Muchilinda. Eitel says: “A naga king, the tutelary deity of a lake near which Sâkyamuni once sat for seven days absorbed in meditation, whilst the king guarded him.” The account (p. 35) in “The Life of the Buddha” is:—“Buddha went to where lived the naga king Muchilinda, and he, wishing to preserve him from the sun and rain, wrapped his body seven times round him, and spread out his hood over his head; and there he remained seven days in thought.” So also the Nidana Katha, in “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 109.
(8) Also known as Maha, or the Great Muchilinda. Eitel states: “A naga king, the protective deity of a lake where Sâkyamuni once sat for seven days deep in meditation, while the king kept watch over him.” The account (p. 35) in “The Life of the Buddha” reads: “Buddha went to the dwelling of the naga king Muchilinda, and he, wanting to shield him from the sun and rain, coiled his body around him seven times and spread his hood over Buddha’s head; and there he remained for seven days in contemplation.” The Nidana Katha, in “Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 109, mentions this as well.
(9) This was Brahma himself, though “king” is omitted. What he requested of the Buddha was that he would begin the preaching of his Law. Nidana Katha, p. 111.
(9) This was Brahma himself, though "king" is left out. What he asked of the Buddha was to start sharing his teachings. Nidana Katha, p. 111.
(10) See chap. xii, note 10.
(10) See chap. xii, note 10.
(11) The other accounts mention only two; but in M. B., p. 182, and the Nidana Katha, p. 110, these two have 500 well-laden waggons with them.
(11) The other accounts mention only two; but in M. B., p. 182, and the Nidana Katha, p. 110, these two have 500 fully loaded wagons with them.
(12) These must not be confounded with Mahakasyapa of chap. xvi, note 17. They were three brothers, Uruvilva, Gaya, and Nadi-Kasyapa, up to this time holders of “erroneous” views, having 500, 300, and 200 disciples respectively. They became distinguished followers of Sâkyamuni; and are—each of them—to become Buddha by-and-by. See the Nidana Katha, pp. 114, 115.
(12) These should not be confused with Mahakasyapa from chap. xvi, note 17. They were three brothers: Uruvilva, Gaya, and Nadi-Kasyapa, who until then held “incorrect” views, with 500, 300, and 200 disciples, respectively. They became well-known followers of Sâkyamuni and—each of them—will eventually become a Buddha. See the Nidana Katha, pp. 114, 115.
(13) This seems to be the meaning; but I do not wonder that some understand the sentence of the benevolence of the monkish population to the travellers.
(13) This seems to be the meaning; but I’m not surprised that some interpret the sentence as referring to the kindness of the monkish community towards the travelers.
CHAPTER XXXII.
LEGEND OF KING ASOKA IN A FORMER BIRTH, AND HIS NARAKA.
When king Asoka, in a former birth,(1) was a little boy and played on the road, he met Kasyapa Buddha walking. (The stranger) begged food, and the boy pleasantly took a handful of earth and gave it to him. The Buddha took the earth, and returned it to the ground on which he was walking; but because of this (the boy) received the recompense of becoming a king of the iron wheel,(2) to rule over Jambudvipa. (Once) when he was making a judicial tour of inspection through Jambudvipa, he saw, between the iron circuit of the two hills, a naraka(3) for the punishment of wicked men. Having thereupon asked his ministers what sort of a thing it was, they replied, “It belongs to Yama,(4) king of demons, for punishing wicked people.” The king thought within himself:—“(Even) the king of demons is able to make a naraka in which to deal with wicked men; why should not I, who am the lord of men, make a naraka in which to deal with wicked men?” He forthwith asked his ministers who could make for him a naraka and preside over the punishment of wicked people in it. They replied that it was only a man of extreme wickedness who could make it; and the king thereupon sent officers to seek everywhere for (such) a bad man; and they saw by the side of a pond a man tall and strong, with a black countenance, yellow hair, and green eyes, hooking up the fish with his feet, while he called to him birds and beasts, and, when they came, then shot and killed them, so that not one escaped. Having got this man, they took him to the king, who secretly charged him, “You must make a square enclosure with high walls. Plant in it all kinds of flowers and fruits; make good ponds in it for bathing; make it grand and imposing in every way, so that men shall look to it with thirsting desire; make its gates strong and sure; and when any one enters, instantly seize him and punish him as a sinner, not allowing him to get out. Even if I should enter, punish me as a sinner in the same way, and do not let me go. I now appoint you master of that naraka.”
When King Asoka, in a past life,(1) was a little boy playing on the road, he encountered Kasyapa Buddha walking by. The stranger asked for food, and the boy kindly offered him a handful of dirt. The Buddha accepted the dirt and returned it to the ground where he walked; because of this, the boy earned the reward of becoming the king of the iron wheel,(2) tasked with ruling over Jambudvipa. One day, while touring Jambudvipa to inspect his territories, he noticed, between the iron barrier of two hills, a naraka(3) for punishing evil people. Curious about it, he asked his ministers what it was, and they replied, “It belongs to Yama,(4) the king of demons, for punishing wicked individuals.” The king thought to himself, “If the king of demons can create a naraka to deal with wrongdoers, why shouldn't I, as the ruler of men, create one to address the wicked?” He immediately asked his ministers who could construct a naraka and oversee the punishment of evildoers. They responded that only a person of extreme wickedness could do so; hence, the king sent officers to search everywhere for such a man. They found a tall, strong man by a pond, with a dark complexion, yellow hair, and green eyes, catching fish with his feet, while calling birds and beasts to him, then shooting and killing them without any escape. They brought this man to the king, who secretly instructed him, “You must create a square enclosure with high walls. Fill it with all kinds of flowers and fruits; build good bathing ponds; make it grand and enticing so that people will be drawn to it; ensure the gates are strong and secure; and when anyone enters, immediately seize them and punish them as a sinner, allowing no escape. Even if I enter, punish me as a sinner in the same way, and do not let me go. I now appoint you as the master of that naraka.”
Soon after this a bhikshu, pursuing his regular course of begging his food, entered the gate (of the place). When the lictors of the naraka saw him, they were about to subject him to their tortures; but he, frightened, begged them to allow him a moment in which to eat his midday meal. Immediately after, there came in another man, whom they thrust into a mortar and pounded till a red froth overflowed. As the bhikshu looked on, there came to him the thought of the impermanence, the painful suffering and insanity of this body, and how it is but as a bubble and as foam; and instantly he attained to Arhatship. Immediately after, the lictors seized him, and threw him into a caldron of boiling water. There was a look of joyful satisfaction, however, in the bhikshu’s countenance. The fire was extinguished, and the water became cold. In the middle (of the caldron) there rose up a lotus flower, with the bhikshu seated on it. The lictors at once went and reported to the king that there was a marvellous occurrence in the naraka, and wished him to go and see it; but the king said, “I formerly made such an agreement that now I dare not go (to the place).” The lictors said, “This is not a small matter. Your majesty ought to go quickly. Let your former agreement be altered.” The king thereupon followed them, and entered (the naraka), when the bhikshu preached the Law to him, and he believed, and was made free.(5) Forthwith he demolished the naraka, and repented of all the evil which he had formerly done. From this time he believed in and honoured the Three Precious Ones, and constantly went to a patra tree, repenting under it, with self-reproach, of his errors, and accepting the eight rules of abstinence.(6)
Soon after this, a monk, following his usual routine of begging for food, entered the gate of the place. When the torturers of the hell saw him, they were about to inflict their punishments; but he, scared, asked them to give him a moment to eat his midday meal. Shortly after, another man came in, and they pushed him into a mortar and pounded him until red froth spilled out. As the monk watched, he realized the impermanence, painful suffering, and madness of this body, and how it is just like a bubble and foam; and in that moment, he attained enlightenment. Right after, the torturers grabbed him and threw him into a cauldron of boiling water. However, there was a look of joyful satisfaction on the monk's face. The fire was put out, and the water turned cold. In the middle of the cauldron, a lotus flower rose up with the monk seated on it. The torturers quickly went to tell the king about this miraculous event in hell and urged him to come and see it; but the king said, “I previously made an agreement that now makes me too afraid to go there.” The torturers insisted, “This is no small matter. Your majesty should go quickly. Let your previous agreement be changed.” The king then followed them and entered hell, where the monk preached the Dharma to him. The king believed and was set free. He immediately destroyed hell and regretted all the wrong he had done before. From that time on, he had faith in and honored the Three Jewels, and often went to a begging bowl tree, where he repented for his mistakes and accepted the eight precepts of abstinence.
The queen asked where the king was constantly going to, and the ministers replied that he was constantly to be seen under (such and such) a patra tree. She watched for a time when the king was not there, and then sent men to cut the tree down. When the king came, and saw what had been done, he swooned away with sorrow, and fell to the ground. His ministers sprinkled water on his face, and after a considerable time he revived. He then built all round (the stump) with bricks, and poured a hundred pitchers of cows’ milk on the roots; and as he lay with his four limbs spread out on the ground, he took this oath, “If the tree do not live, I will never rise from this.” When he had uttered this oath, the tree immediately began to grow from the roots, and it has continued to grow till now, when it is nearly 100 cubits in height.
The queen kept asking where the king was always going, and the ministers told her that he was often seen under a certain patra tree. She waited until the king was not around and then sent people to cut the tree down. When the king returned and saw what had happened, he fainted from grief and collapsed to the ground. His ministers splashed water on his face, and after a long while, he came to. He then surrounded the stump with bricks and poured a hundred pitchers of cow’s milk on the roots; and as he lay on the ground with his arms and legs spread out, he swore, “If the tree does not live, I will never rise from this.” As soon as he made this vow, the tree started to grow from the roots, and it has continued to flourish until now, reaching nearly 100 cubits in height.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Here is an instance of {.} used, as was pointed out in chap. ix, note 3, for a former age; and not merely a former time. Perhaps “a former birth” is the best translation. The Corean reading of Kasyapa Buddha is certainly preferable to the Chinese “Sakya Buddha.”
(1) Here is an instance of {.} used, as was pointed out in chap. ix, note 3, for a past era; and not just a past moment. Maybe “a past life” is the best translation. The Korean reading of Kasyapa Buddha is definitely better than the Chinese “Sakya Buddha.”
(2) See chap. xvii, note 8.
(2) See chap. 17, note 8.
(3) I prefer to retain the Sanskrit term here, instead of translating the Chinese text by “Earth’s prison {.} {.},” or “a prison in the earth;” the name for which has been adopted generally by Christian missionaries in China for gehenna and hell.
(3) I choose to keep the Sanskrit term here, instead of translating the Chinese text as “Earth’s prison {.} {.},” or “a prison in the earth;” which is the name commonly used by Christian missionaries in China for gehenna and hell.
(4) Eitel (p. 173) says:—“Yama was originally the Aryan god of the dead, living in a heaven above the world, the regent of the south; but Brahmanism transferred his abode to hell. Both views have been retained by Buddhism.” The Yama of the text is the “regent of the narakas, residing south of Jambudvipa, outside the Chakravalas (the double circuit of mountains above), in a palace built of brass and iron. He has a sister who controls all the female culprits, as he exclusively deals with the male sex. Three times, however, in every twenty-four hours, a demon pours boiling copper into Yama’s mouth, and squeezes it down his throat, causing him unspeakable pain.” Such, however, is the wonderful “transrotation of births,” that when Yama’s sins have been expiated, he is to be reborn as Buddha, under the name of “The Universal King.”
(4) Eitel (p. 173) says:—“Yama was originally the Aryan god of the dead, living in a heaven above the world, the ruler of the south; but Brahmanism moved his residence to hell. Both perspectives have been kept by Buddhism.” The Yama in the text is the “ruler of the narakas, residing south of Jambudvipa, outside the Chakravalas (the double circuit of mountains above), in a palace made of brass and iron. He has a sister who oversees all the female wrongdoers, as he only deals with the male offenders. Three times, however, every twenty-four hours, a demon pours boiling copper into Yama’s mouth and forces it down his throat, causing him immense pain.” Such, however, is the remarkable “transrotation of births,” that when Yama’s sins have been atoned for, he is to be reborn as Buddha, under the name of “The Universal King.”
(5) Or, “was loosed;” from the bonds, I suppose, of his various illusions.
(5) Or, “was released;” from the constraints, I assume, of his various delusions.
(6) I have not met with this particular numerical category.
(6) I have not encountered this specific number category.
CHAPTER XXXIII.
MOUNT GURUPADA, WHERE KASYAPA BUDDHA’S ENTIRE SKELETON IS.
(The travellers), going on from this three le to the south, came to a mountain named Gurupada,(1) inside which Mahakasyapa even now is. He made a cleft, and went down into it, though the place where he entered would not (now) admit a man. Having gone down very far, there was a hole on one side, and there the complete body of Kasyapa (still) abides. Outside the hole (at which he entered) is the earth with which he had washed his hands.(2) If the people living thereabouts have a sore on their heads, they plaster on it some of the earth from this, and feel immediately easier.(3) On this mountain, now as of old, there are Arhats abiding. Devotees of our Law from the various countries in that quarter go year by year to the mountain, and present offerings to Kasyapa; and to those whose hearts are strong in faith there come Arhats at night, and talk with them, discussing and explaining their doubts, and disappearing suddenly afterwards.
(The travelers), heading south for about three leagues, arrived at a mountain called Gurupada, where Mahakasyapa still resides today. He created a cleft and went down into it, although the entrance wouldn't allow a person to enter now. After descending quite far, he found a hole on one side, where the complete body of Kasyapa still remains. Outside the hole he entered is the earth with which he washed his hands. If the locals have a sore on their head, they apply some of this earth, and they feel relief right away. This mountain, just like before, is home to Arhats. Devotees of our teachings from various regions visit the mountain each year to make offerings to Kasyapa; and those who have strong faith find that Arhats come to them at night, engage in conversation to help with their doubts, and then suddenly disappear.
On this hill hazels grow luxuriously; and there are many lions, tigers, and wolves, so that people should not travel incautiously.
On this hill, hazelnuts thrive abundantly; and there are many lions, tigers, and wolves, so people shouldn't travel carelessly.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) “Fowl’s-foot hill,” “with three peaks, resembling the foot of a chicken. It lies seven miles south-east of Gaya, and was the residence of Mahakasyapa, who is said to be still living inside this mountain.” So Eitel says, p. 58; but this chapter does not say that Kasyapa is in the mountain alive, but that his body entire is in a recess or hole in it. Hardy (M. B., p. 97) says that after Kasyapa Buddha’s body was burnt, the bones still remained in their usual position, presenting the appearance of a perfect skeleton. It is of him that the chapter speaks, and not of the famous disciple of Sâkyamuni, who also is called Mahakasyapa. This will appear also on a comparison of Eitel’s articles on “Mahakasyapa” and “Kasyapa Buddha.”
(1) “Fowl’s-foot hill,” which has three peaks resembling a chicken's foot. It’s located seven miles southeast of Gaya and was home to Mahakasyapa, who is said to still be living inside this mountain. Eitel mentions this on page 58; however, this chapter doesn’t claim that Kasyapa is alive inside the mountain but rather that his whole body is in a recess or cave within it. Hardy (M. B., p. 97) states that after Kasyapa Buddha’s body was cremated, the bones remained in their usual position, looking like a perfect skeleton. The chapter refers to him and not to the famous disciple of Sâkyamuni, who is also named Mahakasyapa. This will be evident when comparing Eitel’s articles on “Mahakasyapa” and “Kasyapa Buddha.”
(2) Was it a custom to wash the hands with “earth,” as is often done with sand?
(2) Was it a tradition to wash hands with “dirt,” like people often do with sand?
(3) This I conceive to be the meaning here.
(3) I believe this is what it means here.
CHAPTER XXXIV.
ON THE WAY BACK TO PATNA. VARANASI, OR BENARES. SAKYAMUNI’S FIRST DOINGS
AFTER BECOMING BUDDHA.
Fâ-Hien(1) returned (from here) towards Pataliputtra,(2) keeping along the course of the Ganges and descending in the direction of the west. After going ten yojanas he found a vihâra, named “The Wilderness,”—a place where Buddha had dwelt, and where there are monks now.
Fâ-Hien(1) made his way back towards Pataliputtra,(2) following the path of the Ganges and heading west. After traveling ten yojanas, he discovered a vihâra called “The Wilderness,”—a location where Buddha had once lived, and where monks currently resided.
Pursuing the same course, and going still to the west, he arrived, after twelve yojanas, at the city of Varanasi(3) in the kingdom of Kasi. Rather more than ten le to the north-east of the city, he found the vihâra in the park of “The rishi’s Deer-wild.”(4) In this park there formerly resided a Pratyeka Buddha,(5) with whom the deer were regularly in the habit of stopping for the night. When the World-honoured one was about to attain to perfect Wisdom, the devas sang in the sky, “The son of king Suddhodana, having quitted his family and studied the Path (of Wisdom),(6) will now in seven days become Buddha.” The Pratyeka Buddha heard their words, and immediately attained to nirvâna; and hence this place was named “The Park of the rishi’s Deer-wild.”(7) After the World-honoured one had attained to perfect Wisdom, men build the vihâra in it.
Continuing on the same path and heading further west, he reached the city of Varanasi in the kingdom of Kasi after twelve yojanas. A little more than ten leagues to the northeast of the city, he found the vihâra in the park called “The Rishi’s Deer-Wild.” In this park, there used to be a Pratyeka Buddha, with whom the deer would often spend the night. When the World-Honored One was about to achieve perfect Wisdom, the devas sang in the sky, “The son of King Suddhodana, having left his family and followed the Path of Wisdom, will now become a Buddha in seven days.” The Pratyeka Buddha heard their words and immediately attained nirvâna; that’s why this place was named “The Park of the Rishi’s Deer-Wild.” After the World-Honored One attained perfect Wisdom, people built the vihâra there.
Buddha wished to convert Kaundinya(8) and his four companions; but they, (being aware of his intention), said to one another, “This Sramana Gotama(9) for six years continued in the practice of painful austerities, eating daily (only) a single hemp-seed, and one grain of rice, without attaining to the Path (of Wisdom); how much less will he do so now that he has entered (again) among men, and is giving the reins to (the indulgence of) his body, his speech, and his thoughts! What has he to do with the Path (of Wisdom)? To-day, when he comes to us, let us be on our guard not to speak with him.” At the places where the five men all rose up, and respectfully saluted (Buddha), when he came to them; where, sixty paces north from this, he sat with his face to the east, and first turned the wheel of the Law, converting Kaundinya and the four others; where, twenty paces further to the north, he delivered his prophecy concerning Maitreya;(10) and where, at a distance of fifty paces to the south, the dragon Elapattra(11) asked him, “When shall I get free from this naga body?”—at all these places topes were reared, and are still existing. In (the park) there are two monasteries, in both of which there are monks residing.
Buddha wanted to convert Kaundinya and his four companions; however, they, aware of his intention, said to each other, “This Sramana Gotama has spent six years practicing painful austerities, eating only a single hemp seed and one grain of rice each day, without finding the Path of Wisdom; how much less will he do so now that he has returned to society and is indulging his body, speech, and thoughts! What does he have to do with the Path of Wisdom? Today, when he comes to us, we should be careful not to speak with him.” When the five men stood up and respectfully greeted Buddha upon his arrival, he sat down with his face to the east sixty paces north from this spot and first turned the wheel of the Law, converting Kaundinya and the others. Twenty paces further north, he foretold the coming of Maitreya; and fifty paces to the south, the dragon Elapattra asked him, “When will I be free from this naga body?” At all these locations, memorials were built, and they still exist today. In the park, there are two monasteries, both of which have monks living in them.
When you go north-west from the vihâra of the Deer-wild park for thirteen yojanas, there is a kingdom named Kausambi.(12) Its vihâra is named Ghochiravana(13)—a place where Buddha formerly resided. Now, as of old, there is a company of monks there, most of whom are students of the hinayana.
When you head northwest from the vihāra of the Deer-wild park for thirteen yojanas, you'll find a kingdom called Kausambi.(12) Its vihāra is called Ghochiravana(13)—a place where the Buddha once stayed. Just like before, there is a group of monks there, most of whom are followers of the hinayana.
East from (this), when you have travelled eight yojanas, is the place where Buddha converted(14) the evil demon. There, and where he walked (in meditation) and sat at the place which was his regular abode, there have been topes erected. There is also a monastery, which may contain more than a hundred monks.
East from here, after traveling eight yojanas, is the spot where Buddha converted the evil demon. At that location, where he walked in meditation and sat at his usual place, there are topes built. There's also a monastery, which might have more than a hundred monks.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Fâ-Hien is here mentioned singly, as in the account of his visit to the cave on Gridhra-kuta. I think that Tao-ching may have remained at Patna after their first visit to it.
(1) Fâ-Hien is mentioned alone here, like in the story of his trip to the cave on Gridhra-kuta. I believe that Tao-ching might have stayed in Patna after their initial visit.
(2) See chap. xxvii, note 1.
(2) See chap. 27, note 1.
(3) “The city surrounded by rivers;” the modern Benares, lat. 25° 23′ N., lon. 83° 5′ E.
(3) “The city surrounded by rivers;” the modern Varanasi, lat. 25° 23′ N., lon. 83° 5′ E.
(4) “The rishi,” says Eitel, “is a man whose bodily frame has undergone a certain transformation by dint of meditation and ascetism, so that he is, for an indefinite period, exempt from decrepitude, age, and death. As this period is believed to extend far beyond the usual duration of human life, such persons are called, and popularly believed to be, immortals.” Rishis are divided into various classes; and rishi-ism is spoken of as a seventh part of transrotation, and rishis are referred to as the seventh class of sentient beings. Taoism, as well as Buddhism, has its Seen jin.
(4) “The rishi,” says Eitel, “is a person whose body has undergone a certain transformation through meditation and asceticism, allowing them to be free from aging, weakness, and death for an indefinite amount of time. Since this period is thought to last much longer than the typical human lifespan, these individuals are referred to as, and are popularly believed to be, immortals.” Rishis are categorized into different classes; rishi-ism is considered a seventh aspect of transrotation, and rishis are described as the seventh category of sentient beings. Taoism, as well as Buddhism, has its Seen jin.
(5) See chap. xiii, note 15.
(5) See chap. xiii, note 15.
(6) See chap. xxii, note 2.
(6) See chap. xxii, note 2.
(7) For another legend about this park, and the identification of “a fine wood” still existing, see note in Beal’s first version, p. 135.
(7) For another story about this park, and the identification of “a fine wood” that still exists, see the note in Beal’s first version, p. 135.
(8) A prince of Magadha and a maternal uncle of Sâkyamuni, who gave him the name of Ajnata, meaning automat; and hence he often appears as Ajnata Kaundinya. He and his four friends had followed Sâkyamuni into the Uruvilva desert, sympathising with him in the austerities he endured, and hoping that they would issue in his Buddhaship. They were not aware that that issue had come; which may show us that all the accounts in the thirty-first chapter are merely descriptions, by means of external imagery, of what had taken place internally. The kingdom of nirvâna had come without observation. These friends knew it not; and they were offended by what they considered Sâkyamuni’s failure, and the course he was now pursuing. See the account of their conversion in M. B., p. 186.
(8) A prince from Magadha and the maternal uncle of Sâkyamuni, who gave him the name Ajnata, meaning "the unknown," and so he often appears as Ajnata Kaundinya. He and his four friends followed Sâkyamuni into the Uruvilva desert, sympathizing with him in the hardships he faced, hoping that they would lead to his enlightenment. They didn’t realize that enlightenment had already occurred; this suggests that all the details in the thirty-first chapter are just descriptions, using external imagery, of what had actually happened internally. The state of nirvana had arrived unnoticed. These friends were unaware of it and were upset by what they thought was Sâkyamuni’s failure and the path he was now taking. See the account of their conversion in M. B., p. 186.
(9) This is the only instance in Fâ-Hien’s text where the Bodhisattva or Buddha is called by the surname “Gotama.” For the most part our traveller uses Buddha as a proper name, though it properly means “The Enlightened.” He uses also the combinations “Sakya Buddha,”=“The Buddha of the Sakya tribe,” and “Sâkyamuni,”=“The Sakya sage.” This last is the most common designation of the Buddha in China, and to my mind best combines the characteristics of a descriptive and a proper name. Among other Buddhistic peoples “Gotama” and “Gotama Buddha” are the more frequent designations. It is not easy to account for the rise of the surname Gotama in the Sakya family, as Oldenberg acknowledges. He says that “the Sakyas, in accordance with the custom of Indian noble families, had borrowed it from one of the ancient Vedic bard families.” Dr. Davids (“Buddhism,” p. 27) says: “The family name was certainly Gautama,” adding in a note, “It is a curious fact that Gautama is still the family name of the Rajput chiefs of Nagara, the village which has been identified with Kapilavastu.” Dr. Eitel says that “Gautama was the sacerdotal name of the Sakya family, which counted the ancient rishi Gautama among its ancestors.” When we proceed, however, to endeavour to trace the connexion of that Brahmanical rishi with the Sakya house, by means of 1323, 1468, 1469, and other historical works in Nanjio’s Catalogue, we soon find that Indian histories have no surer foundation than the shifting sand;—see E. H., on the name Sakya, pp. 108, 109. We must be content for the present simply to accept Gotama as one of the surnames of the Buddha with whom we have to do.
(9) This is the only instance in Fâ-Hien’s text where the Bodhisattva or Buddha is referred to by the surname “Gotama.” Most of the time, our traveler uses Buddha as a proper name, although it literally means “The Enlightened.” He also uses the combinations “Sakya Buddha,” meaning “The Buddha of the Sakya tribe,” and “Sâkyamuni,” which translates to “The Sakya sage.” The latter is the most common term for the Buddha in China, and I believe it best merges the descriptive and proper naming conventions. Among other Buddhist communities, “Gotama” and “Gotama Buddha” are the more commonly used names. It isn’t easy to explain how the surname Gotama came to be in the Sakya family, as Oldenberg points out. He notes that “the Sakyas, following the tradition of Indian noble families, borrowed it from one of the ancient Vedic bard families.” Dr. Davids (“Buddhism,” p. 27) states: “The family name was definitely Gautama,” adding in a note, “It’s interesting that Gautama is still the family name of the Rajput chiefs of Nagara, the village identified with Kapilavastu.” Dr. Eitel mentions that “Gautama was the priestly name of the Sakya family, which counted the ancient rishi Gautama among its ancestors.” However, when we try to follow the connection of that Brahmanical rishi with the Sakya house, using sources like 1323, 1468, 1469, and other historical works in Nanjio’s Catalogue, we quickly discover that Indian histories are built on shifting sands;—see E. H., on the name Sakya, pp. 108, 109. For now, we must accept Gotama as one of the surnames of the Buddha we are discussing.
(10) See chap. vi, note 5. It is there said that the prediction of Maitreya’s succession to the Buddhaship was made to him in the Tushita heaven. Was there a repetition of it here in the Deer-park, or was a prediction now given concerning something else?
(10) See chap. vi, note 5. It mentions that the prediction of Maitreya’s succession to the Buddhaship was made to him in the Tushita heaven. Was this repeated here in the Deer-park, or was a new prediction given about something else?
(11) Nothing seems to be known of this naga but what we read here.
(11) We don’t really know anything about this naga except what we read here.
(12) Identified by some with Kusia, near Kurrah (lat. 25° 41′ N., lon. 81° 27′ E.); by others with Kosam on the Jumna, thirty miles above Allahabad. See E. H., p. 55.
(12) Some identify it with Kusia, near Kurrah (lat. 25° 41′ N., lon. 81° 27′ E.); others associate it with Kosam on the Jumna, thirty miles above Allahabad. See E. H., p. 55.
(13) Ghochira was the name of a Vaisya elder, or head, who presented a garden and vihâra to Buddha. Hardy (M. B., p. 356) quotes a statement from a Singhalese authority that Sâkyamuni resided here during the ninth year of his Buddhaship.
(13) Ghochira was the name of a Vaisya elder, or leader, who gave a garden and vihâra to Buddha. Hardy (M. B., p. 356) cites a claim from a Singhalese source that Sâkyamuni lived here during the ninth year of his Buddhahood.
(14) Dr. Davids thinks this may refer to the striking and beautiful story of the conversion of the Yakkha Alavaka, as related in the Uragavagga, Alavakasutta, pp. 29-31 (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x, part ii).
(14) Dr. Davids believes this might refer to the impressive and beautiful story of the conversion of the Yakkha Alavaka, as described in the Uragavagga, Alavakasutta, pp. 29-31 (Sacred Books of the East, vol. x, part ii).
CHAPTER XXXV.
DAKSHINA, AND THE PIGEON MONASTERY.
South from this 200 yojanas, there is a country named Dakshina,(1) where there is a monastery (dedicated to) the bygone Kasyapa Buddha, and which has been hewn out from a large hill of rock. It consists in all of five storeys;—the lowest, having the form of an elephant, with 500 apartments in the rock; the second, having the form of a lion, with 400 apartments; the third, having the form of a horse, with 300 apartments; the fourth, having the form of an ox, with 200 apartments; and the fifth, having the form of a pigeon, with 100 apartments. At the very top there is a spring, the water of which, always in front of the apartments in the rock, goes round among the rooms, now circling, now curving, till in this way it arrives at the lowest storey, having followed the shape of the structure, and flows out there at the door. Everywhere in the apartments of the monks, the rock has been pierced so as to form windows for the admission of light, so that they are all bright, without any being left in darkness. At the four corners of the (tiers of) apartments, the rock has been hewn so as to form steps for ascending to the top (of each). The men of the present day, being of small size, and going up step by step, manage to get to the top; but in a former age, they did so at one step.(2) Because of this, the monastery is called Paravata, that being the Indian name for a pigeon. There are always Arhats residing in it.
South of this 200 yojanas, there's a country called Dakshina, which has a monastery dedicated to the ancient Kasyapa Buddha, carved out of a large rock hill. It has five levels in total: the lowest resembles an elephant, with 500 rooms; the second looks like a lion, with 400 rooms; the third is shaped like a horse, with 300 rooms; the fourth takes the form of an ox, with 200 rooms; and the fifth is shaped like a pigeon, with 100 rooms. At the very top, there's a spring whose water, always in front of the rock rooms, flows around the spaces, sometimes circling and sometimes curving, until it reaches the lowest level, following the contours of the structure and flowing out at the door. Throughout the monks' rooms, the rock has been carved to create windows that allow light in, ensuring they are all bright and none are left in darkness. At the four corners of the tiers of rooms, steps have been carved into the rock to reach the top. People today, being smaller in stature, climb up step by step to reach the top, but in the past, they could do it in one leap. Because of this, the monastery is called Paravata, which is the Indian word for pigeon. There are always Arhats living there.
The country about is (a tract of) uncultivated hillocks,(3) without inhabitants. At a very long distance from the hill there are villages, where the people all have bad and erroneous views, and do not know the Sramanas of the Law of Buddha, Brahmanas, or (devotees of) any of the other and different schools. The people of that country are constantly seeing men on the wing, who come and enter this monastery. On one occasion, when devotees of various countries came to perform their worship at it, the people of those villages said to them, “Why do you not fly? The devotees whom we have seen hereabouts all fly;” and the strangers answered, on the spur of the moment, “Our wings are not yet fully formed.”
The surrounding area is a stretch of uncultivated hills with no residents. Far from these hills, there are villages where the people hold misguided beliefs and have no knowledge of the Sramanas, the teachings of Buddha, the Brahmanas, or any of the other various schools. The locals often see individuals arriving at this monastery. One day, when worshippers from different regions came to practice here, the villagers asked them, “Why don’t you fly? The worshippers we’ve seen around here can all fly.” The visitors replied quickly, “Our wings aren’t fully developed yet.”
The kingdom of Dakshina is out of the way, and perilous to traverse. There are difficulties in connexion with the roads; but those who know how to manage such difficulties and wish to proceed should bring with them money and various articles, and give them to the king. He will then send men to escort them. These will (at different stages) pass them over to others, who will show them the shortest routes. Fâ-Hien, however, was after all unable to go there; but having received the (above) accounts from men of the country, he has narrated them.
The kingdom of Dakshina is remote and dangerous to navigate. The roads present various challenges, but those who know how to handle these obstacles and want to continue should bring money and other items to give to the king. He will then send people to guide them. These guides will pass them off to others at different points along the way, who will show them the quickest routes. However, Fâ-Hien ultimately couldn't make the journey; instead, he shared the information he received from locals.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Said to be the ancient name of the Deccan. As to the various marvels in the chapter, it must be borne in mind that our author, as he tells us at the end, only gives them from hearsay. See “Buddhist Records of the Western World,” vol. ii, pp. 214, 215, where the description, however, is very different.
(1) Considered to be the old name for the Deccan. Regarding the different wonders mentioned in the chapter, keep in mind that the author, as he states at the end, shares them based only on what he’s heard. Check “Buddhist Records of the Western World,” vol. ii, pp. 214, 215, where the description is quite different.
(2) Compare the account of Buddha’s great stride of fifteen yojanas in Ceylon, as related in chapter xxxviii.
(2) Compare the story of Buddha’s impressive fifteen yojanas stride in Ceylon, as mentioned in chapter xxxviii.
(3) See the same phrase in the Books of the Later Han dynasty, the twenty-fourth Book of Biographies, p. 9b.
(3) See the same phrase in the Books of the Later Han dynasty, the twenty-fourth Book of Biographies, p. 9b.
CHAPTER XXXVI.
IN PATNA. FÂ-HIEN’S LABOURS IN TRANSCRIPTION OF MANUSCRIPTS, AND INDIAN
STUDIES FOR THREE YEARS.
From Varanasi (the travellers) went back east to Pataliputtra. Fâ-Hien’s original object had been to search for (copies of) the Vinaya. In the various kingdoms of North India, however, he had found one master transmitting orally (the rules) to another, but no written copies which he could transcribe. He had therefore travelled far and come on to Central India. Here, in the mahayana monastery,(1) he found a copy of the Vinaya, containing the Mahasanghika(2) rules,—those which were observed in the first Great Council, while Buddha was still in the world. The original copy was handed down in the Jetavana vihâra. As to the other eighteen schools,(3) each one has the views and decisions of its own masters. Those agree (with this) in the general meaning, but they have small and trivial differences, as when one opens and another shuts.(4) This copy (of the rules), however, is the most complete, with the fullest explanations.(5)
From Varanasi, the travelers went back east to Pataliputtra. Fâ-Hien’s original goal had been to search for copies of the Vinaya. However, in the different kingdoms of North India, he found one master teaching the rules to another orally but no written copies he could transcribe. Therefore, he traveled far and headed to Central India. There, in the Mahayana monastery,(1) he found a copy of the Vinaya that contained the Mahasanghika(2) rules—those that were followed during the first Great Council while Buddha was still alive. The original copy was passed down in the Jetavana vihāra. Regarding the other eighteen schools,(3) each one has its own views and decisions from its masters. They agree in general meaning, but they have minor and trivial differences, like when one opens a door and another closes it.(4) This copy (of the rules), however, is the most complete, with the fullest explanations.(5)
He further got a transcript of the rules in six or seven thousand gathas,(6) being the sarvastivadah(7) rules,—those which are observed by the communities of monks in the land of Ts’in; which also have all been handed down orally from master to master without being committed to writing. In the community here, moreover, we got the Samyuktabhi-dharma-hridaya-(sastra),(8) containing about six or seven thousand gathas; he also got a Sutra of 2500 gathas; one chapter of the Parinir-vana-vaipulya Sutra,(9) of about 5000 gathas; and the Mahasan-ghikah Abhidharma.
He also obtained a transcript of the rules in around six or seven thousand verses, which are the Sarvastivadah rules—those followed by the monk communities in the land of Ts’in. These rules have all been passed down orally from teacher to teacher without being written down. In our community, we also received the Samyuktabhidharma-hridaya-sastra, which contains about six or seven thousand verses; he further acquired a Sutra of 2500 verses; one chapter of the Parinirvana-vaipulya Sutra, which has about 5000 verses; and the Mahasanghika Abhidharma.
In consequence (of this success in his quest) Fâ-Hien stayed here for three years, learning Sanskrit books and the Sanskrit speech, and writing out the Vinaya rules. When Tao-ching arrived in the Central Kingdom, and saw the rules observed by the Sramanas, and the dignified demeanour in their societies which he remarked under all occurring circumstances, he sadly called to mind in what a mutilated and imperfect condition the rules were among the monkish communities in the land of Ts’in, and made the following aspiration:—“From this time forth till I come to the state of Buddha, let me not be born in a frontier land.”(10) He remained accordingly (in India), and did not return (to the land of Han). Fâ-Hien, however, whose original purpose had been to secure the introduction of the complete Vinaya rules into the land of Han, returned there alone.
As a result of his success, Fâ-Hien stayed there for three years, learning Sanskrit texts and the Sanskrit language, while writing out the Vinaya rules. When Tao-ching arrived in the Central Kingdom and observed how the Sramanas followed the rules and the dignified behavior in their communities in various situations, he sadly remembered how distorted and incomplete the rules were among the monk communities in the land of Ts’in, and made the following wish: “From this time on, until I reach the state of Buddha, let me not be born in a frontier land.” He then decided to stay in India and did not return to the land of Han. However, Fâ-Hien, whose original goal had been to bring the complete Vinaya rules to the land of Han, returned there alone.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Mentioned before in chapter xxvii.
(1) Mentioned earlier in chapter 27.
(2) Mahasanghikah simply means “the Great Assembly,” that is, of monks. When was this first assembly in the time of Sâkyamuni held? It does not appear that the rules observed at it were written down at the time. The document found by Fâ-Hien would be a record of those rules; or rather a copy of that record. We must suppose that the original record had disappeared from the Jetavana vihâra, or Fâ-Hien would probably have spoken of it when he was there, and copied it, if he had been allowed to do so.
(2) Mahasanghikah simply means “the Great Assembly” of monks. When was this first assembly held during Sâkyamuni's time? It seems the rules followed at that assembly weren't written down then. The document found by Fâ-Hien would be a record of those rules, or rather a copy of that record. We must assume that the original record had vanished from the Jetavana vihâra, or Fâ-Hien would likely have mentioned it while he was there and copied it if he had been permitted to do so.
(3) The eighteen pu {.}. Four times in this chapter the character called pu occurs, and in the first and two last instances it can only have the meaning, often belonging to it, of “copy.” The second instance, however, is different. How should there be eighteen copies, all different from the original, and from one another, in minor matters? We are compelled to translate—“the eighteen schools,” an expression well known in all Buddhist writings. See Rhys Davids’ Manual, p. 218, and the authorities there quoted.
(3) The eighteen pu {.}. In this chapter, the term pu appears four times, and in the first and the last two instances, it clearly means “copy,” which is a common definition. However, the second instance is different. How can there be eighteen copies, all distinct from the original and from each other in subtle ways? We must translate this as “the eighteen schools,” a term widely recognized in all Buddhist texts. See Rhys Davids’ Manual, p. 218, and the cited authorities there.
(4) This is equivalent to the “binding” and “loosing,” “opening” and “shutting,” which found their way into the New Testament, and the Christian Church, from the schools of the Jewish Rabbins.
(4) This is the same as the "binding" and "loosing," "opening" and "shutting," which came into the New Testament and the Christian Church from the teachings of the Jewish Rabbis.
(5) It was afterwards translated by Fâ-Hien into Chinese. See Nanjio’s Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka, columns 400 and 401, and Nos. 1119 and 1150, columns 247 and 253.
(5) It was later translated by Fâ-Hien into Chinese. See Nanjio’s Catalogue of the Chinese Tripitaka, columns 400 and 401, and Nos. 1119 and 1150, columns 247 and 253.
(6) A gatha is a stanza, generally consisting, it has seemed to me, of a few, commonly of two, lines somewhat metrically arranged; but I do not know that its length is strictly defined.
(6) A gatha is a stanza, usually made up of a few lines, often two, arranged in a somewhat metrical way; but I'm not sure if there's a strict definition for its length.
(7) “A branch,” says Eitel, “of the great vaibhashika school, asserting the reality of all visible phenomena, and claiming the authority of Rahula.”
(7) "A branch," Eitel says, "of the great vaibhashika school, which asserts the reality of all visible phenomena and claims the authority of Rahula."
(8) See Nanjio’s Catalogue, No. 1287. He does not mention it in his account of Fâ-Hien, who, he says, translated the Samyukta-pitaka Sutra.
(8) See Nanjio’s Catalogue, No. 1287. He doesn't mention it in his account of Fâ-Hien, who, according to him, translated the Samyukta-pitaka Sutra.
(9) Probably Nanjio’s Catalogue, No. 120; at any rate, connected with it.
(9) Likely Nanjio’s Catalogue, No. 120; in any case, related to it.
(10) This then would be the consummation of the Sramana’s being,—to get to be Buddha, the Buddha of his time in his Kalpa; and Tao-ching thought that he could attain to this consummation by a succession of births; and was likely to attain to it sooner by living only in India. If all this was not in his mind, he yet felt that each of his successive lives would be happier, if lived in India.
(10) This would be the ultimate goal of the Sramana’s existence—to become Buddha, the Buddha of his time in his Kalpa; and Tao-ching believed that he could achieve this goal through a series of lifetimes and would likely reach it sooner by living solely in India. Even if this wasn’t fully in his thoughts, he still sensed that each of his future lives would be happier if spent in India.
CHAPTER XXXVII.
TO CHAMPA AND TAMALIPTI. STAY AND LABOURS THERE FOR THREE YEARS. TAKES SHIP TO
SINGHALA, OR CEYLON.
Following the course of the Ganges, and descending eastwards for eighteen yojanas, he found on the southern bank the great kingdom of Champa,(1) with topes reared at the places where Buddha walked in meditation by his vihâra, and where he and the three Buddhas, his predecessors, sat. There were monks residing at them all. Continuing his journey east for nearly fifty yojanas, he came to the country of Tamalipti,(2) (the capital of which is) a seaport. In the country there are twenty-two monasteries, at all of which there are monks residing. The Law of Buddha is also flourishing in it. Here Fâ-Hien stayed two years, writing out his Sûtras,(3) and drawing pictures of images.
Following the course of the Ganges and heading east for eighteen yojanas, he discovered the great kingdom of Champa on the southern bank, where tope monuments were built at the places where Buddha meditated near his vihâra, and where he and the three Buddhas before him sat. Monks were living at all of these sites. Continuing his journey east for nearly fifty yojanas, he reached the country of Tamalipti, which is a seaport and its capital. In this country, there are twenty-two monasteries, all of which have monks residing there. The Law of Buddha is also thriving here. Fâ-Hien stayed for two years, copying out his Sûtras and drawing images of the Buddha.
After this he embarked in a large merchant-vessel, and went floating over the sea to the south-west. It was the beginning of winter, and the wind was favourable; and, after fourteen days, sailing day and night, they came to the country of Singhala.(4) The people said that it was distant (from Tamalipti) about 700 yojanas.
After this, he boarded a large merchant ship and set out over the sea to the southwest. It was the start of winter, and the wind was favorable. After sailing day and night for fourteen days, they arrived in the country of Singhala. The people said it was about 700 yojanas away from Tamalipti.
The kingdom is on a large island, extending from east to west fifty yojanas, and from north to south thirty. Left and right from it there are as many as 100 small islands, distant from one another ten, twenty, or even 200 le; but all subject to the large island. Most of them produce pearls and precious stones of various kinds; there is one which produces the pure and brilliant pearl,(5)—an island which would form a square of about ten le. The king employs men to watch and protect it, and requires three out of every ten such pearls, which the collectors find.
The kingdom is on a large island that stretches fifty yojanas from east to west and thirty yojanas from north to south. Surrounding it are about 100 small islands, spaced ten, twenty, or even 200 le apart, but all under the authority of the large island. Most of these islands produce pearls and various precious stones; one in particular produces a pure and brilliant pearl—an island that covers about ten le. The king hires men to monitor and protect it and takes three out of every ten pearls that the collectors find.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Probably the modern Champanagur, three miles west of Baglipoor, lat. 25° 14′ N., lon. 56° 55′ E.
(1) Probably the modern Champanagur, three miles west of Baglipoor, lat. 25° 14′ N., lon. 56° 55′ E.
(2) Then the principal emporium for the trade with Ceylon and China; the modern Tam-look, lat. 22° 17′ N., lon. 88° 2′ E.; near the mouth of the Hoogly.
(2) Then the main hub for trade with Ceylon and China; the modern Tam-look, lat. 22° 17′ N., lon. 88° 2′ E.; near the mouth of the Hoogly.
(3) Perhaps Ching {.} is used here for any portions of the Tripitaka which he had obtained.
(3) Maybe Ching {.} is used here for any parts of the Tripitaka that he had gotten.
(4) “The Kingdom of the Lion,” Ceylon. Singhala was the name of a merchant adventurer from India, to whom the founding of the kingdom was ascribed. His father was named Singha, “the Lion,” which became the name of the country;—Singhala, or Singha-Kingdom, “the Country of the Lion.”
(4) “The Kingdom of the Lion,” Ceylon. Singhala was the name of a merchant adventurer from India who is credited with founding the kingdom. His father was named Singha, “the Lion,” which became the name of the country:—Singhala, or Singha-Kingdom, “the Country of the Lion.”
(5) Called the mani pearl or bead. Mani is explained as meaning “free from stain,” “bright and growing purer.” It is a symbol of Buddha and of his Law. The most valuable rosaries are made of manis.
(5) Known as the mani pearl or bead. Mani means "free from stain," "bright and becoming purer." It symbolizes Buddha and his teachings. The most valuable rosaries are made from manis.
CHAPTER XXXVIII.
AT CEYLON. RISE OF THE KINGDOM. FEATS OF BUDDHA. TOPES AND MONASTERIES. STATUE
OF BUDDHA IN JADE. BO TREE. FESTIVAL OF BUDDHA’S TOOTH.
The country originally had no human inhabitants,(1) but was occupied only by spirits and nagas, with which merchants of various countries carried on a trade. When the trafficking was taking place, the spirits did not show themselves. They simply set forth their precious commodities, with labels of the price attached to them; while the merchants made their purchases according to the price; and took the things away.
The country initially had no human residents,(1) but was inhabited only by spirits and nagas, with whom merchants from different countries engaged in trade. When the trading occurred, the spirits remained hidden. They simply displayed their valuable goods, each marked with a price tag; meanwhile, the merchants bought the items based on the prices and took them away.
Through the coming and going of the merchants (in this way), when they went away, the people of (their) various countries heard how pleasant the land was, and flocked to it in numbers till it became a great nation. The (climate) is temperate and attractive, without any difference of summer and winter. The vegetation is always luxuriant. Cultivation proceeds whenever men think fit: there are no fixed seasons for it.
As merchants came and went, people from various countries heard about how lovely the land was and flocked to it in large numbers until it became a great nation. The climate is mild and appealing, without distinct summer or winter. The vegetation is always lush. Farming happens whenever people decide; there are no set seasons for it.
When Buddha came to this country,(2) wishing to transform the wicked nagas, by his supernatural power he planted one foot at the north of the royal city, and the other on the top of a mountain,(3) the two being fifteen yojanas apart. Over the footprint at the north of the city the king built a large tope, 400 cubits high, grandly adorned with gold and silver, and finished with a combination of all the precious substances. By the side of the top he further built a monastery, called the Abhayagiri,(4) where there are (now) five thousand monks. There is in it a hall of Buddha, adorned with carved and inlaid works of gold and silver, and rich in the seven precious substances, in which there is an image (of Buddha) in green jade, more than twenty cubits in height, glittering all over with those substances, and having an appearance of solemn dignity which words cannot express. In the palm of the right hand there is a priceless pearl. Several years had now elapsed since Fâ-Hien left the land of Han; the men with whom he had been in intercourse had all been of regions strange to him; his eyes had not rested on an old and familiar hill or river, plant or tree; his fellow-travellers, moreover, had been separated from him, some by death, and others flowing off in different directions; no face or shadow was now with him but his own, and a constant sadness was in his heart. Suddenly (one day), when by the side of this image of jade, he saw a merchant presenting as his offering a fan of white silk;(5) and the tears of sorrow involuntarily filled his eyes and fell down.
When Buddha came to this country, wanting to change the wicked nagas, he used his supernatural power to place one foot at the north of the royal city and the other on the top of a mountain, the two being fifteen yojanas apart. Over the footprint at the north of the city, the king built a large stupa, 400 cubits high, beautifully decorated with gold and silver, completed with all kinds of precious materials. Next to the stupa, he also built a monastery called the Abhayagiri, which now houses five thousand monks. Inside, there is a hall dedicated to Buddha, adorned with intricate gold and silver carvings and rich in the seven precious substances, containing an image of Buddha in green jade, more than twenty cubits tall, shimmering with those materials and exuding an indescribable solemn dignity. In the palm of the right hand, there is a priceless pearl. Several years had passed since Fâ-Hien left the land of Han; everyone he had interacted with was from unfamiliar regions. He hadn’t seen any old and familiar hills, rivers, plants, or trees. Additionally, his fellow travelers had been separated from him, some by death and others by going their separate ways; he was left alone with just his own reflection, and a deep sadness filled his heart. Then one day, while by the side of this jade image, he saw a merchant offering a fan made of white silk, and tears of sorrow unexpectedly filled his eyes and fell.
A former king of the country had sent to Central India and got a slip of the patra tree,(6) which he planted by the side of the hall of Buddha, where a tree grew up to the height of about 200 cubits. As it bent on one side towards the south-east, the king, fearing it would fall, propped it with a post eight or nine spans round. The tree began to grow at the very heart of the prop, where it met (the trunk); (a shoot) pierced through the post, and went down to the ground, where it entered and formed roots, that rose (to the surface) and were about four spans round. Although the post was split in the middle, the outer portions kept hold (of the shoot), and people did not remove them. Beneath the tree there has been built a vihâra, in which there is an image (of Buddha) seated, which the monks and commonalty reverence and look up to without ever becoming wearied. In the city there has been reared also the vihâra of Buddha’s tooth, on which, as well as on the other, the seven precious substances have been employed.
A former king of the country sent to Central India and obtained a slip of the patra tree, which he planted beside the hall of Buddha, where a tree grew to about 200 cubits tall. As it leaned to one side toward the southeast, the king, worried it might fall, supported it with a post that was eight or nine spans around. The tree began to grow at the very center of the post where it met the trunk; a shoot broke through the post and went down to the ground, where it entered and formed roots that rose to the surface and were about four spans thick. Even though the post was split in the middle, the outer parts held onto the shoot, and people did not remove them. Beneath the tree, a vihâra has been built, in which there is a seated image of Buddha that both monks and the general public revere and look up to without ever getting tired. In the city, there is also the vihâra of Buddha’s tooth, which, like the other, has been adorned with seven precious substances.
The king practises the Brahmanical purifications, and the sincerity of the faith and reverence of the population inside the city are also great. Since the establishment of government in the kingdom there has been no famine or scarcity, no revolution or disorder. In the treasuries of the monkish communities there are many precious stones, and the priceless manis. One of the kings (once) entered one of those treasuries, and when he looked all round and saw the priceless pearls, his covetous greed was excited, and he wished to take them to himself by force. In three days, however, he came to himself, and immediately went and bowed his head to the ground in the midst of the monks, to show his repentance of the evil thought. As a sequel to this, he informed the monks (of what had been in his mind), and desired them to make a regulation that from that day forth the king should not be allowed to enter the treasury and see (what it contained), and that no bhikshu should enter it till after he had been in orders for a period of full forty years.(7)
The king practices the Brahmanical purifications, and the faith and respect of the people in the city are quite strong. Since the government was established in the kingdom, there has been no famine or scarcity, and no revolts or chaos. The monk communities hold many valuable gems and priceless manis. Once, a king entered one of those treasuries, and as he looked around and saw the priceless pearls, his greedy desires were stirred, and he wanted to take them for himself. However, after three days, he came to his senses and immediately went to bow his head to the ground in front of the monks to show his remorse for the evil thought. As a result, he told the monks what had been on his mind and asked them to create a rule that from that day on, the king should not be allowed to enter the treasury or see what it contained, and that no bhikshu should enter it until they had been ordained for a full forty years.
In the city there are many Vaisya elders and Sabaean(8) merchants, whose houses are stately and beautiful. The lanes and passages are kept in good order. At the heads of the four principal streets there have been built preaching halls, where, on the eighth, fourteenth, and fifteenth days of the month, they spread carpets, and set forth a pulpit, while the monks and commonalty from all quarters come together to hear the Law. The people say that in the kingdom there may be altogether sixty thousand monks, who get their food from their common stores. The king, besides, prepares elsewhere in the city a common supply of food for five or six thousand more. When any want, they take their great bowls, and go (to the place of distribution), and take as much as the vessels will hold, all returning with them full.
In the city, there are many wealthy Vaisya elders and Sabaean merchants, whose homes are impressive and beautiful. The streets and alleys are well-maintained. At the ends of the four main streets, preaching halls have been built where, on the eighth, fourteenth, and fifteenth days of the month, they lay out carpets and set up a pulpit, while monks and community members from all around gather to hear the teachings. People say that there are about sixty thousand monks in the kingdom who rely on communal food supplies. Additionally, the king arranges a shared food supply elsewhere in the city for an extra five or six thousand. Whenever there is a need, they grab their large bowls, head to the distribution point, and take as much food as their bowls can hold, all returning with them full.
The tooth of Buddha is always brought forth in the middle of the third month. Ten days beforehand the king grandly caparisons a large elephant, on which he mounts a man who can speak distinctly, and is dressed in royal robes, to beat a large drum, and make the following proclamation:—“The Bodhisattva, during three Asankhyeya-kalpas,(9) manifested his activity, and did not spare his own life. He gave up kingdom, city, wife, and son; he plucked out his eyes and gave them to another;(10) he cut off a piece of his own flesh to ransom the life of a dove;(10) he cut off his head and gave it as an alms;(11) he gave his body to feed a starving tigress;(11) he grudged not his marrow and his brains. In many such ways as these did he undergo pain for the sake of all living. And so it was, that, having become Buddha, he continued in the world for forty-five years, preaching his Law, teaching and transforming, so that those who had no rest found rest, and the unconverted were converted. When his connexion with the living was completed,(12) he attained to pari-nirvâna (and died). Since that event, for 1497 years, the light of the world has gone out,(13) and all living beings have had long-continued sadness. Behold! ten days after this, Buddha’s tooth will be brought forth, and taken to the Abhayagiri-vihâra. Let all and each, whether monks or laics, who wish to amass merit for themselves, make the roads smooth and in good condition, grandly adorn the lanes and by-ways, and provide abundant store of flowers and incense to be used as offerings to it.”
The tooth of Buddha is always brought forward in the middle of the third month. Ten days before the event, the king decorates a large elephant, on which he places a man who can speak clearly, dressed in royal robes, to beat a large drum and make the following announcement:—“The Bodhisattva, over three Asankhyeya-kalpas,(9) exhibited extraordinary acts of compassion and did not hold back his own life. He gave up his kingdom, city, wife, and son; he even plucked out his eyes to give to someone else;(10) he cut off a piece of his own flesh to save the life of a dove;(10) he offered his head as an alms;(11) he gave his body to feed a starving tigress;(11) he didn't hesitate to sacrifice his marrow and his brains. In many such ways did he endure suffering for the sake of all living beings. Thus, having become Buddha, he remained in the world for forty-five years, preaching his teachings, educating, and transforming others, providing rest for the restless, and converting the unconverted. When his connection with the living was complete,(12) he attained pari-nirvâna (and died). Since that time, for 1497 years, the light of the world has dimmed,(13) and all living beings have experienced prolonged sorrow. Now, ten days from now, Buddha’s tooth will be brought forward and taken to the Abhayagiri-vihâra. Let everyone, monks and laypeople alike, who wish to gain merit for themselves, ensure the roads are smooth and well-maintained, richly decorate the paths and byways, and provide a generous supply of flowers and incense for offerings.”
When this proclamation is over, the king exhibits, so as to line both sides of the road, the five hundred different bodily forms in which the Bodhisattva has in the course of his history appeared:—here as Sudana,(14) there as Sama;(15) now as the king of elephants;(16) and then as a stag or a horse.(16) All these figures are brightly coloured and grandly executed, looking as if they were alive. After this the tooth of Buddha is brought forth, and is carried along in the middle of the road. Everywhere on the way offerings are presented to it, and thus it arrives at the hall of Buddha in the Abhayagiri-vihâra. There monks and laics are collected in crowds. They burn incense, light lamps, and perform all the prescribed services, day and night without ceasing, till ninety days have been completed, when (the tooth) is returned to the vihâra within the city. On fast-days the door of that vihâra is opened, and the forms of ceremonial reverence are observed according to the rules.
When this announcement is finished, the king displays, lining both sides of the road, the five hundred different forms the Bodhisattva has taken throughout his history: here as Sudana, there as Sama; now as the king of elephants, and then as a stag or a horse. All these figures are vividly colored and beautifully crafted, making them look almost alive. After this, the tooth of Buddha is brought out and carried along the middle of the road. All along the way, offerings are made to it, and it eventually reaches the hall of Buddha in the Abhayagiri-vihâra. There, monks and laypeople gather in huge crowds. They burn incense, light lamps, and carry out all the required rituals, day and night without stopping, until ninety days have passed, at which point the tooth is returned to the vihâra within the city. On fasting days, the door of that vihâra is opened, and the rituals of reverence are performed according to the established rules.
Forty le to the east of the Abhayagiri-vihâra there is a hill, with a vihâra on it, called the Chaitya,(17) where there may be 2000 monks. Among them there is a Sramana of great virtue, named Dharma-gupta,(18) honoured and looked up to by all the kingdom. He has lived for more than forty years in an apartment of stone, constantly showing such gentleness of heart, that he has brought snakes and rats to stop together in the same room, without doing one another any harm.
Forty miles east of the Abhayagiri-vihāra, there's a hill with a vihāra on it, called the Chaitya, where there are about 2000 monks. Among them is a virtuous Sramana named Dharma-gupta, who is respected and admired throughout the kingdom. He has lived for over forty years in a stone room, consistently showing such kindness that he has managed to bring snakes and rats together in the same space without harming each other.
NOTES
NOTES
(1) It is desirable to translate {.} {.}, for which “inhabitants” or “people” is elsewhere sufficient, here by “human inhabitants.” According to other accounts Singhala was originally occupied by Rakshasas or Rakshas, “demons who devour men,” and “beings to be feared,” monstrous cannibals or anthropophagi, the terror of the shipwrecked mariner. Our author’s “spirits” {.} {.} were of a gentler type. His dragons or nagas have come before us again and again.
(1) It’s better to translate {.} {.} as “human inhabitants” instead of just “inhabitants” or “people.” Other accounts say that Singhala was originally occupied by Rakshasas or Rakshas, “demons who devour men,” and “beings to be feared,” monstrous cannibals or anthropophagi, the nightmare of shipwrecked sailors. The “spirits” from our author {.} {.} were a gentler kind. His dragons or nagas have appeared before us repeatedly.
(2) That Sâkyamuni ever visited Ceylon is to me more than doubtful. Hardy, in M. B., pp. 207-213, has brought together the legends of three visits,—in the first, fifth, and eighth years of his Buddhaship. It is plain, however, from Fâ-Hien’s narrative, that in the beginning of our fifth century, Buddhism prevailed throughout the island. Davids in the last chapter of his “Buddhism” ascribes its introduction to one of Asoka’s missions, after the Council of Patna, under his son Mahinda, when Tissa, “the delight of the gods,” was king (B.C. 250-230).
(2) I seriously doubt that Sâkyamuni ever visited Ceylon. Hardy, in M. B., pp. 207-213, has compiled legends of three visits—in the first, fifth, and eighth years of his Buddhaship. However, Fâ-Hien’s account clearly shows that by the early fifth century, Buddhism was widespread across the island. Davids, in the last chapter of his “Buddhism,” attributes its introduction to one of Asoka’s missions after the Council of Patna, led by his son Mahinda, when Tissa, “the delight of the gods,” was king (B.C. 250-230).
(3) This would be what is known as “Adam’s peak,” having, according to Hardy (pp. 211, 212, notes), the three names of Selesumano, Samastakuta, and Samanila. “There is an indentation on the top of it,” a superficial hollow, 5 feet 3 34 inches long, and about 2 12 feet wide. The Hindus regard it as the footprint of Siva; the Mohameddans, as that of Adam; and the Buddhists, as in the text,—as having been made by Buddha.
(3) This is what is called “Adam’s Peak,” which, according to Hardy (pp. 211, 212, notes), has three names: Selesumano, Samastakuta, and Samanila. “There’s a dip at the top,” a shallow hollow that is 5 feet 3 3/4 inches long and about 2 1/2 feet wide. The Hindus see it as the footprint of Siva; the Muslims see it as that of Adam; and the Buddhists, as stated in the text, believe it was made by Buddha.
(4) Meaning “The Fearless Hill.” There is still the Abhayagiri tope, the highest in Ceylon, according to Davids, 250 feet in height, and built about B.C. 90, by Watta Gamini, in whose reign, about 160 years after the Council of Patna, and 330 years after the death of Sâkyamuni, the Tripitaka was first reduced to writing in Ceylon;—“Buddhism,” p. 234.
(4) Meaning "The Fearless Hill." There is still the Abhayagiri stupa, the tallest in Sri Lanka, according to Davids, standing at 250 feet in height, built around 90 B.C. by Watta Gamini, during whose reign, approximately 160 years after the Council of Patna and 330 years after the death of Sākyamuni, the Tripitaka was first written down in Sri Lanka;—“Buddhism,” p. 234.
(5) We naturally suppose that the merchant-offerer was a Chinese, as indeed the Chinese texts say, and the fan such as Fâ-Hien had seen and used in his native land.
(5) We naturally assume that the merchant-offerer was Chinese, as the Chinese texts indicate, and the fan was like the one Fâ-Hien had seen and used in his homeland.
(6) This should be the pippala, or bodhidruma, generally spoken of, in connexion with Buddha, as the Bo tree, under which he attained to the Buddhaship. It is strange our author should have confounded them as he seems to do. In what we are told of the tree here, we have, no doubt, his account of the planting, growth, and preservation of the famous Bo tree, which still exists in Ceylon. It has been stated in a previous note that Asoka’s son, Mahinda, went as the apostle of Buddhism to Ceylon. By-and-by he sent for his sister Sanghamitta, who had entered the order at the same time as himself, and whose help was needed, some of the king’s female relations having signified their wish to become nuns. On leaving India, she took with her a branch of the sacred Bo tree at Buddha Gaya, under which Sâkyamuni had become Buddha. Of how the tree has grown and still lives we have an account in Davids’ “Buddhism.” He quotes the words of Sir Emerson Tennent, that it is “the oldest historical tree in the world;” but this must be denied if it be true, as Eitel says, that the tree at Buddha Gaya, from which the slip that grew to be this tree was taken more than 2000 years ago, is itself still living in its place. We must conclude that Fâ-Hien, when in Ceylon, heard neither of Mahinda nor Sanghamitta.
(6) This should be the pippala, or bodhidruma, commonly referred to in connection with Buddha as the Bo tree, under which he attained enlightenment. It’s odd that our author seems to confuse them. In what we learn about the tree here, we surely have his account of the planting, growth, and preservation of the famous Bo tree that still stands in Sri Lanka. As mentioned in a previous note, Asoka’s son, Mahinda, went to Sri Lanka as a missionary of Buddhism. Eventually, he called for his sister Sanghamitta, who had joined the order around the same time as him, and whose assistance was needed because some of the king’s female relatives expressed their desire to become nuns. When she left India, she took a branch from the sacred Bo tree at Buddha Gaya, where Sakyamuni attained enlightenment. We have an account of how the tree has grown and still thrives in Davids’ “Buddhism.” He quotes Sir Emerson Tennent’s words that it is “the oldest historical tree in the world;” however, this claim must be disputed if it is true, as Eitel states, that the tree at Buddha Gaya, from which the slip that grew into this tree was taken over 2000 years ago, is still alive in its original location. We must conclude that Fâ-Hien, during his time in Sri Lanka, did not hear about Mahinda or Sanghamitta.
(7) Compare what is said in chap. xvi, about the inquiries made at monasteries as to the standing of visitors in the monkhood, and duration of their ministry.
(7) Compare what is mentioned in chap. xvi about the questions asked at monasteries regarding the status of visitors in the monkhood and the length of their ministry.
(8) The phonetic values of the two Chinese characters here are in Sanskrit sa; and va, bo or bha. “Sabaean” is Mr. Beal’s reading of them, probably correct. I suppose the merchants were Arabs, forerunners of the so-called Moormen, who still form so important a part of the mercantile community in Ceylon.
(8) The pronunciation of the two Chinese characters here is similar to the Sanskrit words sa and va, or bo or bha. “Sabaean” is how Mr. Beal reads them, and that’s likely accurate. I assume the merchants were Arabs, early predecessors of the so-called Moormen, who still play a significant role in the trade community in Ceylon.
(9) A Kalpa, we have seen, denotes a great period of time; a period during which a physical universe is formed and destroyed. Asankhyeya denotes the highest sum for which a conventional term exists;—according to Chinese calculations equal to one followed by seventeen ciphers; according to Thibetan and Singhalese, equal to one followed by ninety-seven ciphers. Every Maha-kalpa consists of four Asankhyeya-kalpas. Eitel, p. 15.
(9) A Kalpa, as we've noted, represents a vast period of time; a time when a physical universe is created and then destroyed. Asankhyeya refers to the largest number for which there is a commonly used term; according to Chinese calculations, this is equivalent to one followed by seventeen zeros; according to Tibetan and Sinhalese, it's one followed by ninety-seven zeros. Each Maha-kalpa is made up of four Asankhyeya-kalpas. Eitel, p. 15.
(10) See chapter ix.
See chapter 9.
(11) See chapter xi.
See chapter 11.
(12) He had been born in the Sakya house, to do for the world what the character of all his past births required, and he had done it.
(12) He was born into the Sakya family to fulfill the purpose that all his past lives demanded, and he accomplished it.
(13) They could no more see him, the World-honoured one. Compare the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 89, 121, and note on p. 89.
(13) They could no longer see him, the World-honored one. Compare the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xi, Buddhist Suttas, pp. 89, 121, and note on p. 89.
(14) Sudana or Sudatta was the name of the Bodhisattva in the birth which
preceded his appearance as Sâkyamuni or Gotama, when he became the Supreme
Buddha. This period is known as the Vessantara Jataka, of which Hardy, M. B.,
pp. 116-124, gives a long account; see also “Buddhist Birth
Stories,” the Nidana Katha, p. 158. In it, as Sudana, he fulfilled
“the Perfections,” his distinguishing attribute being entire
self-renunciation and alms-giving, so that in the Nidana Katha is made to say
(“Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 159):—
“This earth, unconscious though she be, and ignorant of joy or grief,
Even she by my free-giving’s mighty power was shaken seven
times.”
Then, when he passed away, he appeared in the Tushita heaven, to enter in
due time the womb of Maha-maya, and be born as Sâkyamuni.
(14) Sudana or Sudatta was the name of the Bodhisattva in the life before he became Sâkyamuni or Gotama, when he achieved the status of the Supreme Buddha. This time is known as the Vessantara Jataka, which Hardy, M. B., covers extensively on pages 116-124; see also “Buddhist Birth Stories,” the Nidana Katha, page 158. In this story, as Sudana, he practiced “the Perfections,” with his main trait being complete selflessness and generosity, as noted in the Nidana Katha where it states (“Buddhist Birth Stories,” p. 159):—
“This earth, though unaware and oblivious to joy or sorrow,
Even she was shaken seven times by the power of my giving.”
Then, after he passed away, he went to the Tushita heaven, to eventually enter the womb of Maha-maya and be born as Sâkyamuni.
(15) I take the name Sama from Beal’s revised version. He says in a note that the Sama Jataka, as well as the Vessantara, is represented in the Sanchi sculptures. But what the Sama Jataka was I do not yet know. But adopting this name, the two Chinese characters in the text should be translated “the change into Sama.” Rémusat gives for them, “la transformation en eclair;” Beal, in his first version, “his appearance as a bright flash of light;” Giles, “as a flash of lightning.” Julien’s Methode does not give the phonetic value in Sanskrit of {.}.
(15) I take the name Sama from Beal’s revised version. He mentions in a note that the Sama Jataka, along with the Vessantara, is shown in the Sanchi sculptures. However, I still don’t know what the Sama Jataka actually is. By choosing this name, the two Chinese characters in the text should be translated as “the change into Sama.” Rémusat translates them as “la transformation en eclair;” Beal, in his first version, translates it as “his appearance as a bright flash of light;” and Giles translates it as “a flash of lightning.” Julien’s Methode doesn’t provide the phonetic value in Sanskrit for {.}.
(16) In an analysis of the number of times and the different forms in which Sâkyamuni had appeared in his Jataka births, given by Hardy (M. B., p. 100), it is said that he had appeared six times as an elephant; ten times as a deer; and four times as a horse.
(16) In an analysis of how often and in what various forms Sâkyamuni appeared in his Jataka births, as noted by Hardy (M. B., p. 100), it says he appeared six times as an elephant, ten times as a deer, and four times as a horse.
(17) Chaitya is a general term designating all places and objects of religious worship which have a reference to ancient Buddhas, and including therefore Stupas and temples as well as sacred relics, pictures, statues, &c. It is defined as “a fane,” “a place for worship and presenting offerings.” Eitel, p. 141. The hill referred to is the sacred hill of Mihintale, about eight miles due east of the Bo tree;—Davids’ Buddhism, pp. 230, 231.
(17) Chaitya is a broad term that refers to all places and items of religious worship connected to ancient Buddhas. This includes stupas, temples, sacred relics, pictures, statues, etc. It is defined as “a shrine,” “a place for worship and making offerings.” Eitel, p. 141. The hill mentioned is the holy hill of Mihintale, located about eight miles directly east of the Bo tree;—Davids’ Buddhism, pp. 230, 231.
(18) Eitel says (p. 31): “A famous ascetic, the founder of a school, which flourished in Ceylon, A.D. 400.” But Fâ-Hien gives no intimation of Dharma-gupta’s founding a school.
(18) Eitel says (p. 31): “A famous ascetic, the founder of a school, which thrived in Ceylon, A.D. 400.” But Fâ-Hien doesn’t mention Dharma-gupta starting a school.
CHAPTER XXXIX.
CREMATION OF AN ARHAT. SERMON OF A DEVOTEE.
South of the city seven le there is a vihâra, called the Maha-vihâra, where 3000 monks reside. There had been among them a Sramana, of such lofty virtue, and so holy and pure in his observance of the disciplinary rules, that the people all surmised that he was an Arhat. When he drew near his end, the king came to examine into the point; and having assembled the monks according to rule, asked whether the bhikshu had attained to the full degree of Wisdom.(1) They answered in the affirmative, saying that he was an Arhat. The king accordingly, when he died, buried him after the fashion of an Arhat, as the regular rules prescribed. Four of five le east from the vihâra there was reared a great pile of firewood, which might be more than thirty cubits square, and the same in height. Near the top were laid sandal, aloe, and other kinds of fragrant wood.
South of the city, seven le away, there is a vihâra called the Maha-vihâra, where 3,000 monks live. Among them was a Sramana, known for his remarkable virtue and for being exceptionally holy and pure in following the rules. The people believed he was an Arhat. As he neared the end of his life, the king came to investigate the matter. After gathering the monks as per the usual protocol, he asked if the bhikshu had reached the highest level of Wisdom. They confirmed that he was indeed an Arhat. Therefore, when he died, the king arranged for his burial in the manner prescribed for an Arhat. Four or five le to the east of the vihâra, a large pyre of firewood was constructed, measuring more than thirty cubits on each side and the same height. At the top, sandalwood, aloe, and various other fragrant woods were placed.
On the four sides (of the pile) they made steps by which to ascend it. With clean white hair-cloth, almost like silk, they wrapped (the body) round and round.(2) They made a large carriage-frame, in form like our funeral car, but without the dragons and fishes.(3)
On all four sides of the pile, they built steps to climb up. They wrapped the body repeatedly in clean white hair-cloth, almost like silk. They created a large carriage frame shaped like our funeral car, but without the dragons and fish.
At the time of the cremation, the king and the people, in multitudes from all quarters, collected together, and presented offerings of flowers and incense. While they were following the car to the burial-ground,(4) the king himself presented flowers and incense. When this was finished, the car was lifted on the pile, all over which oil of sweet basil was poured, and then a light was applied. While the fire was blazing, every one, with a reverent heart, pulled off his upper garment, and threw it, with his feather-fan and umbrella, from a distance into the midst of the flames, to assist the burning. When the cremation was over, they collected and preserved the bones, and proceeded to erect a tope. Fâ-Hien had not arrived in time (to see the distinguished Shaman) alive, and only saw his burial.
At the time of the cremation, the king and a large crowd from all around gathered together and offered flowers and incense. As they followed the cart to the burial ground, the king himself presented flowers and incense. Once this was done, the cart was placed on the pyre, and oil of sweet basil was poured over it before a fire was lit. While the flames blazed, everyone, with respect, removed their upper garments and threw them, along with their feather fans and umbrellas, from a distance into the flames to aid the cremation. After the cremation was completed, they collected and preserved the bones and began to build a stupa. Fâ-Hien had not arrived in time to see the distinguished Shaman alive and only witnessed his burial.
At that time the king,(5) who was a sincere believer in the Law of Buddha and wished to build a new vihâra for the monks, first convoked a great assembly. After giving the monks a meal of rice, and presenting his offerings (on the occasion), he selected a pair of first-rate oxen, the horns of which were grandly decorated with gold, silver, and the precious substances. A golden plough had been provided, and the king himself turned up a furrow on the four sides of the ground within which the building was supposed to be. He then endowed the community of the monks with the population, fields, and houses, writing the grant on plates of metal, (to the effect) that from that time onwards, from generation to generation, no one should venture to annul or alter it.
At that time, the king, who truly believed in the teachings of Buddha and wanted to build a new vihara for the monks, called together a large assembly. After providing a meal of rice for the monks and making his offerings, he chose a pair of top-quality oxen, adorned with golden and silver decorations on their horns. A golden plow was brought in, and the king himself plowed a furrow around the area where the building was to be constructed. He then granted the monks the land, fields, and houses, recording this on metal plates, stating that from that point on, for generations to come, no one should dare to change or revoke it.
In this country Fâ-Hien heard an Indian devotee, who was reciting a Sutra from the pulpit, say:—“Buddha’s alms-bowl was at first in Vaisali, and now it is in Gandhara.(6) After so many hundred years” (he gave, when Fâ-Hien heard him, the exact number of years, but he has forgotten it), “it will go to Western Tukhara;(7) after so many hundred years, to Khoten; after so many hundred years, to Kharachar;(8) after so many hundred years, to the land of Han; after so many hundred years, it will come to Sinhala; and after so many hundred years, it will return to Central India. After that, it will ascend to the Tushita heaven; and when the Bodhisattva Maitreya sees it, he will say with a sigh, ‘The alms-bowl of Sâkyamuni Buddha is come;’ and with all the devas he will present to it flowers and incense for seven days. When these have expired, it will return to Jambudvipa, where it will be received by the king of the sea nagas, and taken into his naga palace. When Maitreya shall be about to attain to perfect Wisdom (and become Buddha), it will again separate into four bowls,(9) which will return to the top of mount Anna,(9) whence they came. After Maitreya has become Buddha, the four deva kings will again think of the Buddha (with their bowls as they did in the case of the previous Buddha). The thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa, indeed, will all use the same alms-bowl; and when the bowl has disappeared, the Law of Buddha will go on gradually to be extinguished. After that extinction has taken place, the life of man will be shortened, till it is only a period of five years. During this period of a five years’ life, rice, butter, and oil will all vanish away, and men will become exceedingly wicked. The grass and trees which they lay hold of will change into swords and clubs, with which they will hurt, cut, and kill one another. Those among them on whom there is blessing will withdraw from society among the hills; and when the wicked have exterminated one another, they will again come forth, and say among themselves, ‘The men of former times enjoyed a very great longevity; but through becoming exceedingly wicked, and doing all lawless things, the length of our life has been shortened and reduced even to five years. Let us now unite together in the practice of what is good, cherishing a gentle and sympathising heart, and carefully cultivating good faith and righteousness. When each one in this way practises that faith and righteousness, life will go on to double its length till it reaches 80,000 years. When Maitreya appears in the world, and begins to turn the wheel of his Law, he will in the first place save those among the disciples of the Law left by the Sakya who have quitted their families, and those who have accepted the three Refuges, undertaken the five Prohibitions and the eight Abstinences, and given offerings to the three Precious Ones; secondly and thirdly, he will save those between whom and conversion there is a connexion transmitted from the past.’”(10)
In this country, Fâ-Hien heard an Indian devotee, who was reciting a Sutra from the pulpit, say: “Buddha’s alms-bowl was originally in Vaisali, and now it’s in Gandhara. After so many hundreds of years” (he mentioned the exact number of years, but Fâ-Hien has forgotten it), “it will go to Western Tukhara; after so many hundreds of years, to Khoten; after so many hundreds of years, to Kharachar; after so many hundreds of years, to the land of Han; after so many hundreds of years, it will come to Sinhala; and after so many hundreds of years, it will return to Central India. After that, it will ascend to the Tushita heaven; when the Bodhisattva Maitreya sees it, he will sigh and say, ‘The alms-bowl of Sâkyamuni Buddha has arrived,’ and along with all the devas, he will offer flowers and incense for seven days. After these days pass, it will return to Jambudvipa, where it will be received by the king of the sea nagas and taken into his naga palace. When Maitreya is about to attain perfect Wisdom (and become Buddha), it will again split into four bowls, which will go back to the top of mount Anna, from where they came. After Maitreya becomes Buddha, the four deva kings will remember Buddha (with their bowls as they did for the previous Buddha). The thousand Buddhas of this Bhadra-kalpa will all use the same alms-bowl; and when the bowl disappears, the Law of Buddha will gradually be extinguished. Once that extinction happens, human lifespan will shorten to just five years. During this five-year period, rice, butter, and oil will disappear, and people will become incredibly wicked. The grass and trees they grab will turn into swords and clubs, which they will use to harm, cut, and kill each other. Those who are blessed will retreat to the hills; and when the wicked have wiped each other out, they will come back and say to one another, ‘People in the past lived very long lives; but because we’ve become extremely wicked and done all sorts of wrongful acts, our lifespan has been cut down to just five years. Let’s come together to practice goodness, nurture compassionate hearts, and carefully cultivate faith and righteousness. When everyone practices this faith and righteousness, lifespan will start to double until it reaches 80,000 years. When Maitreya appears in the world and begins to spread his teachings, he will first save those among the disciples of the Law left by the Sakya who have renounced their families, and those who have taken the three Refuges, followed the five Precepts, the eight Abstinences, and made offerings to the three Precious Ones; secondly and thirdly, he will help those with a past connection to conversion.”
(Such was the discourse), and Fâ-Hien wished to write it down as a portion of doctrine; but the man said, “This is taken from no Sutra, it is only the utterance of my own mind.”
(Such was the discourse), and Fâ-Hien wanted to write it down as a part of the teachings; but the man said, “This is not from any Sutra, it’s just my own thoughts.”
NOTES
NOTES
(1) Possibly, “and asked the bhikshu,” &c. I prefer the other way of construing, however.
(1) Possibly, “and asked the monk,” etc. I prefer the other interpretation, though.
(2) It seems strange that this should have been understood as a wrapping of the immense pyre with the cloth. There is nothing in the text to necessitate such a version, but the contrary. Compare “Buddhist Suttas,” pp. 92, 93.
(2) It seems odd that this was interpreted as wrapping the huge pyre with the cloth. There's nothing in the text that supports this interpretation; in fact, it suggests the opposite. See “Buddhist Suttas,” pp. 92, 93.
(3) See the description of a funeral car and its decorations in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xxviii, the Li Ki, Book XIX. Fâ-Hien’s {.} {.}, “in this (country),” which I have expressed by “our,” shows that whatever notes of this cremation he had taken at the time, the account in the text was composed after his return to China, and when he had the usages there in his mind and perhaps before his eyes. This disposes of all difficulty occasioned by the “dragons” and “fishes.” The {.} at the end is merely the concluding particle.
(3) See the description of a funeral car and its decorations in the Sacred Books of the East, vol. xxviii, the Li Ki, Book XIX. Fâ-Hien’s {.} {.}, “in this (country),” which I’ve translated as “our,” indicates that whatever notes he took about this cremation at the time, the account in the text was written after he returned to China, with the customs there in his mind and perhaps in view. This clears up any confusion caused by the “dragons” and “fishes.” The {.} at the end is just the concluding particle.
(4) The pyre served the purpose of a burial-ground or grave, and hence our author writes of it as such.
(4) The pyre acted as a burial ground or grave, which is why our author refers to it that way.
(5) This king must have been Maha-nana (A.D. 410-432). In the time of his predecessor, Upatissa (A.D. 368-410), the pitakas were first translated into Singhalese. Under Maha-nana, Buddhaghosha wrote his commentaries. Both were great builders of vihâras. See the Mahavansa, pp. 247, foll.
(5) This king was probably Maha-nana (A.D. 410-432). During his predecessor Upatissa's reign (A.D. 368-410), the pitakas were first translated into Sinhalese. Under Maha-nana, Buddhaghosha wrote his commentaries. Both were major builders of vihâras. See the Mahavansa, pp. 247, foll.
(6) See chapter xii. Fâ-Hien had seen it at Purushapura, which Eitel says was “the ancient capital of Gandhara.”
(6) See chapter xii. Fâ-Hien had seen it at Purushapura, which Eitel says was “the ancient capital of Gandhara.”
(7) Western Tukhara ({.} {.}) is the same probably as the Tukhara ({.}) of chapter xii, a king of which is there described as trying to carry off the bowl from Purushapura.
(7) Western Tukhara ({.} {.}) is probably the same as the Tukhara ({.}) mentioned in chapter twelve, where a king is described as attempting to steal the bowl from Purushapura.
(8) North of the Bosteng lake at the foot of the Thien-shan range (E. H., p. 56).
(8) North of Bosteng Lake at the base of the Tien Shan mountain range (E. H., p. 56).
(9) See chap. xii, note 9. Instead of “Anna” the Chinese recensions have Vina; but Vina or Vinataka, and Ana for Sudarsana are names of one or other of the concentric circles of rocks surrounding mount Meru, the fabled home of the deva guardians of the bowl.
(9) See chap. xii, note 9. Instead of “Anna,” the Chinese versions have Vina; however, Vina or Vinataka, and Ana for Sudarsana are names of one or more of the concentric circles of rocks surrounding Mount Meru, the legendary home of the deva guardians of the bowl.
(10) That is, those whose Karma in the past should be rewarded by such conversion in the present.
(10) In other words, those whose past Karma deserves to be rewarded with such a transformation in the present.
CHAPTER XL.
AFTER TWO YEARS TAKES SHIP FOR CHINA. DISASTROUS PASSAGE TO JAVA; AND THENCE TO
CHINA; ARRIVES AT SHAN-TUNG; AND GOES TO NANKING. CONCLUSION OR L’ENVOI
BY ANOTHER WRITER.
Fâ-Hien abode in this country two years; and, in addition (to his acquisitions in Patna), succeeded in getting a copy of the Vinaya-pitaka of the Mahisasakah (school);(1) the Dirghagama and Samyuktagama(2) (Sûtras); and also the Samyukta-sanchaya-pitaka;(3)—all being works unknown in the land of Han. Having obtained these Sanskrit works, he took passage in a large merchantman, on board of which there were more than 200 men, and to which was attached by a rope a smaller vessel, as a provision against damage or injury to the large one from the perils of the navigation. With a favourable wind, they proceeded eastwards for three days, and then they encountered a great wind. The vessel sprang a leak and the water came in. The merchants wished to go to the small vessel; but the men on board it, fearing that too many would come, cut the connecting rope. The merchants were greatly alarmed, feeling their risk of instant death. Afraid that the vessel would fill, they took their bulky goods and threw them into the water. Fâ-Hien also took his pitcher(4) and washing-basin, with some other articles, and cast them into the sea; but fearing that the merchants would cast overboard his books and images, he could only think with all his heart of Kwan-she-yin,(5) and commit his life to (the protection of) the church of the land of Han,(6) (saying in effect), “I have travelled far in search of our Law. Let me, by your dread and supernatural (power), return from my wanderings, and reach my resting-place!”
Fâ-Hien stayed in this country for two years; and, in addition to his gains in Patna, he managed to get a copy of the Vinaya-pitaka of the Mahisasakah school; the Dirghagama and Samyuktagama (Sûtras); and also the Samyukta-sanchaya-pitaka—all works that were unknown in the land of Han. After obtaining these Sanskrit texts, he boarded a large merchant ship, which was carrying more than 200 people, and had a smaller vessel tied to it by a rope as a precaution against damage or accidents during the journey. With favorable winds, they traveled east for three days before encountering a violent storm. The ship began to leak and took on water. The merchants wanted to transfer to the smaller vessel; however, the crew on that boat, fearing too many would crowd in, cut the connecting rope. The merchants were extremely worried, fearing they were about to die. In their panic, they started throwing their heavy goods overboard. Fâ-Hien also tossed his pitcher and washing basin, along with some other belongings, into the sea; but fearing the merchants would throw his books and images overboard, he could only sincerely think of Kwan-she-yin and entrust his life to the protection of the church in the land of Han, saying in essence, “I have traveled far in search of our Law. May I, through your fearsome and supernatural power, return from my journey and reach my safe haven!”
In this way the tempest(7) continued day and night, till on the thirteenth day the ship was carried to the side of an island, where, on the ebbing of the tide, the place of the leak was discovered, and it was stopped, on which the voyage was resumed. On the sea (hereabouts) there are many pirates, to meet with whom is speedy death. The great ocean spreads out, a boundless expanse. There is no knowing east or west; only by observing the sun, moon, and stars was it possible to go forward. If the weather were dark and rainy, (the ship) went as she was carried by the wind, without any definite course. In the darkness of the night, only the great waves were to be seen, breaking on one another, and emitting a brightness like that of fire, with huge turtles and other monsters of the deep (all about). The merchants were full of terror, not knowing where they were going. The sea was deep and bottomless, and there was no place where they could drop anchor and stop. But when the sky became clear, they could tell east and west, and (the ship) again went forward in the right direction. If she had come on any hidden rock, there would have been no way of escape.
In this way, the storm continued day and night until the thirteenth day, when the ship was driven to the shore of an island. As the tide went out, they found the source of the leak and fixed it, allowing the voyage to continue. In these waters, there are many pirates, and encountering them means certain death. The vast ocean stretches out, an endless expanse. There's no way to know east or west; they could only navigate by observing the sun, moon, and stars. If the weather turned dark and rainy, the ship would be at the mercy of the wind, drifting without a clear course. In the pitch-black night, all they could see were the huge waves crashing into each other, glowing like fire, along with the giant turtles and other sea monsters surrounding them. The merchants were filled with fear, unsure of where they were headed. The sea was deep and bottomless, with no place to anchor and stop. However, when the sky cleared, they could identify east and west, and the ship could move forward in the right direction. If they had hit a hidden rock, there would have been no way to escape.
After proceeding in this way for rather more than ninety days, they arrived at a country called Java-dvipa, where various forms of error and Brahmanism are flourishing, while Buddhism in it is not worth speaking of. After staying there for five months, (Fâ-Hien) again embarked in another large merchantman, which also had on board more than 200 men. They carried provisions for fifty days, and commenced the voyage on the sixteenth day of the fourth month.
After going on like this for over ninety days, they reached a place called Java-dvipa, where different types of error and Brahmanism are thriving, while Buddhism there is hardly worth mentioning. After staying for five months, (Fâ-Hien) boarded another large merchant ship, which also had over 200 people on it. They brought enough supplies for fifty days and started the journey on the sixteenth day of the fourth month.
Fâ-Hien kept his retreat on board the ship. They took a course to the north-east, intending to fetch Kwang-chow. After more than a month, when the night-drum had sounded the second watch, they encountered a black wind and tempestuous rain, which threw the merchants and passengers into consternation. Fâ-Hien again with all his heart directed his thoughts to Kwan-she-yin and the monkish communities of the land of Han; and, through their dread and mysterious protection, was preserved to day-break. After day-break, the Brahmans deliberated together and said, “It is having this Sramana on board which has occasioned our misfortune and brought us this great and bitter suffering. Let us land the bhikshu and place him on some island-shore. We must not for the sake of one man allow ourselves to be exposed to such imminent peril.” A patron of Fâ-Hien, however, said to them, “If you land the bhikshu, you must at the same time land me; and if you do not, then you must kill me. If you land this Sramana, when I get to the land of Han, I will go to the king, and inform against you. The king also reveres and believes the Law of Buddha, and honours the bhikshus.” The merchants hereupon were perplexed, and did not dare immediately to land (Fâ-Hien).
Fâ-Hien stayed on the ship. They headed northeast, planning to reach Kwang-chow. After more than a month, when the night watch signaled the second watch, they were hit by a strong wind and heavy rain that shocked the merchants and passengers. Fâ-Hien once again focused his thoughts on Kwan-she-yin and the Buddhist communities in Han; through their fear and mysterious protection, he managed to survive until dawn. When morning came, the Brahmans talked among themselves and said, “Having this Sramana on board has caused our misfortune and brought us this great suffering. We should drop the bhikshu off on some island shore. We can't risk our lives for one person.” However, one of Fâ-Hien's supporters said to them, “If you leave the bhikshu behind, you have to leave me too; if not, then you have to kill me. If you abandon this Sramana, when I reach Han, I will go to the king and report you. The king respects and follows the Law of Buddha and honors the bhikshus.” The merchants were confused and didn't dare to immediately leave Fâ-Hien behind.
At this time the sky continued very dark and gloomy, and the sailing-masters looked at one another and made mistakes. More than seventy days passed (from their leaving Java), and the provisions and water were nearly exhausted. They used the salt-water of the sea for cooking, and carefully divided the (fresh) water, each man getting two pints. Soon the whole was nearly gone, and the merchants took counsel and said, “At the ordinary rate of sailing we ought to have reached Kwang-chow, and now the time is passed by many days;—must we not have held a wrong course?” Immediately they directed the ship to the north-west, looking out for land; and after sailing day and night for twelve days, they reached the shore on the south of mount Lao,(8) on the borders of the prefecture of Ch’ang-kwang,(8) and immediately got good water and vegetables. They had passed through many perils and hardships, and had been in a state of anxious apprehension for many days together; and now suddenly arriving at this shore, and seeing those (well-known) vegetables, the lei and kwoh,(9) they knew indeed that it was the land of Han. Not seeing, however, any inhabitants nor any traces of them, they did not know whereabouts they were. Some said that they had not yet got to Kwang-chow, and others that they had passed it. Unable to come to a definite conclusion, (some of them) got into a small boat and entered a creek, to look for some one of whom they might ask what the place was. They found two hunters, whom they brought back with them, and then called on Fâ-Hien to act as interpreter and question them. Fâ-Hien first spoke assuringly to them, and then slowly and distinctly asked them, “Who are you?” They replied, “We are disciples of Buddha?” He then asked, “What are you looking for among these hills?” They began to lie,(10) and said, “To-morrow is the fifteenth day of the seventh month. We wanted to get some peaches to present(11) to Buddha.” He asked further, “What country is this?” They replied, “This is the border of the prefecture of Ch’ang-kwang, a part of Ts’ing-chow under the (ruling) House of Tsin.” When they heard this, the merchants were glad, immediately asked for (a portion of) their money and goods, and sent men to Ch’ang-kwang city.
At this point, the sky remained very dark and gloomy, and the ship captains looked at each other, making mistakes. More than seventy days had passed since they left Java, and their food and water were almost gone. They used seawater for cooking and carefully rationed the (fresh) water, with each person getting two pints. Soon there was hardly any left, and the merchants discussed among themselves and said, “At our usual sailing speed, we should have reached Kwang-chow by now, and we've gone way past the expected time; did we take the wrong route?” They immediately directed the ship northwest, searching for land. After sailing day and night for twelve days, they reached the shore south of Mount Lao, on the outskirts of the Ch’ang-kwang prefecture, and found good water and vegetables. They had endured many dangers and hardships and had been anxious for several days; now, suddenly arriving at this shore and seeing the familiar vegetables, the lei and kwoh, they realized they were indeed in Han territory. However, not seeing any inhabitants or signs of them, they were unsure of their exact location. Some thought they had not yet reached Kwang-chow, while others believed they had already passed it. Unable to come to a clear conclusion, some of them got into a small boat and entered a creek to find someone to ask where they were. They discovered two hunters and brought them back, then called on Fâ-Hien to act as interpreter and question them. Fâ-Hien first spoke to them reassuringly, then slowly and clearly asked, “Who are you?” They replied, “We are disciples of Buddha.” He continued, “What are you looking for among these hills?” They started to lie, saying, “Tomorrow is the fifteenth day of the seventh month. We wanted to get some peaches to offer to Buddha.” He asked further, “What country is this?” They responded, “This is the border of the Ch’ang-kwang prefecture, a part of Ts’ing-chow under the (ruling) House of Tsin.” When the merchants heard this, they were relieved, immediately asked for some of their money and goods, and sent men to Ch’ang-kwang city.
The prefect Le E was a reverent believer in the Law of Buddha. When he heard that a Sramana had arrived in a ship across the sea, bringing with him books and images, he immediately came to the seashore with an escort to meet (the traveller), and receive the books and images, and took them back with him to the seat of his government. On this the merchants went back in the direction of Yang-chow;(12) (but) when (Fâ-Hien) arrived at Ts’ing-chow, (the prefect there)(13) begged him (to remain with him) for a winter and a summer. After the summer retreat was ended, Fâ-Hien, having been separated for a long time from his (fellow-)masters, wished to hurry to Ch’ang-gan; but as the business which he had in hand was important, he went south to the Capital;(14) and at an interview with the masters (there) exhibited the Sûtras and the collection of the Vinaya (which he had procured).
The prefect Le E was a devoted follower of the Buddha's teachings. When he found out that a monk had arrived by ship from overseas, bringing books and images, he immediately went to the beach with an escort to greet the traveler, receive the books and images, and take them back to his government office. The merchants then headed back towards Yang-chow; however, when Fâ-Hien reached Ts’ing-chow, the prefect there asked him to stay for a winter and a summer. After the summer retreat was over, Fâ-Hien, having been separated from his fellow masters for a long time, wanted to rush to Ch’ang-gan; but since the matters he needed to attend to were important, he went south to the Capital. There, he met with the masters and presented the Sûtras and the collection of the Vinaya that he had obtained.
After Fâ-Hien set out from Ch’ang-gan, it took him six years to reach Central India;(15) stoppages there extended over (other) six years; and on his return it took him three years to reach Ts’ing-chow. The countries through which he passed were a few under thirty. From the sandy desert westwards on to India, the beauty of the dignified demeanour of the monkhood and of the transforming influence of the Law was beyond the power of language fully to describe; and reflecting how our masters had not heard any complete account of them, he therefore (went on) without regarding his own poor life, or (the dangers to be encountered) on the sea upon his return, thus incurring hardships and difficulties in a double form. He was fortunate enough, through the dread power of the three Honoured Ones,(15) to receive help and protection in his perils; and therefore he wrote out an account of his experiences, that worthy readers might share with him in what he had heard and said.(15)
After Fâ-Hien left Ch’ang-gan, it took him six years to reach Central India; he stayed there for another six years, and on his return, it took him three years to get to Ts’ing-chow. He traveled through nearly thirty countries. From the sandy desert to India, the grace of the monks and the transformative power of the Law were beyond words; realizing that our teachers hadn’t heard a complete account of these experiences, he continued his journey disregarding his own frail life and the dangers of the sea on his way back, enduring hardships and challenges in twofold. Thanks to the protective power of the three Honoured Ones, he was fortunate enough to receive help during his trials; as a result, he wrote down his experiences so that deserving readers could share in what he had learned and witnessed.
It was in the year Keah-yin,(16) the twelfth year of the period E-he of the (Eastern) Tsin dynasty, the year-star being in Virgo-Libra, in the summer, at the close of the period of retreat, that I met the devotee Fâ-Hien. On his arrival I lodged him with myself in the winter study,(17) and there, in our meetings for conversation, I asked him again and again about his travels. The man was modest and complaisant, and answered readily according to the truth. I thereupon advised him to enter into details where he had at first only given a summary, and he proceeded to relate all things in order from the beginning to the end. He said himself, “When I look back on what I have gone through, my heart is involuntarily moved, and the perspiration flows forth. That I encountered danger and trod the most perilous places, without thinking of or sparing myself, was because I had a definite aim, and thought of nothing but to do my best in my simplicity and straightforwardness. Thus it was that I exposed my life where death seemed inevitable, if I might accomplish but a ten-thousandth part of what I hoped.” These words affected me in turn, and I thought:—“This man is one of those who have seldom been seen from ancient times to the present. Since the Great Doctrine flowed on to the East there has been no one to be compared with Hien in his forgetfulness of self and search for the Law. Henceforth I know that the influence of sincerity finds no obstacle, however great, which it does not overcome, and that force of will does not fail to accomplish whatever service it undertakes. Does not the accomplishing of such service arise from forgetting (and disregarding) what is (generally) considered as important, and attaching importance to what is (generally) forgotten?”
It was the year Keah-yin, the twelfth year of the E-he period of the (Eastern) Tsin dynasty, with the year-star in Virgo-Libra, during the summer, at the end of the retreat period, that I met the devotee Fâ-Hien. When he arrived, I had him stay with me in the winter study, and during our conversations, I asked him repeatedly about his travels. He was modest and agreeable, answering truthfully. I encouraged him to share more details instead of just a summary, and he began to recount everything in order from start to finish. He said, “When I reflect on my experiences, my heart is deeply moved, and I start to sweat. The fact that I faced danger and walked through the most perilous places without concern for myself was because I had a clear goal and focused solely on doing my best with sincerity and honesty. That’s how I risked my life when death seemed unavoidable, hoping to achieve even a tiny fraction of what I aimed for.” His words touched me, and I thought, “This man is one of those rare individuals seen from ancient times to the present. Since the Great Doctrine spread to the East, no one compares to Hien in his selflessness and pursuit of the Law. From now on, I realize that the power of sincerity can overcome any obstacle, no matter how great, and that determination will always achieve its intended purpose. Doesn’t achieving such goals stem from ignoring what is usually deemed important and prioritizing what is typically overlooked?”
NOTES
NOTES
(1) No. 1122 in Nanjio’s Catalogue, translated into Chinese by Buddhajiva and a Chinese Sramana about A.D. 425. Mahisasakah means “the school of the transformed earth,” or “the sphere within which the Law of Buddha is influential.” The school is one of the subdivisions of the Sarvastivadah.
(1) No. 1122 in Nanjio’s Catalogue, translated into Chinese by Buddhajiva and a Chinese monk around A.D. 425. Mahisasakah means “the school of the transformed earth” or “the area where the Buddha's Law is effective.” This school is one of the sub-divisions of the Sarvastivadah.
(2) Nanjio’s 545 and 504. The Agamas are Sûtras of the hinayana, divided, according to Eitel, pp. 4, 5, into four classes, the first or Dirghagamas (long Agamas) being treatises on right conduct, while the third class contains the Samyuktagamas (mixed Agamas).
(2) Nanjio’s 545 and 504. The Agamas are Sûtras of the hinayana, divided, according to Eitel, pp. 4, 5, into four classes, with the first or Dirghagamas (long Agamas) focusing on right conduct, while the third class includes the Samyuktagamas (mixed Agamas).
(3) Meaning “Miscellaneous Collections;” a sort of fourth Pitaka. See Nanjio’s fourth division of the Canon, containing Indian and Chinese miscellaneous works. But Dr. Davids says that no work of this name is known either in Sanskrit or Pâli literature.
(3) Meaning “Miscellaneous Collections;” a type of fourth Pitaka. See Nanjio’s fourth division of the Canon, which includes various Indian and Chinese works. However, Dr. Davids states that no work by this name is recognized in either Sanskrit or Pâli literature.
(4) We have in the text a phonetisation of the Sanskrit Kundika, which is explained in Eitel by the two characters that follow, as=“washing basin,” but two things evidently are intended.
(4) In the text, we have a phonetic representation of the Sanskrit Kundika, which Eitel explains as “washing basin” through the two characters that follow. However, it’s clear that two meanings are intended.
(5) See chap. xvi, note 23.
(5) See chap. 16, note 23.
(6) At his novitiate Fâ-Hien had sought the refuge of the “three Precious Ones” (the three Refuges {.} {.} of last chapter), of which the congregation or body of the monks was one; and here his thoughts turn naturally to the branch of it in China. His words in his heart were not exactly words of prayer, but very nearly so.
(6) During his training, Fâ-Hien had sought the protection of the “three Precious Ones” (the three Refuges {.} {.} from the last chapter), one of which was the community of monks; and at this point, he naturally reflected on the branch of it in China. The thoughts in his heart weren't quite prayers, but they were close.
(7) In the text {.} {.}, ta-fung, “the great wind,”=the typhoon.
(7) In the text {.} {.}, ta-fung, “the great wind,” = the typhoon.
(8) They had got to the south of the Shan-tung promontory, and the foot of mount Lao, which still rises under the same name on the extreme south of the peninsula, east from Keao Chow, and having the district of Tsieh-mih on the east of it. All the country there is included in the present Phing-too Chow of the department Lae-chow. The name Phing-too dates from the Han dynasty, but under the dynasty of the After Ch’e {.} {.}, (A.D. 479-501), it was changed into Ch’ang-kwang. Fâ-Hien may have lived, and composed the narrative of his travels, after the change of name was adopted. See the Topographical Tables of the different Dynasties ({.} {.} {.} {.} {.}), published in 1815.
(8) They had reached the southern part of the Shan-tung promontory and the base of Mount Lao, which is still known by that name at the far south of the peninsula, east of Keao Chow, with the district of Tsieh-mih to the east of it. This entire area is now part of the modern Phing-too Chow in the Lae-chow department. The name Phing-too goes back to the Han dynasty, but during the After Ch’e dynasty (A.D. 479-501), it was changed to Ch’ang-kwang. Fâ-Hien may have lived and written about his travels after this name change was established. See the Topographical Tables of the different Dynasties, published in 1815.
(9) What these vegetables exactly were it is difficult to say; and there are different readings of the characters for them. Williams’ Dictionary, under kwoh, brings the two names together in a phrase, but the rendering of it is simply “a soup of simples.” For two or three columns here, however, the text appears to me confused and imperfect.
(9) It's hard to say exactly what these vegetables were, and there are various interpretations of the characters for them. Williams’ Dictionary, under kwoh, combines the two names in a phrase, but it simply translates to “a soup of simples.” However, for two or three columns here, the text seems confusing and incomplete to me.
(10) I suppose these men were really hunters; and, when brought before Fâ-Hien, because he was a Sramana, they thought they would please him by saying they were disciples of Buddha. But what had disciples of Buddha to do with hunting and taking life? They were caught in their own trap, and said they were looking for peaches.
(10) I guess these guys were real hunters; and when they were brought before Fâ-Hien, since he was a Sramana, they thought they’d impress him by claiming to be disciples of Buddha. But what did disciples of Buddha have to do with hunting and causing death? They got caught in their own lies and said they were searching for peaches.
(11) The Chinese character here has occurred twice before, but in a different meaning and connexion. Rémusat, Beal, and Giles take it as equivalent to “to sacrifice.” But his followers do not “sacrifice” to Buddha. That is a priestly term, and should not be employed of anything done at Buddhistic services.
(11) The Chinese character here has appeared twice before, but with a different meaning and context. Rémusat, Beal, and Giles interpret it as equivalent to “to sacrifice.” However, his followers do not “sacrifice” to Buddha. That is a term used by priests and shouldn't be applied to anything done during Buddhist services.
(12) Probably the present department of Yang-chow in Keang-soo; but as I have said in a previous note, the narrative does not go on so clearly as it generally does.
(12) Probably the current department of Yang-chow in Keang-soo; but as I mentioned in a previous note, the narrative isn't as clear as it usually is.
(13) Was, or could, this prefect be Le E?
(13) Could this prefect be Le E?
(14) Probably not Ch’ang-gan, but Nan-king, which was the capital of the Eastern Tsin dynasty under another name.
(14) Probably not Ch’ang-gan, but Nanjing, which was the capital of the Eastern Tsin dynasty under a different name.
(15) The whole of this paragraph is probably Fâ-Hien’s own conclusion of his narrative. The second half of the second sentence, both in sentiment and style in the Chinese text, seems to necessitate our ascribing it to him, writing on the impulse of his own thoughts, in the same indirect form which he adopted for his whole narrative. There are, however, two peculiar phraseologies in it which might suggest the work of another hand. For the name India, where the first (15) is placed, a character is employed which is similarly applied nowhere else; and again, “the three Honoured Ones,” at which the second (15) is placed, must be the same as “the three Precious Ones,” which we have met with so often; unless we suppose that {.} {.} is printed in all the revisions for {.} {.}, “the World-honoured one,” which has often occurred. On the whole, while I accept this paragraph as Fâ-Hien’s own, I do it with some hesitation. That the following and concluding paragraph is from another hand, there can be no doubt. And it is as different as possible in style from the simple and straightforward narrative of Fâ-Hien.
(15) This paragraph is likely Fâ-Hien’s own summary of his narrative. The second half of the second sentence, both in tone and style in the Chinese text, seems to indicate that he wrote it based on his own thoughts, using the same indirect style he used throughout his narrative. However, there are two unusual phrases that could suggest someone else wrote it. For the name India, where the first (15) is placed, a character is used that isn’t found anywhere else; and again, “the three Honoured Ones,” located at the second (15), must refer to “the three Precious Ones,” which we have seen frequently, unless we assume that {.} {.} is used in all the revisions for {.} {.}, “the World-honoured one,” which has appeared regularly. Overall, while I consider this paragraph to be Fâ-Hien’s work, I do so with some uncertainty. There is no doubt that the following concluding paragraph is from a different author and it contrasts significantly in style with the simple and direct narrative of Fâ-Hien.
(16) There is an error of date here, for which it is difficult to account. The year Keah-yin was A.D. 414; but that was the tenth year of the period E-he, and not the twelfth, the cyclical designation of which was Ping-shin. According to the preceding paragraph, Fâ-Hien’s travels had occupied him fifteen years, so that counting from A.D. 399, the year Ke-hae, as that in which he set out, the year of his getting to Ts’ing-chow would have been Kwei-chow, the ninth year of the period E-he; and we might join on “This year Keah-yin” to that paragraph, as the date at which the narrative was written out for the bamboo-tablets and the silk, and then begins the Envoy, “In the twelfth year of E-he.” This would remove the error as it stands at present, but unfortunately there is a particle at the end of the second date ({.}), which seems to tie the twelfth year of E-he to Keah-yin, as another designation of it. The “year-star” is the planet Jupiter, the revolution of which, in twelve years, constitutes “a great year.” Whether it would be possible to fix exactly by mathematical calculation in what year Jupiter was in the Chinese zodiacal sign embracing part of both Virgo and Scorpio, and thereby help to solve the difficulty of the passage, I do not know, and in the meantime must leave that difficulty as I have found it.
(16) There’s a mistake with the date here that’s hard to explain. The year Keah-yin was A.D. 414; however, that was the tenth year of the E-he period, not the twelfth, which was called Ping-shin. According to the previous paragraph, Fâ-Hien’s travels took him fifteen years, so if we start counting from A.D. 399, the year Ke-hae when he set out, the year he arrived at Ts’ing-chow would have been Kwei-chow, the ninth year of the E-he period. We might connect “This year Keah-yin” to that paragraph as the date when the narrative was recorded for the bamboo tablets and silk, and then the Envoy begins with “In the twelfth year of E-he.” This would fix the current mistake, but unfortunately, there’s a particle at the end of the second date ({.}), which seems to link the twelfth year of E-he to Keah-yin as another designation for it. The “year-star” refers to the planet Jupiter, whose twelve-year cycle constitutes a “great year.” I’m not sure if it’s possible to precisely calculate which year Jupiter was in the Chinese zodiac sign that includes parts of both Virgo and Scorpio, and I’ll have to leave that issue as it is for now.
(17) We do not know who the writer of the Envoy was. “The winter study or library” would be the name of the apartment in his monastery or house, where he sat and talked with Fâ-Hien.
(17) We don’t know who wrote the Envoy. “The winter study or library” refers to the room in his monastery or home, where he sat and talked with Fâ-Hien.
Download ePUB
If you like this ebook, consider a donation!